JP2015057185A - Game system, game machine, and device for game - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To enhance working efficiency of confirmation work or the like of a game machine and a device for a game by a manager.SOLUTION: A game system includes: a game machine (a pachinko machine 2) in which a game by a possessed point is possible; and a device for the game (a card unit 3) which is communicably connected to the game machine and can convert game value of a player into the possessed point. The game system includes: display means (a display 54, a display 312) provided in at least one of the game machine and the device for the game; special state changeover means (management mode changeover parts 802, 902) for changing over the game system to a special state for a manager; and display control means (display control parts 801, 901) for performing display control of the display means. The display control means can display game machine information stored by the game machine on the display means in the special state, and can display device-for-game information stored by the device for the game.

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming system comprising a gaming machine capable of playing a game with points, and a gaming device that adds points using the gaming value owned by the player and is communicably connected to the gaming machine. The present invention relates to the gaming machine and the gaming device.

  As a conventional gaming system, an IC tag is attached to a game ball and a reading device for reading the IC tag is provided in the gaming machine, and information related to reading of the reading device is transmitted to the server device 280 of the game hall, thereby connecting to the server device. There is known a gaming system that can display an abnormality occurrence frequency of a gaming machine on a display (Patent Document 1).

  In addition, as a conventional gaming machine, a display area separate from the reel is provided on the front side, and the administrator switches to the administrator mode by operating the setting key switch, and the display area is managed exclusively for the administrator. A slot machine on which a person mode screen is displayed is known (Patent Document 2).

JP 2007-185261 A JP 2010-184012 A

  However, in the gaming system described in Patent Document 1, since the state of the gaming machine is displayed on the display of the server device installed away from the gaming machine, adjustment of the gaming machine is performed while checking the state of the gaming machine on the spot. Can not be done.

  In this respect, although cited document 2 describes a gaming machine that displays an administrator mode screen on a display screen provided on the front side, information on gaming devices connected to the gaming machine is disclosed. There is no description on how to confirm.

  The present invention has been conceived in view of the actual situation, and its purpose is that when a gaming machine and a gaming device are communicably connected to each other, the information on the one side is on the spot. It is to be able to confirm not only the information but also the information on the other side.

(1) The present invention is connected to a gaming machine (for example, a pachinko machine 2, a slot machine 2S) capable of playing a game with points (for example, the number of balls, points) and the gaming machine so as to be communicable. A gaming device (for example, card unit 3) capable of converting a player's own gaming value (for example, prepaid balance, number of balls, or number of balls) into points (for example, number of balls, points) A gaming system comprising:
Display means (for example, the display 54 of the pachinko machine 2, the liquid crystal display 510 of the slot machine 2S, the display 312 of the card unit 3) provided in at least one of the gaming machine and the gaming device;
Special state switching means (for example, steps S121 to S123 in FIG. 105, steps S141 and S142 in FIG. 107, steps S101 and S102 in FIG. 108) for switching the gaming system to a special state for managers (for example, manager mode). , S104)
Display control means (for example, display effect control board 53 of pachinko machine 2, effect control board 90 of slot machine 2S, display control unit 797 of card unit 3) for controlling the display means,
The display control means can display the gaming machine information stored in the gaming machine and the gaming apparatus information stored in the gaming apparatus on the display means in the special state. (For example, see steps S131 to S134 in FIG. 105, steps S151 to S154 in FIG. 107, step S105 in FIG. 108, and the storage information setting screen in FIG. 106).

  According to such a configuration, not only the gaming machine information but also the gaming device information can be displayed on the display means provided in at least one of the gaming machine and the gaming device in a special state. In one of the gaming machine and the gaming device, not only the information on one side can be confirmed on the spot, but also the information on the other side can be confirmed together. As a result, it is possible to increase work efficiency such as confirmation work of the gaming machine and gaming device by the administrator.

(2) The present invention relates to a gaming apparatus (for example, a prepaid balance, a number of balls, or a number of balls) owned by a player, which can be converted into a score (for example, the number of balls, a score). For example, a gaming machine (for example, a pachinko machine 2, a slot machine 2S) having a connecting portion (connectors 20, 220) for communicably connecting to the card unit 3) and capable of playing a game with a holding point,
Display means (for example, the display 54 of the pachinko machine 2, the liquid crystal display 510 of the slot machine 2S),
Special state switching means (for example, steps S141 and S142 in FIG. 107) for switching to the special state based on a switching signal for switching to a special state for the administrator (for example, the administrator mode);
Game device information receiving means (for example, steps S152 and S153 in FIG. 107) for receiving game device information stored in the game device from the game device;
Display control means (for example, display effect control board 53 of pachinko machine 2, effect control board 90 of slot machine 2S) for controlling the display means,
The display control means can display the gaming machine information stored in the gaming machine and the gaming apparatus information stored in the gaming apparatus on the display means in the special state. (For example, see steps S151 to S154 in FIG. 107 and the storage information setting screen in FIG. 106).

  According to such a configuration, in the special state, not only the gaming machine information but also the gaming device information can be displayed on the display means provided in the gaming machine. As well as information on the gaming device side. As a result, it is possible to increase work efficiency such as confirmation work of the gaming machine and gaming device by the administrator.

(3) The present invention provides a connection portion (connector 380) for connecting to a gaming machine (for example, pachinko machine 2, slot machine 2S) capable of playing a game with points (for example, number of balls, points). , 330), and a gaming device (for example, card unit 3) capable of converting a gaming value (for example, prepaid balance, number of possessed balls, or number of accumulated balls) into points,
Display means (for example, the indicator 312 of the card unit 3);
Based on a switching signal for switching to a special state for an administrator (for example, administrator mode), special state switching means for switching to the special state (for example, steps S121 to S123 in FIG. 105, steps S101 and S102 in FIG. 108). , S104)
Gaming machine information receiving means (for example, steps S132 and S133 in FIG. 105, step S105 in FIG. 108) for receiving gaming machine information stored in the gaming machine from the gaming machine;
Display control means for controlling the display means (for example, the display control unit 797 of the card unit 3),
The display control means can display the gaming machine information stored in the gaming machine and the gaming apparatus information stored in the gaming apparatus on the display means in the special state. (For example, see steps S131 to S134 in FIG. 105, step S105 in FIG. 108, and the storage information setting screen in FIG. 106).

  According to such a configuration, in the special state, not only the gaming device information but also the gaming machine information can be displayed on the display means provided in the gaming device. As well as being able to check the information on the side, you can also check the information on the gaming machine side. As a result, it is possible to increase work efficiency such as confirmation work of the gaming machine and gaming device by the administrator.

(4) The present invention is capable of converting a game value (for example, a prepaid balance, the number of possessed balls, or the number of accumulated balls) possessed by a player into a score (for example, the number of possessed balls, a score) and a display means. A game having a connection portion (connectors 20, 220) for connecting to a gaming device (for example, the card unit 3) having a (for example, the display unit 312 of the card unit 3) so as to be communicable Machine (for example, pachinko machine 2, slot machine 2S),
The gaming machine stored in the gaming machine when the gaming machine displays the gaming machine information stored in the gaming machine on the display means in a special state for managers (for example, manager mode). In order to be able to display information on the display means, the gaming machine information transmitting means for transmitting the gaming machine information to the gaming device (for example, corresponding to the processing of steps S132 and S133 in FIG. 105 and step S105 in FIG. 108) And processing for transmitting information).

  According to such a configuration, in the special state, not only the gaming device information but also the gaming machine information can be displayed on the display means provided in the gaming device. As well as being able to check the information on the side, you can also check the information on the gaming machine side. As a result, it is possible to increase work efficiency such as confirmation work of the gaming machine and gaming device by the administrator.

(5) The present invention can be played with points (for example, the number of balls, points) and includes display means (for example, the display 54 of the pachinko machine 2 and the liquid crystal display 510 of the slot machine 2S). A connection portion (connectors 380, 330) for communicably connecting to a gaming machine (for example, pachinko machine 2, slot machine 2S), and a gaming value owned by the player (for example, prepaid balance, number of balls, or , The number of stored balls) that can be converted into points (for example, card unit 3),
A gaming device stored in the gaming device when the gaming machine displays the gaming machine information stored in the gaming machine on the display means in a special state (eg, manager mode) for the manager. In order to be able to display information on the display means, the gaming apparatus information transmitting means for transmitting the gaming apparatus information to the gaming machine (for example, transmitting information corresponding to the processing of steps S152 and S153 in FIG. 107) Processing).

  According to such a configuration, in the special state, not only the gaming machine information but also the gaming device information can be displayed on the display means provided in the gaming machine. As well as information on the gaming device side. As a result, it is possible to increase work efficiency such as confirmation work of the gaming machine and gaming device by the administrator.

(6) In the gaming system of (1) above, gaming machine information transmitting means (for example, FIG. 105) provided in the gaming machine for transmitting the gaming machine information to the gaming device having the display means. Steps S132 and S133, and processing for transmitting information corresponding to Step S105 in FIG. 108),
and,
In order to transmit the gaming apparatus information to the gaming machine having the display means, the gaming apparatus information transmitting means provided in the gaming apparatus (for example, corresponding to the processing of steps S152 and S153 in FIG. 107). Process to send information)
At least one of the above.

  According to such a configuration, the gaming machine information or gaming device information is directly transmitted from the gaming machine or gaming device. For example, the gaming machine information is once taken from the gaming machine to another device. In comparison with the case where the gaming machine information is stored in the gaming device or when the gaming device information is once stored in the gaming device and then stored in the gaming machine. The latest information can be displayed on the display means.

  Note that the gaming machine information transmission means or the gaming device information transmission means may transmit information when the state is switched to the special state, or necessary information is generated regardless of whether the state is switched to the special state. The information may be transmitted at a later stage. In particular, when information is transmitted when switching to the special state, the latest state of the information transmission source can be displayed by displaying the information on the display means at the information receiving destination.

(7) In the gaming system of (1) above, gaming machine information storage means provided in the gaming device having the display means for storing the gaming machine information when the gaming machine information is received. (For example, refer to the RAM of the main control unit 323 of the card unit 3, see FIGS. 4 to 6, FIG. 116, FIG. 118, FIG. 119, FIG. 121, FIG. 122),
and,
In order to store the gaming device information when the gaming device information is received, gaming device information storage means (for example, the payout control unit 17 of the pachinko machine 2 provided in the gaming machine having the display means) RAM, RAM of the payout control unit 117 of the slot machine 2S, see FIGS. 4 to 6, 116, 118, 119, 121, and 122)
At least one of the above.

  According to such a configuration, by previously storing information in the gaming machine information storage means or gaming device information storage means, communication between the gaming machine and the gaming device is interrupted when switching to a special state. The information on the other side can be displayed on the display means even when it is present.

(8) In the gaming system of (1), (6) and (7) above, the display control means
Control for displaying on the display means information that has not been confirmed to be received by the gaming device among the gaming machine information transmitted from the gaming machine having the display means to the gaming device (for example, step of FIG. 107) S151 to S154, see the storage information setting screen of FIG. 106),
and,
Control for displaying on the display means information that could not be confirmed at the gaming machine among the gaming apparatus information transmitted from the gaming apparatus having the display means to the gaming machine (for example, step of FIG. 105) (See S131 to S134, step S105 in FIG. 108, and storage information setting screen in FIG. 106)
At least one of the above can be executed.

  According to the above configuration, the administrator can grasp information that has not been confirmed to be received on the other side from information transmitted from one side to the other side. The data on the side can be corrected.

(9) In the gaming system of (1), (6), (7) and (8) above, correspondence determining means for determining a change in the correspondence between the gaming machine and the gaming device (for example, step of FIG. 105) S131, step S151 in FIG. 107, and step S102 in FIG. 108)
The display control means, when it is determined that the correspondence relationship has been changed by the correspondence relationship determination means, the gaming machine information of the gaming machine that corresponded before the change of the correspondence relationship, or before the change of the correspondence relationship The gaming device information of the corresponding gaming device can be displayed on the display means (for example, step S133 in FIG. 105, step S153 in FIG. 107, step S105 in FIG. 108).

  According to the above configuration, even when the correspondence relationship between the gaming machine and the gaming device is changed due to a failure of the gaming machine or the gaming device, the gaming machine or game that was supported before the change is made. By confirming the information of the game device with the display means, it is possible to guarantee the player based on the information, adjust the data of the gaming machine or game device whose correspondence relationship has been changed, and the like.

(10) In the gaming machine of (2) above, switching operation means for switching to the special state (for example, the setting key switches 1012 and 1022 of the pachinko machine 2 and the slot machine 2S),
It further includes switching signal generation means (for example, power supply boards 101 and 102 of the pachinko machine 2 and the slot machine 2S) that generates the switching signal in response to an operation of the switching operation means.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to switch to a special state on the gaming machine side.
(11) In the gaming machines of (2) and (10) above,
Switching signal receiving means for receiving the switching signal from the outside of the gaming machine (for example, the P management control unit 81 for receiving the switching signal from the hall management computer 1 and the card unit 3 from the remote controller, and the S communication control unit 82).

  According to the above configuration, the gaming machine is switched to a special state based on a switching signal from the outside. For example, in a management device (a hall management computer, a server, etc.) outside the gaming machine, it is possible to switch to a special state. Become. Alternatively, it is possible to switch to a special state by inputting a switching signal from the portable management terminal carried by the administrator to the gaming machine.

(12) In the gaming apparatus of (3), switching operation means (for example, a card reader / writer 327 for receiving a test card) for switching to the special state;
It further includes switching signal generation means (for example, a card reader / writer 327) that generates the switching signal in response to an operation of the switching operation means.

According to said structure, it becomes possible to switch to a special state on the game device side.
(13) The gaming device according to (3) or (12) further includes switching signal receiving means (for example, an external communication unit 324, an IR photosensitive unit 320) that receives the switching signal from the outside of the gaming device.

  According to the above configuration, the gaming device is switched to the special state based on the switching signal from the outside. For example, in the management device (hall management computer, server, etc.) outside the gaming device, the gaming device can be switched to the special state. It becomes possible. Alternatively, it is possible to switch to a special state by inputting a switching signal from the portable management terminal carried by the administrator to the gaming device.

It is a front view which shows a card unit and a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view which shows the state which open | released the glass door and front frame of the pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the control circuit used for a card unit and a pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the various data memorize | stored in the card unit side and the pachinko machine side, and its transmission / reception. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the control aspect which memorize | stores game history data in each of the CU side and the P stand side. It is a figure which shows the content of the information for the control circuit of the main control part and CU communication control part, and memorize | stored. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the notification process at the time of detecting abnormality as a result of mutual authentication. It is explanatory drawing explaining the outline of the command and response performed between a card unit and a pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing explaining the outline of the command and response performed between a main control part and a CU communication control part. It is explanatory drawing explaining the outline of the command and response performed between a main control part and a CU communication control part. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the recovery response. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the recovery response. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of a communication start request | requirement. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of an operation instruction. It is explanatory drawing explaining the content of an operation response. It is explanatory drawing explaining the content of an operation response. It is a figure which shows the meaning of various ball numbers, and a fixed point. It is a figure which shows the meaning of various ball numbers, and a fixed point. (A) is a figure which shows the detail of each bit of the game machine state 1, (b) is a figure which shows the detail of each bit of the game machine state 2. (C) is a diagram showing details of each bit in the gaming machine error state 1. FIG. It is explanatory drawing explaining the content of a communication status response. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of an apparatus information response. It is a figure which shows the aspect of transmission / reception of the command and response between a card unit and a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows an example of a process when a communication disconnection is detected by the card unit side. It is a figure which shows an example of a process at the time of detecting a communication disconnection by the pachinko machine side. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with the card unit and the pachinko machine at the time of power activation. (A) (b) is a figure which shows an example of the process of the subroutine program of the authentication sequence shown in FIG. 27, (a) is an authentication sequence at the time of CU power supply starting, (b) is at the time of game machine power supply starting. This is an authentication sequence. It is a figure which shows an example of the process of the subroutine program of the CU communication control part authentication sequence shown by Fig.28 (a). It is a figure which shows an example of a process of the subroutine program of the chip ID authentication sequence shown by FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the subroutine program of BB serial ID authentication sequence shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the subroutine program of the CU communication control part serial ID authentication sequence shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the subroutine program of the apparatus authentication sequence shown in FIG. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing a subroutine program of an authentication key update sequence shown in FIG. 29. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the memory | storage setting to the EEPROM of an authentication key. (A) is a figure which shows an example of the process of the business message sequence at the time of normality, (b) is a figure which shows an example of the process of the business message sequence at the time of abnormality. It is a figure which shows an example of a process when a card unit and a pachinko machine are reconnected. It is a figure which shows an example of the process in the time of the standby which is not performing operation of a card unit and a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when a card is inserted in a card unit. It is a flowchart figure which shows the subroutine program of the process at the time of insertion shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when consuming the balance of a prepaid card. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with the card unit and the pachinko machine at the time of a replay. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine in the case of subtracting the number of game balls according to an instruction on the card unit side. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with the card unit and the pachinko machine in a big hit. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when the number of game balls in a pachinko machine runs out during a game. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when returning a card. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when a game is interrupted. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when unlocking | releasing and releasing the lock | rock of the glass door in a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the modification of the process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when unlocking | releasing and releasing the glass door in a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when unlocking | releasing and releasing the cell (front frame) of a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when a pachinko machine is not connected when a power supply is started in the state where a card unit is holding a card. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when the operation | movement instruction (no request | requirement operation | movement) from a card unit does not reach | attain a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine in case the operation response from a pachinko machine (response with respect to no request | requirement operation | movement) does not arrive at a card unit. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when the operation instruction from a card unit (response to an addition request) does not reach the pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when the operation response from a pachinko machine (response to an addition request) does not reach the card unit. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when the operation instruction (subtraction request) from a card unit does not reach the pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when the operation response from a pachinko machine (response to a subtraction request) does not reach the card unit. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when a pachinko machine returns the response of addition refusal with respect to the addition request of a card unit. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when a pachinko machine returns the subtraction rejection response with respect to the subtraction request | requirement of a card unit. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when a pachinko machine returns the response of a rejection of a clear with respect to the clear instruction request of a card unit. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when a pachinko machine returns the response of permission rejection with respect to the game permission request | requirement of a card unit. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when a pachinko machine returns the response of prohibition refusal with respect to the game prohibition request | requirement of a card unit. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when a pachinko machine returns the response of glass door opening rejection with respect to the glass door opening request | requirement of a card unit. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when a pachinko machine returns the response of a cell (front frame) opening rejection with respect to the cell (front frame) opening request | requirement of a card unit. It is a figure which shows an example of the recovery process of a card unit and a pachinko machine when the power failure in the card unit after reaching the operation response regarding addition / subtraction data occurs. It is a figure which shows an example of the recovery process of a card unit and a pachinko machine when a power failure has occurred in the card unit before the operation instruction is reached. It is a figure which shows an example of the recovery process of a card unit and a pachinko machine when a power failure occurs in a card unit before the operation response regarding addition / subtraction data is reached. FIG. 66 is a diagram illustrating an example of a control process in a case where communication partners do not match in the recovery when the CU-side power cut-off illustrated in FIG. 65 occurs. FIG. 67 is a diagram illustrating an example of a control process when communication partners do not match in the recovery at the time of occurrence of a CU-side power interruption illustrated in FIG. 66. FIG. 68 is a diagram illustrating an example of a control process in a case where communication partners do not match in the recovery when the CU-side power interruption occurs illustrated in FIG. 67. It is a figure which shows an example of the recovery process of a card unit and a pachinko machine when a power failure occurs in the card unit before the addition request is reached. It is a figure which shows an example of the recovery process of a card unit and a pachinko machine when a power failure occurs in the card unit before reaching an operation response to the addition request. FIG. 72 is a diagram showing an example of a control process in the case of communication partner mismatch in the recovery when the CU-side power cut-off shown in FIG. 71 occurs. FIG. 73 is a diagram showing an example of a control process in the case of communication partner mismatch in the recovery when the CU-side power interruption occurs shown in FIG. 72. It is a figure which shows an example of the recovery process of a card unit and a pachinko machine when a power failure occurs in the card unit before the subtraction request is reached. It is a figure which shows an example of the recovery process of a card unit and a pachinko machine when a power failure occurs in the card unit before reaching an operation response to the subtraction request. FIG. 76 is a diagram showing an example of a control process in the case where communication partner mismatch is found in the recovery when the CU-side power cut-off shown in FIG. 75 occurs. FIG. 77 is a diagram showing an example of a control process in the case of communication partner mismatch in the recovery when the CU-side power cut-off shown in FIG. 76 occurs. It is a figure which shows an example of the recovery process of a card unit and a pachinko machine when a power failure occurs in the card unit before reaching the clear request. It is a figure which shows an example of the recovery process of a card unit and a pachinko machine when a power failure occurs in the card unit before reaching an operation response to the clear request. FIG. 80 is a diagram showing an example of a control process in the case of communication partner mismatch in the recovery at the time of occurrence of a CU-side power failure shown in FIG. 79. It is a figure which shows an example of the control processing in the case of communication partner mismatch in the recovery at the time of the CU side power supply interruption shown in FIG. It is a figure explaining the display screen of the operation state displayed in conjunction with processing of a card unit and a pachinko machine when a card is inserted in a card unit. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine in case the ball sharing process which carries out divided transfer (share ball share) of a game ball is performed during the game in which the card was inserted. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine in case the ball sharing process which carries out divided transfer (share ball sharing) of a game ball is performed during the game in which the visitor card was inserted. It is a figure which shows the other example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine in case the ball share process which carries out divided transfer (share ball share) of a game ball is performed during the game in which the member card was inserted. It is a screen figure of a display device when a ball sharing process is performed. It is a screen figure of a display device when a ball sharing process is performed. It is a screen figure of a display device when a ball sharing process is performed. It is a screen figure of the indicator when a ball sharing process is performed. It is a screen figure of the indicator when a ball sharing process is performed. It is a screen figure of the indicator when a ball sharing process is performed. It is a screen figure of the indicator when a ball sharing process is performed. It is a screen figure of the indicator when a wagon service is performed. It is a screen figure of the indicator when a wagon service is performed. It is a screen figure of the indicator when a wagon service is performed. It is a screen figure of the indicator when a wagon service is performed. It is a screen figure of the indicator when a wagon service is performed. It is a transition screen figure in FIG. It is a screen figure of the indicator when a wagon service is performed. It is a screen figure of the indicator during membership card insertion. It is a screen figure of the indicator during membership card insertion. It is a screen figure of the indicator during card return. It is a screen figure of the indicator during card return. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a process of the administrator mode in a card unit. It is a figure for demonstrating the memory | storage information setting screen which is an example of the screen displayed in administrator mode. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a process of the administrator mode in a pachinko machine. It is a flowchart which shows the outline of the flow of the recovery process in a card unit. It is a figure for demonstrating the function of the system for games in manager mode. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine which shows another example. (A) is a flowchart which shows the control command output process of launching and lifting, (b) is a flowchart which shows an error process. It is a figure which shows the whole system for delivering the information for authentication which consists of the authentication key for security ensuring, and unique ID (it is also mentioned SID). It is a front view showing a card unit and a slot machine. It is a perspective view which shows the state which opened the front door of the slot machine. It is a figure which shows the symbol arrangement | sequence of a reel. It is a block diagram which shows the control circuit used for a card unit and a slot machine. It is a figure which shows the object combination of the internal lottery classified according to the structure of the combination determined as a prize, and a game state. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the various data memorize | stored in each of a card unit and a slot machine, and its transmission / reception aspect. It is a figure which shows the memory | storage control of the game history data in S machine and CU. It is a front view which shows the card unit and the pachinko machine in another example. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the control aspect which memorize | stores game history data in each of the CU side and the P stand side in a modification. It is a figure which shows the memory | storage control of the game history data in S stand and CU in a modification. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing a subroutine program in a modification of the insertion time process shown in FIG. 30.

  Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. As a concept of terms used in the present embodiment, “gaming equipment” includes gaming machines (pachinko machines, slot machines, etc.), card units, Z counters, card issuing devices, clearing devices, hall management devices, prize exchanges. It is a concept that includes all devices installed in a game hall such as a device, and the “game device” is a concept that excludes only gaming machines from the “game device”.

[Embodiment in case of pachinko machine]
First, referring to FIG. 1, an enclosed circulating pachinko machine (hereinafter abbreviated as “pachinko machine” or “P”) 2, which is an example of a gaming machine, is attached to each gaming island (not shown) arranged in the game hall. A card unit (which may be abbreviated as CU hereinafter) 3 as an example of a gaming device is installed in a one-to-one correspondence with the pachinko machine 2 at a side position on a predetermined side of the pachinko machine 2. Yes. This card unit 3 is issued to a visitor card having a prepaid function which is a game recording medium issued to a general player who has not registered as a member, or to a member player who has registered as a member in the game hall. A pachinko machine that accepts membership cards, which are recorded game recording media, and uses the game value (for example, card balance, number of balls, number of balls, etc.) possessed by the player specified by the record information of the cards. 2 has a function for allowing the ball to be fired and playing. The visitor card and membership card are composed of IC cards.

  This pachinko machine 2 encloses a pachinko ball as an example of a game medium inside, and when the player operates the hitting operation handle 25, the hitting ball launch motor 18 (see FIG. 2) is driven to It is configured so that a game can be played one by one in the game area 27 on the front of the game board 26.

  The pachinko machine 2 shown in FIG. 1 is a so-called first-type pachinko machine, which is not shown, but has a start port (1) and a start where a pachinko ball driven into the game area 27 can win a prize. And a variable display device that variably displays based on the detection signal of the start winning ball won in each of the start ports, and the display result of the variable display device is predetermined. A variable winning ball apparatus (also referred to as a big prize opening) or the like that is opened by a combination of specific identification information (for example, a glance) is provided. The start port (2) is composed of an electric tulip that can be changed to a first state (for example, an open state) advantageous to the player and a second state (for example, a closed state) unfavorable to the player.

  When the variable winning ball apparatus is opened, a big hit state is achieved. In addition, since the display result of the variable display device is a combination of predetermined special identification information (for example, a combination of probability variation symbols such as 777) out of a combination of jackpot symbols (grooves), the probability variation big hit state is A probability variation state (probability variation state) in which the occurrence probability of the jackpot is improved after the occurrence of the jackpot state is generated. There are two large winning openings, a large winning opening (1) and a large winning opening (2). For example, when a big win is generated based on a winning at the starting port (1), the big winning port (1) is in the first state, and when a big hit is generated based on a winning at the starting port (2), the big winning port (2) is the first state. Furthermore, the game area 2 is provided with four normal winning holes (1) to (4).

  The pachinko balls that have been driven into the game area 27 are won at any of the winning openings or are collected at the out opening 145 (see FIG. 2) without winning. The pachinko balls won in the winning opening and the pachinko balls collected in the out mouth 145 are returned again to the hitting ball launch position through the collection path in the pachinko machine 2. Then, when the player operates the hitting operation handle 25, the pachinko ball at the hitting position is again shot into the game area 27.

  On the front side of the card unit 3, a bill insertion slot 302 for inserting bills, a protruding portion 305 formed to project forward from the front side of the device, and a card insertion / discharge port for inserting a membership card or a visitor card 309 etc. are provided. The membership card or visitor card inserted into the card insertion / discharge port 309 is received by the card reader / writer 327 (see FIG. 3), and information recorded on the card is read. In the protrusion 305 described above, the display 312 and the member card ID recorded on the member card and the number of stored balls specified by the member ID are used for the surface facing the player when the member card is received. IR light receiving unit 315 (in FIG. 1) that receives an infrared signal from a replay button 319 for performing a replay game and a remote control (not shown) possessed by a game hall staff, converts the infrared signal into an electronic signal, and outputs it. (Not shown) is provided.

  Furthermore, a lending button 321, a return button 322, and a call button 798 are provided between the display 312 and the replay button 319. The lending button 321 is a button operated to withdraw the prepaid balance specified by the inserted card and secure the number of balls to be used for the game. The return button 322 is a button operated when returning the card inserted into the card insertion / discharge port 309. The call button 798 is a button operated by the player when calling a staff member of the game hall.

  The display 312 displays a prepaid balance (also referred to as a card balance or simply a balance) recorded on the inserted game recording medium (card), and displays the number of game balls and other various information described later. In addition to being capable of being displayed, the surface is configured with a transparent touch panel, and various operations can be input by touching various display items displayed on the display unit of the display 312 with a finger.

  When the replay button 319 is operated and the number of possessed balls acquired by the player is recorded on the inserted card, it is possible to play with a pachinko machine by deducting from the number of possessed balls. If the card is a membership card, the number of possessed balls is not recorded, and the stored ball is recorded in the hall management computer 1 or the like, the game can be played by the pachinko machine 2 as it is withdrawn from the stored ball.

  The “storing ball” is a game medium deposited in a game hall, and is generally managed by the hall management computer 1 or other management computer installed in the game hall. On the other hand, “the number of possession balls” is the number of game balls owned by a player as a result of a player playing a game with a gaming machine on a card, and has not yet been deposited in the game hall. It is the number of balls. Generally, the number of balls that the player has acquired on the day of the game hall is called “mochidama”, and the number of balls that the player has acquired before the previous day and that has been deposited in the amusement hall is “save ball”. Say.

  Note that the number of possessed balls may be managed by a management device for managing the number of retained balls set in the game hall. In short, the difference between “sold balls” and “mochidama” is the number of balls that have been deposited in the amusement hall as a result of a storage operation for depositing in the amusement hall, or is still deposited in the amusement hall. It is a point whether it is the number of balls of the stage which is not.

  In the present embodiment, the stored ball data is not directly recorded on the member card, but is stored in the upper server such as the hall management computer 1 in association with the member card number, and the corresponding stored ball can be searched based on the member card number. Has been. On the other hand, Mochitama records directly on the card.

  As a method of recording the card balance or holding ball in a member card or visitor card so that it can be specified, (a) record the card balance or holding ball on the card itself, (b) record the card balance or holding ball on the card itself. Without storing, the card balance or possession ball corresponding to the ID is stored in the computer such as the hall management computer 1 in association with the ID etc. recorded in the card unit. (C) The card balance or possession ball is recorded on the card itself. In addition, a method of storing a card balance or a coin corresponding to the ID in a computer such as the hall management computer 1 in association with the ID of the card is conceivable, and any method is adopted in this embodiment. May be.

  The banknote inserted into the banknote insertion slot 302 is taken in by the currency discriminator 344, and its authenticity and banknote type are identified. Then, the player is given a number of balls according to the bill amount.

  In the following description, giving the player the number of balls to be used in the game by debiting the prepaid balance recorded on the card is referred to as “lending ball”.

  The number of possessed balls given by operating the replay button 319 or the lending button 321 and the number of possessed balls given by inserting the bill into the bill insertion slot 302 are collectively stored in the card unit 3. The number of possessed balls is displayed on the display 312. In addition, you may provide the card unit 3 with the display for exclusive use for displaying the number of balls. The card unit 3 subtracts and updates the stored number of balls by the number of balls that have been struck into the game area 27 by the pachinko machine 2, and stores the number of balls that are stored for the winning equivalent generated in the pachinko machine 2. Is added and updated.

  In the pachinko machine 2, the pachinko ball enclosed by using the number of balls is driven into the game area 27, and the number of balls is added and updated according to the winning. For this reason, when playing a game in the pachinko machine 2, the operation of supplying the pachinko balls is unnecessary. Therefore, the pachinko machine 2 is not provided with an upper plate or the like for supplying pachinko balls.

  A display 54, a chance button 56, and a jog dial 57 are provided below the game area 27 in the pachinko machine 2. The display 54 is composed of a liquid crystal display device, and displays a display screen as will be described later with reference to FIG. 83 or FIGS. 87 to 104 to the player. The jog dial 57 selects and designates various display items (icons) and the like on the display screen displayed on the display unit 54 when the player rotates. Then, when the player rotates the jog dial 57, various display items on the display screen displayed on the display 54 are sequentially moved and displayed, and the jog dial 57 is operated by rotating the jog dial 57. When the player presses the chance button 56 after designating the display item that the player wants to select, the selected display item is designated and the player's selection is confirmed.

  FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 2. Here, the circulation path of the enclosed circulation pachinko ball will be mainly described.

  The game board holding frame 95 of the pachinko gaming machine is provided with a rotation lever 100 for attaching the game board. By rotating the rotation lever 100, the game board 26 can be attached and detached. On the other hand, all winning balls won from a winning opening provided in the game area 27, a variable winning ball device, etc. are collected by the winning ball collecting cover member 144 and flow down the winning ball flow path 147. On the other hand, the out ball that has entered the out port 45 merges with the winning ball that flows down the winning ball flow-down path 147 and flows down the merge passing path 702. The joining passage path 702 is provided with a joining path detection switch 32, and a ball flowing down the joining passage path 702 is detected.

  On the other hand, the foul balls are discharged from the foul ball return port 150 and then detected by the foul ball detection switch 33. Thereafter, the foul balls enter the merging passage 702. The pachinko balls that have flowed down the merge passage path 702 are guided to the ball collection basket 189.

  The pachinko balls guided to the ball collection basket 89 are lifted by the lifting device 190. The lifting device 190 has a built-in lifting screw that is rotated by the lifting motor 40, and the pachinko ball is lifted by the rotation of the lifting screw. The back of the lifting device 190 is provided with polishing members 200a and 200b (200b is not visible in the drawing) for polishing the pachinko balls by contacting with the pachinko balls being transported. While being done, the surface is polished.

  A ball raising switch (lower) 41b is provided on the ball inlet side (lower side) of the lifting device 190, and a ball raising switch (upper) 41a is provided on the ball discharge side (upper side). A pachinko ball to be transported is detected by the ball raising switch (upper) 41a and the ball raising switch (lower) 41b. The pachinko balls that have been lifted by the lifting device 190 and detected by the ball raising switch (upper) 41a are guided to the firing ball guiding path 153 and supplied from the driving ball outlet 49 to the ball feeding device (not shown). The ball feeding device has a function of feeding the next pachinko ball to the hitting ball launching position every time the player operates the hitting ball operating handle 25 to hit one pachinko ball. A pachinko ball fed by the ball feeding device is detected by a launch detection switch (not shown), and the launch detection signal is input to the payout controller 17 as will be described later.

  Further, game ball excess / deficiency detection switches 42a and 42b are provided in the middle of the circulation path of the pachinko balls (see FIG. 4) to detect whether or not the number of pachinko balls in the circulation path is a predetermined number (for example, 50). .

  Next, referring to FIG. 3, the pachinko machine 2 is provided with a front frame (also referred to as a cell) 5 and a glass door 6 with respect to the frame-shaped outer frame 4 so that the left and right edges can be opened and closed. It has been.

  A pair of upper and lower engaging protrusions 6a and 6b are provided in the vicinity of the edge of the front frame 5 opposite to the center of swinging. The engaging protrusions 6a and 6b are pressed downward by a spring (not shown). On the other hand, engagement receiving pieces 7a and 7b are provided at positions facing the engagement protrusions 6a and 6b of the outer frame 4. When the front frame 5 in the open state is pressed against the outer frame 4, the engagement protrusions 6a and 6b get over the engagement receiving pieces 7a and 7b, and the engagement protrusions 6a and 6b are moved downward by the urging force of the spring in the state of getting over. Move and become locked.

  A front frame opening solenoid 11 is provided on the rear surface side of the front frame 5. When the front frame opening solenoid 11 is excited, a pair of upper and lower engaging protrusions 6a and 6b against the biasing force of the spring. Is pushed upward, and as a result, the engagement projections 6a and 6b are disengaged from the engagement receiving pieces 7a and 7b to be unlocked, and the front frame 5 is released.

  Further, the front frame 5 is also provided with an engagement projection 8 for the glass door 6, and an engagement hole 9 is provided in the glass door 6 portion facing the engagement projection 8. The engagement protrusion 8 is pressed downward by a spring (not shown), and the engagement protrusion 8 is pushed up by the lower edge portion of the engagement hole 9 by pressing the opened glass door 6 against the front frame 5. By getting over, the engagement protrusion 8 is pushed down by the urging force of the spring, and the engagement protrusion 8 and the engagement hole 9 are engaged with each other to be locked. In this state, by energizing the glass door opening solenoid 10 provided on the back surface of the front frame 5, the engagement protrusion 8 is pulled up against the biasing force of the spring, and the engagement protrusion 8 and the engagement hole 9 are pulled up. Is released and the glass door 6 is opened.

  A front frame closing detector 13 is provided at a position in contact with the front frame 5 in the upper part of the outer frame 4, and it is detected that the front frame 5 is pressed against the outer frame 4 and is locked. Further, a glass door closing detector 12 is provided in a contact portion with the glass door 6 in an upper portion of the front frame 5, and this glass door is that the glass door 6 is pressed against the front frame 5 to be in a locked state. Detected by the closure detector 12.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 4, the outline of the control circuit of the card unit 3 and the pachinko machine 2 will be described.

  The card unit 3 is provided with a main control unit 323 composed of a microcomputer or the like. The main control unit 323 includes a CPU (Central Processing Unit) as a control center, a ROM (Read Only Memory) storing a program for operating the CPU and control data, and a RAM (RAM) functioning as a work area of the CPU. Random Access Memory) and an input / output interface for maintaining signal consistency with peripheral devices. The main control unit 323 is provided with an external communication unit 324 for communicating with the hall management computer 1 and the like, and a CU communication control unit 80 for communicating with the payout control unit 17 of the pachinko machine 2. Is provided. The card unit 3 is provided with a connection part 330 to the pachinko machine 2 side, and the pachinko machine 2 is provided with a connection part 20 to the card unit 3 side. These connection parts 330 and 20 are comprised by the connector etc., for example. The CU communication control unit 80 and the payout control unit 17 are communicably connected via the connectors 330 and 20 and connection wiring. When the CPU 805 (see FIG. 7) of the main control unit 323 detects an unconnected error such as disconnection between the external communication unit 324 and the hall management computer 1, it sends an error display command to the display control unit 797 for display. The controller 312 displays an error and controls to turn on or blink an abnormality notification lamp (not shown). Further, when the main control unit 323 detects an unconnected error such as a disconnection between the CU communication control unit 80 and the P-unit communication control unit 81, the main control unit 323 transmits an error display command to the display control unit 797 to cause an error to the display 312. Control is performed so that an abnormality notification lamp (not shown) is turned on or blinked, and a notification signal indicating that an error has occurred is transmitted to the hall management computer 1.

  The above-described money discriminator 344 identifies the authenticity and type of the bill, and the discrimination result signal is input to the main control unit 323. When the IR photosensitive unit 320 receives infrared rays emitted from a remote controller owned by a game attendant, the received light signal is input to the main control unit 323. The card reader / writer 327 reads the information recorded on the inserted card, and the read information is input to the main control unit 323 and written to the card reader / writer 327 from the main control unit 323. When data is transmitted, the card reader / writer 327 writes the data to the inserted card. The CPU 805 of the main control unit 323 determines the suitability of the card based on the read information from the card reader / writer 327. When the CPU 805 determines that the card is an improper card (forged card or the like), an error display command is displayed to the display control unit 797. To display the error on the display 312 and turn on or blink an abnormality notification lamp (not shown) and transmit a notification signal to the hall management computer 1 that an error has occurred. .

  A display control unit 797 is connected to the main control unit 323, and display data such as a balance or the number of game balls is output from the main control unit 323 to the display control unit 797. The display control unit 797 receives the output display data and controls the display 312 to display the display data. Further, when the player operates the touch panel provided on the surface of the display 312, the operation signal is input to the main control unit 323 via the display control unit 797.

  When the player operates the lending button 321, the operation signal is input to the main control unit 323. When the player operates the replay button 319, the operation signal is input to the main control unit 323. When the player operates the return button 322, the operation signal is input to the main control unit 323. When the player operates the call button 798, the operation signal is input to the main control unit 323.

  The pachinko machine 2 includes a main control board 16 that controls the progress of the game of the pachinko machine 2, a payout control section 17, a launch control board 31, a game ball control section 34, a launch section 39, and an effect section 50. , A power supply base 101 is provided.

  A CU communication control unit 80 is further connected to the main control unit 323, and the CU communication control unit 80 and the P-unit communication control unit 81 provided in the pachinko machine 2 are connected via the connector 330 and the connector 20. Electrically connected. The P-unit communication control unit 81 and the payout control unit 17 are configured by a one-chip LSI 799. Then, as will be described later, various commands such as an addition request, a subtraction request, a game permission / prohibition request, an addition request ball number, and a subtraction request ball number are transmitted from the CU communication control unit 80 to the P unit communication control unit 81. Various commands are transmitted from the P-unit communication control unit 81 to the payout control unit 17.

  From the payout control unit 17 to the CU communication control unit 80 via the P-unit communication control unit 81, various kinds of game balls, addition balls, subtraction balls, start opening winning information, symbol determination times, jackpot information, error information A response is sent.

  A game control microcomputer is mounted on the main control board 16. A microcomputer for gaming machine control includes a CPU (Central Processing Unit) as a control center, a ROM (Read Only Memory) that stores programs and control data for operating the CPU, and a RAM (RAM that functions as a work area for the CPU). Random Access Memory) and an input / output interface for maintaining signal consistency with peripheral devices.

  The payout control unit 17 is equipped with a payout control microcomputer. The payout control microcomputer includes a CPU (Central Processing Unit) as a control center, a ROM (Read Only Memory) storing a program for operating the CPU and control data, and a RAM (RAM) functioning as a work area of the CPU. Random Access Memory) and an input / output interface for maintaining signal consistency with peripheral devices. Note that the game control microcomputer mounted on the main control board 16 and the P-unit communication control unit 81 and the payout control unit 17 of the LSI 799 may be integrated into one chip.

  In addition, the above-described joining path detection switch 32, foul ball detection switch 33, glass door opening solenoid 10, front frame opening solenoid 11, glass door closing detector 12, and front frame closing detector 13 are electrically connected to the dispensing control unit 17. Are provided in a connected state.

  The main control board 16 transmits a connection confirmation signal, a winning detection signal, start opening winning information, error information, symbol determination times, jackpot information, and manufacturer-specific jackpot information to the payout control unit 17.

  The connection confirmation signal is a signal for confirming that the main control board 16 and the payout controller 17 are connected, and a signal of a predetermined voltage is constantly supplied from the main control board 16 to the payout controller 17. The payout control unit 17 controls the operation on the condition that the payout control unit 17 receives the predetermined voltage signal. The winning detection signal is a detection signal of a pachinko ball that has won a winning opening other than the starting opening. Upon receiving this detection signal, the payout control unit 17 performs control to add the number of balls to be given to one winning ball to the number of game balls and the number of added balls. This will be described in detail later.

  The start opening prize information is information indicating that a pachinko ball has won a prize at either the start opening 1 or the start opening 2. The error information is information for notifying the payout control unit 17 when an error occurs while the main control board 16 is performing game control. Specific examples of the error include, for example, a timing sensor error that causes the game area 27 to bring a magnet close to the game area and guides the game ball to the prize opening, a radio wave sensor error that illegally turns on the winning ball detection switch by transmitting an illegal radio wave, and a variable prize There is an illegal winning error in which a detection signal is output from a 10-count switch that detects a winning ball of the variable winning ball device when the ball device (attacker) is closed (see FIG. 17). When the CPU of the main control board 16 detects such an error or non-connection due to a connection confirmation signal, the CPU controls lighting or blinking of the calling lamp provided on the curtain plate and the I / O port of the main control board 16 An abnormality notification signal for notifying that the abnormality has occurred to the hall management computer 1 is output from the not shown.

  The symbol fixed number of times is information on the symbol determined as a display result of the variable display device with respect to winning at the start port 1 or the start port 2.

  The jackpot information is information indicating that a jackpot has occurred. The breakdown includes common jackpot information indicating a jackpot common to each manufacturer and manufacturer-specific jackpot information indicating a manufacturer-specific jackpot. The common jackpot information is a jackpot commonly used by each gaming machine manufacturer, such as 15 round jackpots, and includes probability variation information when a probability change occurs with the jackpot. When the time-short state (control state for shortening the variable display time of the variable display device) occurs, the time-shortage information is included. The manufacturer-specific big hit is a big hit state that is adopted only by a certain gaming machine manufacturer, such as sudden probability change (surprise).

  A health check command and a winning ball number acceptance command are transmitted from the payout control unit 17 to the main control board 16. The health check command is a command for checking whether or not the main control board 16 is operating normally. The prize ball number acceptance command is a command indicating that the additional number of balls has been accepted.

  An out-ball detection signal is input from the merging path detection switch 32 to the payout controller 17. The payout control unit 17 to which the out ball detection signal has been inputted subtracts and updates the number of balls in game (the number of floating balls floating in the game area 27) as will be described later. In the payout control unit 17 to which the foul ball detection signal is input from the foul ball detection switch 33, as will be described later, the addition ball number and the game ball number are added and updated, and the in-game ball number is subtracted and updated.

  When the dispensing control unit 17 controls the excitation of the glass door opening solenoid 10, the glass door 6 is unlocked and opened as described with reference to FIG. When the dispensing control unit 17 controls the excitation of the front frame opening solenoid 11, the front frame 5 is unlocked and opened as described with reference to FIG.

  As described with reference to FIG. 3, by pressing the glass door 6 against the front frame 5 and closing it, a glass door closing detection signal is output from the glass door closing detector 12 and input to the dispensing control unit 17. As described with reference to FIG. 3, by pressing the front frame 5 against the outer frame 4 and closing it, a front frame closing detection signal is output from the front frame closing detector 13 and input to the payout control unit 17.

  The CU communication control unit 80 of the card unit 3 and the P unit control unit 81 of the pachinko machine 2 are electrically connected, and the addition is performed from the CU communication control unit 80 to the payout control unit 17 via the P unit control unit 81. Various commands such as a request, a subtraction request, a game permission / prohibition request, an addition request ball number, and a subtraction request ball number are transmitted.

  As will be described later, the addition request command is transmitted to the payout control unit 17 when a game ball is rented or replayed from the prepaid balance, and the payout control unit 17 adds the number of game balls in response thereto. Update. As will be described later, the subtraction request command is transmitted to the payout control unit 17 when a split ball transfer (ball sharing process) or a wagon service is performed, and the payout control unit 17 receiving the command receives the number of game balls. Update the subtraction.

  The game permission / prohibition request command is a command requesting the payout control unit 17 to permit the game or a command requesting prohibition of the game. The addition request ball number is a command for designating the number of balls to be added to the game ball number by the above-described addition request command. The subtraction request ball number is a command for designating the number of balls to be subtracted from the game ball number by the above-described subtraction request command.

  From the payout control unit 17 to the CU communication control unit 80 via the P-unit control unit 81, various responses such as the number of game balls, the number of added balls, the number of subtracted balls, start opening winning information, the number of symbols determined, jackpot information, and error information are received. Sent. The number of game balls is calculated by the payout control unit 17 based on various signals such as a winning detection signal, start opening winning information, out ball detection signal, and foul ball detection signal transmitted from the main control board 16 to the payout control unit 17. This is the total number of game balls currently played. The number of balls to be added is the number of balls to be added to the number of game balls based on the winning detection signal, the start opening winning information, and the foul ball detection signal input from the main control board 16 to the payout control unit 17. It is. The number of subtracted balls is the number of subtracted balls subtracted from the number of game balls based on a firing detection signal transmitted from a game ball control unit 34 to be described later to the payout control unit 17. Each response of the start opening prize information, the number of symbol determinations, the jackpot information, and the error information is a response that designates the information transmitted from the main control board 16 to the payout control unit 17 described above.

  The launch unit 38 of the game ball control unit is provided with a launch motor 18, a touch ring 35, a single launch switch 36, and a launch motor origin sensor 37. The touch ring 35 is for detecting that the player is touching the hitting operation handle 25 and outputting the signal (touch ring input signal). The firing control board 31 emits a firing motor excitation output when the touch ring input signal is input, and drives the firing motor 18. The single shot switch 36 is used for a player to perform an operation (single shot operation) for driving a pachinko ball into the game area 27 one by one. When the single shot operation is performed, the single shot switch 36 is used. A single fire switch signal is output. The firing motor origin sensor 37 detects the origin position of the firing motor 18 and outputs a detection signal thereof. Each time the firing motor 18 makes one revolution, the origin is detected and a signal is output.

  A touch ring signal and a single shot switch detection signal are input from the launch unit 38 to the launch control board 31. Further, a launch detection signal indicating that the pachinko ball has been launched and a detection signal of the launch motor origin sensor are input from the launch unit 38 to the payout control unit 17. Upon receiving the firing detection signal, the payout control unit 17 updates the number of subtracted balls and the number of in-game balls by 1 and updates the number of game balls by 1 with respect to the detection of one fired ball.

  A firing control signal and a firing permission signal are output from the dispensing control unit 17 to the firing control board 31. Upon receiving this, the launch control board 31 outputs a signal for exciting the launch motor 18. Thereby, the pachinko ball is in a state where it is bullet-launched into the game area 27.

  As described with reference to FIG. 2, the lifting unit 39 provided in the game ball control unit 34 is provided with the lifting motor 40, the doffing switch (upper) 41a, and the doffing switch (lower) 41b. ing. Further, the transport unit 39 is provided with a game ball excess / deficiency detection switch 1 (42a) and a game ball excess / deficiency detection switch 2 (42b). The gaming ball excess / deficiency detection switches 1 and 2 are switches for detecting whether or not the total number (for example, 50) of the pachinko balls enclosed in the pachinko machine 2 is excessive or insufficient.

  A lifting motor excitation output signal for exciting the lifting motor 40 is transmitted from the dispensing control unit 17 to the lifting unit 39. On the other hand, a signal for detection of lifting (passing / full tank) based on detection signals of the doffing switch (upper) 41a and the doffing switch (lower) 41b is transmitted from the lifting unit 39 to the payout control unit 17. , 50 replenishment detection signals are input as detection signals of the gaming ball excess / deficiency detection switch 1 (42a) and gaming ball excess / deficiency detection switch 2 (42b).

  The effect section 50 includes a display effect control board 53, a display power supply board 51, a display power supply relay board 52, a display 54, a display ROM board 55, a chance button 56, and a jog dial 57. Is provided. The display effect control board 53 includes a CPU, a RAM, and a VDP. Control is performed to read image data by inputting a data read signal to the ROM mounted on the ROM board 55 for the display device, to transmit the display data to the display device 54, and to display the display screen on the display device 54. To do. The button input signal of the chance button 56 and the dial input signal of the jog dial 57 are input to the display effect control board 53, and the display effect control board 53 sends the chance button input signal and the jog dial input signal to the display 54. A display screen reflecting the operation of the jog dial 57 and the operation of the chance button 56 is displayed on the display 54.

  Electric power of a predetermined voltage from the display power supply board 51 is supplied to the display effect control board 53 via the display power supply relay board 52.

  A display control command is transmitted from the payout control unit 17 to the display effect control board 53. This display control command includes a gaming machine information command, a card unit operation command, and a test command. The gaming machine information command is a command indicating a gaming state by the pachinko machine 2 such as the number of jackpot occurrences and the probability variation number, and the card unit operation command is a command when the player operates the card unit 3. The test command is a command for testing the effect display operation of the effect unit 50.

  As the command from the payout control unit 17 to the display effect control board 53, the next command is transmitted every 300 ms after the transmission of the previous command. Then, the display effect control board 53 detects a line disconnection and performs a time-over detection process (error process) when the next command is not received despite a lapse of a fixed time exceeding 300 ms after the command is received. Specifically, if the next command has not been transmitted even though 300 ms has been received since the previous command was received, the error count is incremented by 1, and when the error count is counted 10 times continuously, The effect control board 53 detects the time-over, initializes the communication state, and controls the display 54 to display the lighting of the calling lamp and the error animation.

  On the front face of a power supply box (not shown), there are provided a setting key switch 1012 for shifting to an administrator mode, which will be described later, and a power switch 1011 operated when turning on / off the power. Note that a function of changing the probability of jackpot occurrence by operating the setting key switch 1012 and adjusting the score addition rate may be provided.

  The power supply board 101 generates drive power for the electrical components that make up the pachinko machine 2 and supplies it to each part. The power supply board 101 is supplied with AC100V power from the outside, and a DC voltage necessary for driving the electrical components constituting the pachinko machine 2 is generated from the AC100V power supply.

  Further, the setting key switch 1012 and the power switch 1011 described above are connected to the power board 101. The main control board 16 is supplied with detection signals of these connected switches via the power supply board 101 described above.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 5, main data among various data stored on each of the CU side and the P base side and its transmission / reception mode will be described.

  In the present embodiment, the current number of game balls is managed by calculating the fluctuation of the number of game balls on the P side on the CU side. The P game side also calculates and stores the current number of game balls, but the number of game balls is controlled so that when the number of game balls reaches 0 on the P table side, the P game player quickly stops hitting the ball. It is a secondary item used only for performing Since the main management of the number of game balls is performed on the CU side, it is not necessary to provide a function for strictly managing the number of game balls on the P table side, and the cost of the P game can be suppressed as much as possible.

  In particular, compared with the CU, the P units have a short replacement cycle at the game hall and are replaced early. For that reason, the running cost of the game hall where the enclosed game machine is introduced can be reduced by providing the CU side with a main management function related to the number of game balls on the P platform side to reduce the cost on the P platform side. There is an advantage.

  FIG. 5 shows the RAM storage data provided in the CU-side main control unit 323 and the RAM storage data mounted in the P-unit side payout control unit 17. First, when the power is turned on with the P units (pachinko machine 2) and the CU (card unit 3) being electrically connected for the first time after being installed in the amusement hall, the payout control unit 17 on the P unit side The main chip ID is transmitted from the main control board 16, the main chip ID is transmitted to the CU side, and the payout chip ID stored in the payout control unit 17 is transmitted to the CU side.

  On the CU side, the transmitted main chip ID and payout chip ID are stored. Next, the connection time, that is, the data of the time when the CU side and the P base side are connected and the communication is started is transmitted from the CU side to the P base side, and the P connection side stores the transmitted connection time. .

  In this state, three pieces of information of the main chip ID, the payout chip ID, and the connection time identified on the CU side are stored on the CU side and the P base side. When the power is turned on thereafter, the three pieces of information, that is, the main chip ID, the payout chip ID, and the previous connection time data are transmitted from the P platform side to the CU side.

  On the CU side, the transmitted data and the already stored data are collated, and it is determined whether or not the same P units as in the previous time are connected. The connection time data includes new connection time data transmitted from the CU side to the P base side when communication between the CU side and the P base side is started each time the power is turned on. Is stored on the P platform side.

  Each time an operation instruction and an operation response are transmitted between the CU side and the P base side, the sequence number (SQN) is incremented by "1" and the sequence number is stored on the CU side and the P base side. The The SQN is a communication number for checking whether or not communication is properly performed by updating the number every time data is transmitted / received between the CU and the P platform. SQN is a number updated at the end of the communication number to be updated.

  A specific aspect of SQN backup in the CU and P platform in the present embodiment will be described. The CU backs up and stores the SQN transmitted to the P units in response to the operation instruction. When the SQN is received from the P unit, the CU rewrites and stores the SQN stored in the backup with the received SQN. When the next operation instruction is transmitted, the SQN stored in the backup is updated by 1 and transmitted to the P units, and the transmitted SQN is stored in the backup. The CU repeats such processing.

  Similarly, in the P unit, the SQN received from the CU by the operation instruction is backed up and stored, and the next time the operation response is transmitted from the P unit to the CU, the SQN stored in the backup is updated by 1 and transmitted. The transmitted SQN is stored as a backup. When the next operation response is received, the SQN stored in the backup is rewritten and stored in the received SQN. Such processing is repeated on the P platform.

  As shown in FIGS. 58 and 65 to 80 described later, when communication is interrupted during communication, SQN is backed up and stored until communication reconnection. Since the operation response is always transmitted regardless of the occurrence time of the communication (see FIGS. 58 and 65 to 80), the SQN stored in the backup until the communication is reconnected is always the last SQN transmitted. It has become. On the other hand, since the CU side is in a state in which an operation instruction is transmitted or an operation instruction is received according to the timing of occurrence of communication disconnection (see FIGS. 58 and 65 to 80), the process until the communication is reconnected. The SQN stored during the backup is either the last transmitted or the last received.

  For example, an operation instruction is transmitted from the CU side to the P platform side, and the sequence number n at that time is transmitted, and the transmitted sequence number n is stored on the P platform side. Then, when the operation response is returned from the P platform side to the CU side, the stored sequence number n added by 1 (n + 1) is also transmitted. On the CU side, since the returned sequence number n + 1 is incremented by 1 from the already stored sequence number n, it is determined that data communication has been performed normally. Then, the sequence number of n + 2 is sent to the P platform side.

  Next, the current ball related information (the ball related information being counted) is transmitted from the P platform side to the CU side. This current ball related information is stored in the current ball related information storage area of the RAM. Specifically, when a pachinko ball that has been driven into the game area 27 wins and the additional ball number information is transmitted from the main control board 16 to the payout control unit 17, the additional ball counter is used to calculate the additional ball number. Counting is performed, and the value of the added ball counter (the number of added balls) is transmitted from the P platform side to the CU side. If a pachinko ball is fired into the game area 27 and the fired ball is detected by the fired ball detection switch, a subtraction ball counter counts the number of fired balls as a subtraction ball number based on the detection signal, and the subtraction. The value of the number of balls counter (the number of subtraction balls) is transmitted from the P platform side to the CU side.

  Further, the pachinko ball has won the start opening (1) or the start opening (2), and the start opening (1) winning signal or the starting opening (2) winning signal has been transmitted from the main control board 16 to the payout control section 17. In this case, the payout control unit 17 counts the number of winnings with the starting port 1 winning number counter or the starting port 2 winning number counter, and transmits the count value from the P base side to the CU side. Further, the payout control unit 17 counts the number of game balls at the present time with the game ball number counter based on the number of added balls and the number of subtraction balls, and the count value of the game ball number counter is changed from the P side to the CU side. Send to.

  On the P side, each time the values of the added ball counter, subtracted ball counter, starting port (1) winning counter, starting port (2) winning counter, and game ball counter are transmitted to the CU side, they are counted. After the value is stored (rewritten) as backup data in the previous ball related information storage area, the value of the added ball counter, subtracted ball counter, starting port 1 winning counter and starting port 2 winning counter as current ball related information Clear 0. In the present embodiment, “clear” has the same meaning as “initialization”.

  As a result, in the storage area of the previous ball related information (current ball related information transmitted immediately before), the current ball related information transmitted to the CU side immediately before, the number of added balls, the number of subtracted balls, the number of winnings at the start opening 1 And the data of the number of start-up 2 winnings is stored as backup data. When the current ball related information is not transmitted from the P platform side to the CU side, this backup data includes not only the current counter value but also the previous counter value that was not transmitted at the next transmission. It is intended to enable transmission.

  On the CU side, in the cumulative data storage area in the RAM, the total number of added balls (total number of added balls), the total number of subtracted balls (total number of subtracted balls), the starting port (1) the total number of winning prizes (starting port (1) The total number of times), the start opening (2) the total number of winnings (start opening (2) total number of times), and the number of game balls are stored.

  The total number of added balls and the number of game balls are updated based on the value of the added ball number counter (number of added balls) transmitted from the P platform side. Also, the total number of subtraction balls and the number of game balls are updated based on the value of the subtraction ball counter (number of subtraction balls) transmitted from the P platform side. Further, the starting port (1) total winning number is updated based on the value of the starting port 1 winning number counter transmitted from the P unit, and the value of the starting port 2 winning number counter transmitted from the P unit side is updated. Based on the starting opening (2), the total number of winnings is updated. In this way, the CU can manage the latest number of game balls by updating the number of game balls according to the current ball related information transmitted one by one from the P cars. Similarly, the CU updates the total number of added balls, the total number of subtracted balls, the starting port (1), (2) the total number of winnings by updating the current ball related information transmitted from the P unit one by one. It becomes possible to manage information.

  As will be described later with reference to FIGS. 12 and 16, the breakdown of the “added ball number” is game ball acquired number information and back ball added information. The back ball is a foul ball. The “subtracted ball count” is also referred to as game ball shot count information.

  The CU receives the count value of the game ball counter (also referred to as game ball count or game ball total count information) in addition to the value of the addition ball counter and the subtraction ball counter from the P side. The number of game balls stored by itself is updated based on the values of the added ball number counter and the subtracted ball number counter, and the count value of the game ball counter sent from the P platform side is not used. For this reason, even if the number of game balls sent from the P side does not match the number of game balls managed on the CU side, the number of game balls on the CU side is sent from the P side. It is never updated with the number of balls.

  Further, the CU collates the value of the game ball counter transmitted from the P platform side with the current number of game balls updated on the CU side, and determines whether or not they match.

  The CU sends a normal (normal) operation request (command) and a normal (normal) operation response (with normal operation) (provided that a match (confirmation confirmation) has been made) Continue to receive (response). On the other hand, when it is determined that they do not match, the CU performs control to shift to an error state.

  As control to shift to the error state, the CU performs recovery processing, transmits a communication start request command to the P units, and uses the data correction request Bit1 data included in the command to determine the number of P game balls ( Processing to correct the game ball total number information) to the corrected number of game balls (game ball total number information) on the CU side is performed. As the correction process, correction is made to the number of game balls managed on the CU side. Instead, the number of game balls managed on the CU side and the game stored on the P stand side are stored. You may correct | amend to the average value with the number of balls.

  Further, instead of such correction processing, for example, an error notification is given by the display 312 or an error notification signal indicating that an error has occurred is transmitted to the hall management computer 1 (in this case, hall management). An error notification by the computer 1 may be performed), or a predetermined notification that prompts an artificial response by a staff member may be performed.

  In this way, the CU receives the values of the various counters transmitted from the P platform side, and calculates and manages the current number of game balls based on the value of the addition / subtraction ball number counter in particular. Has a main management function. For this reason, it is not necessary to provide a main management function for the P platform. Accordingly, the manufacturing cost of the gaming machine can be reduced. In the present embodiment, the number of game balls is also stored on the P side for the purpose of allowing the game to be immediately prohibited when the number of game balls reaches zero. However, a game ball counter for storing the number of game balls on the P platform side may not be provided.

  The CU performs a game ball number matching determination process for determining whether or not they match by comparing the calculated number of game balls at the present time with the value of the game ball number counter transmitted from the P platform side. And a function of performing control to shift to an error state when there is no match (error control at the time of mismatch).

  As described above, in this embodiment, the number of game balls is also stored on the P platform side, but it is determined whether or not the number of game balls matches the number of game balls managed and stored on the CU side. (CU side function). Therefore, even if a situation occurs in which the number of game balls stored on the gaming machine side does not match the number of game balls managed and stored on the CU side due to fraud or other circumstances, it can be checked. Here, although the determination function is provided on the CU side, for example, the number of game balls stored on the CU side and the game stored on the P stand side by the hall management computer 1 connected to the CU. The number of balls may be received and it may be determined whether or not both are consistent.

  As shown in FIG. 5, the CU further includes a storage area for storing a holding ball (a stored ball) and a storage area for storing a card balance of an accepted (inserted) card. The main control unit 323 (see FIG. 4) of the CU receives an input requesting the use of the holding ball (for example, pressing input of a replay button (also referred to as a replay button) 319 (see FIG. 4) provided on the CU)). In response, a predetermined number of balls are subtracted from the storage area for storing balls. Further, the main control unit 323 (see FIG. 4) of the CU subtracts a predetermined value from a storage area for storing the card balance in response to an input requesting use of the card balance (for example, pressing input of the lending button 321).

  In addition, when the player performs an operation to deduct the value from the player's own game value (for example, the prepaid balance, the number of balls, or the number of balls) and use it for the game, the amount of the deducted ball The addition request ball number for adding the number to the game ball counter is transmitted from the CU side to the P stand side. On the P side, in response to this, the game ball number counter is added and updated.

  On the other hand, when an operation for ordering a so-called wagon service in which a player-owned game value is withdrawn and exchanged for a drink is executed, the number of balls required for subtraction of the player-owned game value is To the P platform side. On the P platform side, the game ball counter is decremented and updated.

  FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a control mode in which game history data is stored on each of the CU side and the P platform side. Note that the game history data is data indicating a history of a game state generated when a player plays a game with the P table 2. For example, the start history (variable) is a variable display count of a variable display device. Display device variation start count), number of occurrences of jackpot, number of starts from previous jackpot to current jackpot, base value, and the like. This game history data includes game history data throughout the day on the P machines and game history data aggregated for each player on the P machines. As will be described in detail later, the former game history data is stored in the P game history data storage unit provided on both the P machine side and the CU side, and the latter game history data is stored on the P machine side and the CU side. Are stored in the current player game history data storage unit provided in both of them or in the backup storage unit provided only on the P platform side. In other words, the game history data throughout the day on the P machine and the game history data aggregated for each player on the P machine are stored in both the CU 3 and the P machine 2.

  Referring to FIG. 6, when a player plays a game with P table 2, various game data such as big hits and start (variable display device fluctuation start) are generated, and the game data is input to game history data management unit 291. Is done. The normal game data generated as a result of the player playing the game on the P units is totaled, for example, by the normal mode processing unit of the game history data management unit 291 provided in the payout control unit 17, and the totaled game history The data is input to the display effect control unit 292 provided on the display effect control board 53, and the game history data is accumulated and stored in the P game history data storage unit. The present P game history data storage unit can store game history data for 10 days including today's game history data. When the player operates the jog dial 57 and the chance button 56 described above to select and display the game history data on the day to be displayed, the game history data on the selected day is displayed on the display 54. The communication between the display effect control unit 292 and the game history data management unit 291 is a one-way communication from the game history data management unit 291 to the display effect control unit 292.

  On the other hand, the above-described game data input to the game history data management unit 291 is also transmitted to the game history data management unit 391 provided in the main control unit 323, for example, via the CU communication control unit 80 of the CU3. The game data is aggregated by the normal mode processing unit of the game history data management unit 391. The totaled game history data is stored in the P game history data storage unit of the data storage unit 392. This P stand game history data storage unit on the CU3 side is configured to store only the game history data of the day. If the player touches the display 312 configured with a touch panel to display the P game history data, the operation signal is input to the game history data management unit 391, and the game history data is displayed. Under the control of the management unit 391, the game history data of the day stored in the current P game history data storage unit is displayed on the display 312.

  On the other hand, the CU 3 is configured so that the game history data of the other P units 2 installed in the game hall can be displayed on the display 312. Specifically, when the player touches an operation button icon of the other P device information display displayed on the display 312, the operation signal is input to the game history data management unit 391, and the other P device information is displayed. The other P machine game history data request notification is transmitted from the game history data management unit 391 to the hall management computer 1 by the operation of the processing unit. The hall management computer 1 receives the game history data of the other P machines 2 via the other CU 3, and returns the received other P machine game history data to the game history data management unit 391. The game history data management unit 391 processes the returned other P game history data by the other P information processing unit, and processes the processed other P game history data in the data storage unit 392. Store in the history data storage unit. The stored other P game history data is displayed on the display 312.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, it is possible to aggregate game history data for each player who played a game on the P platform 2 and display the game history data for each player on the display units 54 and 312. In order to tabulate the game history data for each player, it is necessary to distinguish the players who are playing the game on the P unit 2. C-ID (card ID) stored in a member card possessed by a player who is a member is used as player identification information for distinguishing the player. The C-ID is an ID that is stored in a card and identifies the cards. The member card is issued to a player who becomes a member in the game hall, and the member and the member card have a one-to-one correspondence. Therefore, the C-ID stored in the member card can identify not only the member card but also a member player. Therefore, the C-ID stored in the member card functions as player identification information for identifying the player.

  As will be described in detail later, when a player who is a member inserts a member card into the CU 3, the C-ID stored in the inserted member card is read, and the C-ID is stored in the data storage unit 392. It is stored in the player game history data storage unit. On the other hand, the read C-ID is transmitted from the CU 3 to the P stand 2, and the P stand 2 transmits the received C-ID from the game history data management unit 291 to the display effect control unit 292, thereby displaying the display effect. The current player game history data storage unit of the control unit 292 is stored.

  In this state, when the player plays a game with the P stand 2, the game history data from when the C-ID is stored in the current player game history data storage unit is the current player of the display effect control unit 292. Cumulatively stored in the game history data storage unit. If the player operates the jog dial 57 and the chance button 56 to display his / her own game history data, the game history a stored in the current player game history data storage unit is displayed on the display. 54. In addition, the game history data management unit 391 also counts the game history data by the normal mode processing unit based on the game data transmitted from the P unit 2, and stores the C in the current player game history data storage unit of the data storage unit 392. -The game history data accumulated by the normal mode processing unit from the stage where A is stored as an ID is accumulated and stored in the current player game history data storage unit. When the player touches the display 312 including a touch panel and performs an operation for displaying his / her game history data, the operation detection signal is input to the game history data management unit 391 and the game history data management unit 391. Controls the display 312 to display the game history a stored in the current player game history data storage unit of the data storage unit 392.

  As described above, the game history data throughout the day on the P platform and the game history data aggregated for each player on the P platform are displayed on both the P platform side and the CU side by the display switching operation. One game history data and the other game history data are switched and displayed.

  When a player playing a game on the P stand 2 pushes the return button 322 to return the member card inserted, the member card is discharged from the CU 3. Then, the game history data management unit 391 erases the C-ID and game history data stored in the current player game history data storage unit of the data storage unit 392. As a result, even if the display 312 is operated to display the game history a stored in the current player game history data storage unit, the game history a is not displayed on the display 312.

  On the other hand, when the membership card is discharged from CU3, a card return notification is transmitted from CU to P stand 2, and the game history data management unit 291 that receives the card return notification returns the card to the display effect control unit 292. Send a notification. In response to this, the display effect control unit 292 stores A as the C-ID stored in the current player game history data storage unit and the game history data a in the backup data storage unit, so that the current player game The C-ID and game history data in the history data storage unit are deleted. As a result, even if an operation for displaying the game history data a on the display 54 is performed, the game history data a is not displayed on the display 54.

  The return button 322 is normally operated when the game by the P table 2 is ended. However, the player temporarily stops the game, returns to the P table 2 where the game has been played again, and plays the game again. May resume. In such a case, usually after performing a game interruption operation described later, the card is ejected, the card is brought to the player, the player completes a small use, and the player returns to the same P stand 2 to return the card to the CU3. Although it is inserted, the player may press the return button 322 and remove the card from the P stand 2 without performing such a game interruption operation.

  In such a case, when the same player who has left the P table 2 without playing another player returns to the P table 2 and inserts the membership card into the CU 3 again, he leaves. It is desirable to take over the previous game history data of the player and add and update the game history data after the game has been resumed to the game history data for cumulative storage. In order to realize this, the C-ID and game history data are backed up and stored in the backup data storage unit provided in the display effect control unit 292 described above. When the player who has returned to the P table 2 inserts the member card into the CU 3, the card information of the member card is read, and the inserted card information including the C-ID of the member card is transferred from the CU 3 to the P table 2. Sent. In the P table 2, the game history data management unit 291 receives the C-ID included in the inserted card information, and transmits the received C-ID to the display effect control unit 292. The display effect control unit 292 compares the transmitted C-ID with the C-ID stored in the backup data storage unit and determines whether or not they match. If they match, it is determined that the same player as the player who has left the seat has resumed the game, and A as the C-ID and a as the game history data stored in the backup data storage unit are stored in the current game. It returns to the player game history data storage unit and stores it in the current player game history data storage unit. Then, the stored data in the backup data storage unit is deleted. Game history data generated after the player played a game with the P unit 2 in a state where the game history data stored in the backup data storage unit is stored in the current player game history data storage unit and taken over Is added and updated to the game history data a stored in the current player game history data storage unit and accumulated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the comparison result between the C-ID included in the inserted card information transmitted from the CU 3 and the C-ID stored in the backup data storage unit does not match, the backup data A as C-ID and a as game history data stored in the storage unit are deleted.

  As a modification, the following control may be performed after the communication between the game history data management unit 291 and the display effect control unit 292 is bidirectional communication.

  A comparison result between the C-ID stored in the backup data storage unit by the display effect control unit 292 and the C-ID transmitted from the CU 3, and a determination result as to whether or not they match is the display effect control unit. 292, and transmitted to the game history data management unit 391 of CU3 via the game history data management unit 291. In the game history data management unit 391, if the transmitted C-ID determination result matches, the game history data management unit 391 uses the C-ID determined to match as the current player game history of the data storage unit 392. Store in the data storage unit. In the case of the determination result that the C-ID determination results match, the game history data a is included in the C-ID determination result. The game history data management unit 391 that has received the game history data a stores the game history data a in the current player game history data storage unit of the data storage unit 392. Thereafter, if the player plays a game with the P stand 2, the game data is transmitted to the game history data management unit 391, and is aggregated by the normal mode processing unit of the game history data management unit 391. Is added and updated to the game history data a stored in the current player game history data storage unit and accumulated. In this state, if the player performs an operation of touching the display 312 to display his / her own game history data, the game history data stored in the current player game history data storage unit is displayed as described above. Displayed by the instrument 312.

  Note that the backup data storage unit of the display effect control unit 292 may be controlled so as to erase the backup data stored when a predetermined time (for example, 20 minutes) has elapsed.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, a test hit mode (test mode) processing function is provided. This test hit mode is a mode in which a game machine manufacturer performs a shipment inspection at the time of game machine manufacture, an operation check at the time of game machine installation at a game hall, a display of the number of balls such as safe / out, a base check at the time of nail adjustment, etc. . When a game attendant inserts a test card for test hit mode into the CU 3, the card information of the test card is read and the test hit mode processing unit of the game history data management unit 391 performs processing for shifting to the test hit mode. . Specifically, the test hit mode notification is transmitted to the P stand 2, and the game history data management unit 291 that has received the test hit mode notification transmits the test hit mode notification to the display effect control unit 292 by the operation of the test hit mode processing unit. . In response to this, the display effect control unit 292 stores game history data based on game data generated thereafter in the trial hit game history data storage unit. The trial hit game history data storage unit is configured by a storage area different from the P-unit game history data storage unit, the current player game history data storage unit, and the backup data storage unit described above. The game history data in the trial hit mode is stored in the part.

  The game history data stored in the trial hit game history data storage unit is displayed on the display 54.

  Also in CU3, game history data based on the game data transmitted from the P unit 2 is totaled by the operation of the trial hit mode processing unit of the game history data management unit 391, and the totaled game history data is displayed in the trial hit mode. Is displayed on the display 312 as game history data.

  In the display 312, operation button icons such as a recount button are also displayed, and after the nail master who has viewed the game history data in the test hit mode displayed in the total display adjusts the nail based on the game history data, the game in the test hit mode is performed again. There is a case where it is desired to check the result of the nail adjustment by collecting the history data and displaying it. In such a case, the recount button icon is touch-operated. Then, the operation detection signal is input to the game history data management unit 391, and a recounting notice is transmitted from the game history data management unit 391 to the game history data management unit 291 of the P 2. Receiving it, the game history data management unit 291 transmits a recount command to the display effect control unit 292. In response to this, the display effect control unit 292 once erases the game history data stored in the test hit game history data storage unit, and then replays game data based on the game data generated thereafter, and stores the test hit game history data. Control to be stored in the unit is performed. Then, the game data of the trial hit game history data storage unit that has been newly counted is displayed on the display 54. On the other hand, on the CU 3 side, the trial hit mode processing unit uses the game history data based on the game data transmitted from the P unit 2 after the detection signal of the touch operation of the recount button icon is input to the game data management unit 391. And the trial hit mode game history data that has been added up again is displayed on the display 312.

  Then, when the return button 322 is pressed and the test card accepted by the CU 3 is ejected, a card return notice is transmitted from the game history data management unit 391 to the P table 2 and the card return notice is received. The game history data management unit 291 transmits a card return notification to the display effect control unit 292, and the display effect control unit 292 that receives the card return notification erases the game history data stored in the trial hit game history data storage unit.

  When there are no more game balls in the trial hit mode, a game ball addition command is sent from the CU side to the P units to allow game balls to be added. When there are no more game balls in the test hit mode, the game machine may automatically add game balls without sending a game ball addition command from the CU side to the P units, thereby enabling a game. Furthermore, instead of automatically adding game balls on the gaming machine side, it may be controlled so that the game can continue even if the game balls become zero.

  Similarly, in the case of a slot machine 2S, which will be described later, when there are no more points in the trial hit mode, a score addition command is sent from the CU side to the S units to allow the game to be added.

  The P table 2 is provided with a RAM clear switch 293. The RAM clear switch 293 is used to clear the stored data of the RAM by outputting a RAM clear signal to the main control board 16 and the payout control unit 17 described above when operated. If the RAM clear output signal is input to the game history data management unit 291, the RAM clear signal is input to the display effect control unit 292, and the data stored in the backup data storage unit of the display effect control unit 292 is stored. At the same time, the oldest stored data of 10 days of stored data in the P game history data storage unit is deleted, and the remaining 9 days of stored data are shifted one by one to the old day storage area. Remembered. As a result, the newest storage area (current day storage area) becomes an empty area. Today's game history data is stored in this empty area (current day storage area). In response to the output of the RAM clear signal, the game history data of the newest day (game history data before shifting to the old day) in the P game history data storage unit is displayed on the display effect control unit 292, game history. The data may be transmitted to the hall management computer 1 via the data management unit 291 and the game history data management unit 391 so that the data is backed up and stored in the hall management computer 1.

  In addition, the game history data management unit 291 that has received the RAM clear signal from the RAM clear processing unit 293 transmits a clear notification to the CU 3, and the game history data management unit 391 that has received the clear notification receives the P of the data storage unit 392. Control is performed to erase the game history data stored in the table game history data storage unit. As a result, the display of the current P game history data on the display 312 is erased (cleared).

  Note that while the card is held in the CU3, even if a RAM clear signal is output from the RAM clear switch 293, the game history data is not cleared.

  FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating the control circuit of the main control unit and the CU communication control unit and the contents of the stored authentication information. Referring to FIG. 7, the main control unit 323 functions as a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 805 as a control center, a ROM (Read Only Memory) 804 storing a control program and data, and a work area of the CPU 805. A RAM (Random Access Memory) 806, an I / O port 807, and an EEPROM (Electrically Erasable PROM) 808 are provided.

  On the other hand, the CU communication control unit 80 is also provided with a CPU 810 as a control center, a ROM 809 that stores control programs and data, a RAM 811 that functions as a work area for the CPU 810, an I / O port 812, and an EEPROM 813. .

  The main control unit 323 and the CU communication control unit 80 communicate with each other through the I / O ports 807 and 812. Although not shown in FIG. 7, the I / O port 807 is also communicably connected to the I / O port of the upper server 801. The I / O port 812 is also communicably connected to the I / O port of the P-unit communication control unit 81.

  In the chip manufacturing stage of the ROM 809 of the CU communication control unit 80, the SID (unique ID) of the CU communication control unit is stored. The SID of this CU communication control unit is also referred to as an IC serial ID. There are two types of mutual authentication between the main control unit 323 and the CU communication control unit 80: authentication using this SID and authentication using an authentication key (common key) described later. As will be described in detail later, the authentication using the SID is performed by storing each other's own SID and the other party's SID and determining whether or not the other party stores the correct SID by a challenge response method described later. Is. As described later, this SID authentication includes BB serial ID authentication and CU communication control unit serial ID authentication, which are collectively referred to as serial ID authentication. As will be described later, authentication using an authentication key stores authentication keys composed of a common key and authenticates whether or not the stored authentication keys match each other. This is called authentication.

  As described above, the ROM 809 of the CU communication control unit 80 stores the SID of the CU communication control unit at the chip manufacturing stage. Therefore, the main control unit 323 also needs to store both its own SID and the other party, that is, the CU communication control unit SID stored in the CU communication control unit 80.

  In the manufacturing stage of CU3, the SID and authentication key (common key) of the main control unit are written in the EEPROM 813 by the ROM writer or the like, and the SID of the main control unit is written in the EEPROM 808. The SID of this main control unit is also referred to as a BB serial ID.

  In the case of mutual authentication by SID, it is necessary to store the SID of the other party and one's own, and also in the case of mutual authentication using an authentication key consisting of a common key, It is necessary to keep. However, at the stage where the CU is manufactured, the SID and authentication key of the CU communication control unit are not stored in the main control unit 323. The SID and authentication key of the CU communication control unit are transmitted from the CU communication control unit 80 to the main control unit 323 of the card unit 3 and stored in the EEPROM 808.

  FIG. 8 is an explanatory diagram for explaining notification processing when an abnormality is detected as a result of mutual authentication.

  Referring to FIG. 8, when an abnormality occurs in main control unit 323, CU communication control unit 80, P-unit communication control unit 81, payout control unit 17, or main control board 16, it is indicated by an arrow in FIG. Notification is made. The abnormality mentioned here is that the main control unit 323, the CU communication control unit 80, the P-unit communication control unit 81, the payout control unit 17, or the main control board 16 is replaced with another illegally manufactured one, noise, etc. This includes a case where a malfunction occurs or a failure occurs due to the above, or an offline state due to disconnection or the like. A key management server 800 shown in FIG. 8 is a key management server that stores the SID and authentication key of the CU communication control unit in association with each SID of the main control unit. The key management server 803 is a key management server that can communicate with the main control board 16.

  First, when an abnormality occurs in the CU communication control unit 80 of the card unit 3, the main control unit 323 detects an abnormality as a result of the mutual authentication performed between the main control unit 323 and the CU communication control unit 80 described above. Detect. In this mutual authentication, in addition to the above-described serial ID authentication and device authentication, device authentication using a session key described later (see FIG. 28) is also included. When the main control unit 323 detects an abnormality in the CU communication control unit 80, the main control unit 323 notifies the host server 801 to that effect and transmits an abnormality notification command to the display control unit 797 of the card unit 3. Then, the display control unit 797 is controlled to display that the display 312 indicates that an abnormality has occurred, and an abnormality notification lamp (not shown) is turned on or blinked to notify the abnormality. Further, the main control unit 323 transmits a signal indicating that an abnormality has occurred from the external communication unit 324 to the hall management computer 1.

  Further, the occurrence of abnormality by the CU communication control unit 80 is also detected by the P-unit communication control unit 81. When the P-unit communication control unit 81 detects the occurrence of an abnormality, it notifies the payout control unit 17 to that effect, and the payout control unit 17 further notifies the main control board 16 to that effect. In response to the abnormality occurrence signal, the main control board 16 outputs a signal for turning on or blinking an abnormality notification lamp provided on the film plate or the like, and a signal indicating that an abnormality has occurred to the hall management computer 1. Send.

  When an abnormality occurs in the main control unit 323 of the card unit 3, the CU communication control unit 80 detects the occurrence of the abnormality by the above-described mutual authentication, and sends a signal (abnormality notification signal) indicating that to the P unit communication control unit. 81 is notified. In response to this, the P-unit communication control unit 81 notifies the payout control unit 17 that an abnormality has occurred. In response to this, the payout control unit 17 notifies the main control board 16 that an abnormality has occurred. As described above, the main control board 16 performs control for operating the abnormality notification lamp and transmits a signal indicating that an abnormality has occurred to the hall management computer 1.

  When the CU communication control unit 80 detects an abnormality in the P-unit communication control unit 81, the CU communication control unit 80 notifies the main control unit 323 of the fact, and the main control unit 323 notifies the host server 801 of the fact.

  As described above, when the CU communication control unit 80 detects an abnormality in the main control unit 323, the CU communication control unit 80 notifies the P unit communication control unit 81 to that effect. To the main control unit 323, and the notification destination of the occurrence of abnormality by the CU communication control unit 80 is different. The reason for this is that even if the control unit in which an abnormality has occurred is notified that an abnormality has occurred, no abnormality notification control is performed and no abnormality prevention measure is provided. Moreover, the CU communication control unit 80 has a communication control function but does not have an abnormality notification control function. Therefore, the abnormality notification cannot be controlled by itself, and for this reason, notification is made that an abnormality has occurred in the direction of the control unit opposite to the control unit where the abnormality has occurred. The P-unit communication control unit 81 that has received the notification of the occurrence of the abnormality from the CU communication control unit 80 notifies the payout control unit 17 to that effect, and the payout control unit 17 notifies that the abnormality has occurred. To notify. Upon receiving the notification, the main control board 16 performs the same control for abnormality notification as described above.

  When an abnormality occurs in the P-unit communication control unit 81, the fact is detected by the CU communication control unit 80, and the main control unit 323 is notified that the abnormality has occurred, and the main control unit 323 notifies the abnormality notification described above. In addition to performing control, the host server 801 is notified that an abnormality has occurred. Further, when an abnormality occurs in the P-unit communication control unit 81 and no abnormality occurs in the payout control unit 17, the fact that the payout control unit 17 has detected an abnormality is detected and the fact that the abnormality has occurred is mainly described. Notify the control board 16. In response to the notification, the main control board 16 performs the above-described abnormality notification control.

  When an abnormality occurs in the payout controller 17, the main control board 16 detects the abnormality and performs the above-described abnormality occurrence control. If an abnormality has occurred in the payout control unit 17 and no abnormality has occurred in the P-unit communication control unit 81, the P-unit communication control unit 81 detects the occurrence of the abnormality and indicates that the abnormality has occurred. Notify the controller 80. Upon receiving the notification, the CU communication control unit 80 notifies the main control unit 323 that an abnormality has occurred. In response to the notification, the main control unit 323 performs the above-described control for abnormality notification and notifies the host server 801 that an abnormality has occurred.

  When an abnormality occurs in both the P-unit communication control unit 81 and the payout control unit 17, the main control board 16 detects the occurrence of the abnormality and the CU communication control unit 80 also detects the occurrence of the abnormality.

  When an abnormality occurs in the main control board 16, the payout control unit 17 detects the abnormality and notifies the P-unit communication control unit 81 that the abnormality has occurred. In response to this, the P-unit communication control unit 81 notifies the CU communication control unit 80 that an abnormality has occurred, and the CU communication control unit 80 receives the notification and notifies the main control unit 323 that an abnormality has occurred. . In response to this, the main control unit 323 controls the above-described abnormality notification and notifies the host server 801 that an abnormality has occurred.

  As described above, the LSI 799 detects and notifies the main control board 16 when an abnormality occurs in the CU communication control unit 80, and detects the abnormality when an abnormality occurs in the main control board 16. The CU communication control unit 80 is notified that an abnormality has occurred. Similarly to the above-described CU communication control unit 80, this LSI 799 also does not perform control for abnormality notification even if notification is given to the control unit in which the abnormality has occurred when it is detected that abnormality has occurred. Therefore, a notification is sent to the control unit or control board on the opposite side of the control unit where the abnormality has occurred. The CU communication control unit 80 and the LSIs 799 and 999 are not connected to abnormality notification means such as an abnormality notification lamp or an abnormality notification display, and have a function of performing abnormality notification control themselves even when an abnormality is detected. Not.

  In the control of FIGS. 6 to 8 described above, the pachinko machine 2 is shown as an example of the gaming machine, but a slot machine 2S described later may be used as an example of the gaming machine.

  Next, an outline of commands and responses performed between the card unit and the pachinko machine will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 9 shows a transmission direction, names of transmission information, and an outline thereof. Data with a transmission direction of CU to P units is a command, and data with a transmission direction of P units to CU is a response.

  A recovery request command is transmitted from the main control unit to the CU communication control unit. This recovery request command is for requesting transmission of recovery information to the P units.

  A response of the recovery response is transmitted from the CU communication control unit to the main control unit. The response of this recovery response is to transmit the recovery information held by the P units to the CU.

  A communication start request is transmitted from the CU to the P units. This communication start request is a request for clearing recovery information and backing up the connection ID (communication start time) to the P units.

  A communication start response is transmitted from the P platform to the CU. This communication start response notifies the CU that the recovery information has been cleared and the connection ID (communication start time) has been backed up.

  An operation instruction is transmitted from the CU to the P units. This operation instruction instructs a game operation to the P units and requests transmission of game table information such as game balls.

  An operation response is transmitted from the P platform to the CU. This operation response notifies the CU of the execution result of the game operation instruction and also notifies game table information such as game balls.

  A communication disconnection request is transmitted from the CU to the P platform. This communication disconnection request is a request for disconnecting the communication connection to the P units.

  A communication disconnection response is transmitted from the P platform to the CU. This communication disconnection response notifies the CU that a communication disconnection request command has been received.

  A communication test request is transmitted from the CU to the P units. This communication test request notifies communication data to the P units.

  A communication test response is transmitted from the P platform to the CU. This communication test response is a response of communication data to the CU.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 10 and 11, an outline of commands and responses performed between the main control unit and the CU communication control unit will be described. 10 and 11 show the transmission direction, the name of the transmission information, and an outline thereof. The transmission direction is a command from the main control unit to the CU communication control unit, and the transmission direction is data from the CU communication control unit to the main control unit.

  A BB serial ID authentication request 1 for requesting authentication of the BB serial ID is transmitted from the main control unit to the CU communication control unit. This BB serial ID authentication request will be described in detail later. The BB serial ID is the SID of the main control unit 323 described above. This command is not transmitted up to P units, but is exceptional.

  A BB serial ID authentication response 1 for notifying authentication information of the BB serial ID is transmitted from the CU communication control unit to the main control unit. Details of the contents of this response will also be described later.

  A second BB serial ID authentication request 2 is transmitted from the main control unit to the CU communication control unit.

  A second BB serial ID authentication response 2 is transmitted from the CU communication control unit to the main control unit.

  Next, an IC serial ID authentication request 1 for requesting authentication of the IC serial ID is transmitted from the main control unit to the CU communication control unit. This IC serial ID authentication request will be described in detail later. The IC serial ID is the SID of the CU communication control unit 80 described above.

  An IC serial ID authentication response 1 for notifying IC serial ID authentication information is transmitted from the CU communication control unit to the main control unit. Details of the contents of this response will also be described later. This command is not transmitted up to P units, but is an exceptional one.

  The second IC serial ID authentication request 2 is transmitted from the main control unit to the CU communication control unit.

  A second IC serial ID authentication response 2 is transmitted from the CU communication control unit to the main control unit.

  A command requesting device authentication (device authentication request 1) is transmitted from the main control unit to the CU communication control unit. This device authentication is for authenticating whether or not the authentication key (common key) stored in the main control unit and the CU communication control unit is the same key, and will be described in detail later. This command is not transmitted up to P units, but is an exceptional one.

  A response (device authentication response 1) for notifying the device authentication result is transmitted from the CU communication control unit to the main control unit. Details of the contents of this response will be described later. This response is not transmitted from the P units, but is an exceptional one.

  A command (device authentication request 2) for requesting second device authentication is transmitted from the main control unit to the CU communication control unit.

  A response (device authentication response 2) for notifying the second device authentication result is transmitted from the CU communication control unit to the main control unit.

  Device authentication requests 1 and 2 and device authentication responses 1 and 2 will be described with reference to FIG.

  Counter information notification for notifying counter information is transmitted from the main control unit to the CU communication control unit.

  A counter information notification response for notifying the counter information notification result is transmitted from the CU communication control unit to the main control unit.

  The counter information notification and the counter information notification response will be described with reference to FIG. 29 described later.

  A writer management information request for requesting writer management information is transmitted from the main control unit to the CU communication control unit.

  A writer management information response notifying the writer management information is transmitted from the CU communication control unit to the main control unit.

  The writer management information request and the writer management information response will be described with reference to FIG. 29 described later. The data included in the writer management information response includes a command code, a writer ID (ROM writer ID), an authentication key version, and the like.

  The main control unit requests the CU communication control unit to update the authentication key, but transmits an authentication key update request.

  Data included in the authentication key update request includes a command code, a command size, a shipping manufacturer code, a writer ID (ROM writer ID), an authentication key version, an authentication key, a MAC key as an H-MAC key, and a MAC. include.

  An authentication key update response notifying the authentication key update result is transmitted from the CU communication control unit to the main control unit.

  A command (time notification) for notifying the current time is transmitted from the main control unit to the CU communication control unit.

  A response (time response) that is a notification that a time notification command has been received is transmitted from the CU communication control unit to the main control unit.

  A command (P unit communication control unit authentication request) for requesting authentication with the P unit communication control unit is transmitted from the main control unit to the CU communication control unit. Mutual authentication is performed between the CU communication control unit and the P-unit communication control unit. The main control unit requests the authentication result of the P-unit communication control unit by the CU communication control unit as a result of the mutual authentication. This command is not transmitted up to P units, but is an exceptional one.

  A response (P unit communication control unit authentication response) for notifying an authentication result with the P unit communication control unit is transmitted from the CU communication control unit to the main control unit. This response is not transmitted from the P units, but is an exceptional one. The CU communication control unit 80 obtains information such as the chip ID of the main control board 16 and the LSI 799 and then returns an authentication result to the main control unit 323.

  A device information request for requesting device information is transmitted from the main control unit to the CU communication control unit.

  A device information response notifying device information is transmitted from the CU communication control unit to the main control unit.

  A command (communication state request) for requesting a communication (transmission) state to the CU communication control unit is transmitted from the main control unit to the CU communication control unit. This communication (transmission) state is a command for requesting whether or not the communication state between the main control unit and the CU communication control unit is normal. This command is not transmitted up to P units, but is an exceptional one.

  A response (communication state response) for notifying the communication (transmission) state is transmitted from the CU communication control unit to the main control unit. This is a response in which the CU communication control unit determines whether the communication state between the main control unit and the CU communication control unit is appropriate, and returns the determination result to the main control unit. This response is not transmitted from the P units, but is an exceptional one.

  A command requesting re-authentication with the P-unit communication control unit (P-unit communication control unit re-authentication request) is transmitted from the main control unit to the CU communication control unit. Mutual authentication is performed between the CU communication control unit and the P-unit communication control unit. The main control unit requests the authentication result of the P-unit communication control unit by the CU communication control unit as a result of the mutual authentication. This command is not transmitted up to P units, but is an exceptional one.

  A response (P unit communication control unit re-authentication response) for notifying the response of the P unit communication control unit re-authentication request message is transmitted from the CU communication control unit to the main control unit. The CU communication control unit re-executes authentication between the P unit communication control units, and the main control unit acquires the authentication result by receiving the P unit communication control unit re-authentication response. This response is not transmitted from the P units, but is an exceptional one.

  A BB serial ID authentication request A for requesting BB serial ID authentication is transmitted from the main control unit to the CU communication control unit. The BB serial ID authentication request A will be described in detail later. This command is not transmitted up to P units, but is exceptional.

  A BB serial ID authentication response A for notifying authentication information of the BB serial ID is transmitted from the CU communication control unit to the main control unit. Details of the contents of this response will also be described later.

  A BB serial ID authentication request B for requesting BB serial ID authentication is transmitted from the main control unit to the CU communication control unit. This command is not transmitted up to P units, but is exceptional.

  A BB serial ID authentication response B for notifying authentication information of the BB serial ID is transmitted from the CU communication control unit to the main control unit.

  The BB serial ID authentication requests A and B and the BB serial ID authentication responses A and B will be described later with reference to FIG. Device authentication requests A and B and device authentication responses A and B will be described later with reference to FIG.

  A command requesting device authentication (device authentication request A) is transmitted from the main control unit to the CU communication control unit. This device authentication is for authenticating whether or not the authentication key (common key) stored in the main control unit and the CU communication control unit is the same key, and will be described in detail later. This command is not transmitted up to P units, but is an exceptional one.

  A response (device authentication response A) for notifying the device authentication result is transmitted from the CU communication control unit to the main control unit. Details of the contents of this response will be described later. This response is not transmitted from the P units, but is an exceptional one.

  A command for requesting device authentication (device authentication request B) is transmitted from the main control unit to the CU communication control unit. This device authentication is for authenticating whether or not the authentication key (common key) stored in the main control unit and the CU communication control unit is the same key, and will be described in detail later. This command is not transmitted up to P units, but is an exceptional one.

  A response (device authentication response B) for notifying the device authentication result is transmitted from the CU communication control unit to the main control unit. Details of the contents of this response will be described later. This response is not transmitted from the P units, but is an exceptional one.

  An authentication key setting request for requesting an authentication key update is transmitted from the CU communication control unit to the main control unit. The authentication key setting request is a response for notifying the main control unit of the authentication key setting information, and the authentication key information written in from the dedicated IC writer (ROM writer) (the authentication key stored in the EEPROM 813 in FIG. 8). ) From the CU communication control unit to the main control unit. Information included in the authentication key setting request includes a command code, a command size, a shipping manufacturer code, a writer ID (ROM writer ID), an authentication key version, an authentication key, a MAC key as an H-MAC key, and an encryption key. Padding character (random number), MAC. Except for the command code, the code information is encrypted and transmitted using the BB serial ID as an encryption key using the ECB block encryption mode.

  An authentication key setting response notifying the authentication key update result is transmitted from the main control unit to the CU communication control unit. The authentication key setting response is a command for notifying the CU communication control unit of the authentication key information setting result. Information included in the authentication key setting response includes a command code, a command size, an update result, an encryption padding character (random number), and a MAC. Other than the command code, the ECB block cipher mode is used for encryption and transmission using the BB serial ID as an encryption key.

  Next, among the commands / responses shown in FIGS. 9 to 11, the contents of the recovery response, the communication start request, the operation instruction, and the operation response will be described in detail based on FIGS. 10 to 17.

  Referring to FIG. 12, the response of the recovery response is transmitted from the P platform to the CU. The response of this recovery response is to transmit the recovery information (also referred to as recovery data) held by the P units to the CU. This “recovery information” refers to the data stored in the backup so that when the CU sends a recovery request command to the P units along with the execution of the recovery process, the P units send a recovery response to the CU. That is. As shown in FIGS. 12 and 13, the recovery information transmitted from the P platform to the CU includes connection time, final sequence number, C-ID, previous ball related information, and current ball related information.

  The column “encrypted” shown in FIG. 12 and subsequent figures is a column indicating whether or not the data to be transmitted is encrypted. The symbol “X” indicates that the data is not encrypted and the symbol “◯” indicates that it is encrypted. The key used for this encryption uses a session key (also called a telegram key), which will be described later.

  The connection time is a connection time (connection time data received from the CU at the start of communication) backed up by the P units. The final sequence number is the sequence number that was backed up by P units. The C-ID is a C-ID that has been backed up by P units. The last ball related information is the ball related information notified last time. Specifically, the previously notified game ball acquisition number information, the previously notified back ball addition information, the previously notified game ball firing number information, the previously notified symbol determination count 1, the previously notified symbol determination count 2, the previous notification The number of times of the starting port, the number of times of the starting port notified twice last time, the number of times of the first prize winning port notified last time, the number of times of the second time winning big winning port, and the number of times of winning ports 1 to 4 notified last time. As described above, the symbol determination number 1 and the symbol determination number 2 are divided by bits, but may be divided and transmitted by bytes.

  “Game ball acquired number information” is information on the number of balls to be added to a game ball by winning. The “back ball addition information” is addition information for adding the foul ball detected by the foul ball detection switch 33 (see FIG. 2) to the game ball. The “game ball firing number information” is information on the number of pachinko balls launched by the launch unit 38 (see FIG. 4).

  In the flowcharts of FIGS. 5 and 24 to 86, “game ball acquisition number information” and “back ball addition information” are collectively referred to as “addition ball number”. Further, “game ball firing number information” is expressed as “subtraction ball number”.

  The “symbol determined number of times 1” is the number of times the symbol is determined by the variable display device 1. The “symbol determination number of times 2” is the number of times the symbol has been determined by the variable display device 2.

  “Starting port number 1” is the number of pachinko ball winnings to the starting port 1. “Starting port number 2” refers to the number of times a pachinko ball is awarded to the starting port 2.

“The number of times of the grand prize opening 1” is the number of times the grand prize opening 1 is opened (number of rounds).
“The number of times of winning the prize winning opening 2” is the number of times of opening the winning opening 2 (number of rounds).

  “The number of winning holes 1 to 4” is the number of times that a pachinko ball is awarded to each of the winning holes 1 to 4.

  Further, as information on the recovery response transmitted from the P platform to the CU, there is current ball related information as the latest ball related information. Specifically, the current ball related information is information on the total number of game balls currently held by P units (also referred to as the number of game balls), information on the number of acquired game balls currently held by P units, and currently P units. Back ball addition information that is held, information on the number of game balls that are currently held on P units, symbol determination number of times currently held on P units, symbol determination number of times currently held on P units, current 1 start opening held by P stand, 2 start openings currently held by P stand, 1 big winning opening currently held by P stand, 1 prize opening currently held by P stand 2 times, the number of winning openings 1 to 4 currently held on the P platform.

  Note that the information marked with * in FIG. 12 is data to be backed up by P units, and ALL0 is set at the time of factory shipment and when the backup data is indefinite.

  The meanings and determination points of various numbers of balls in (Note 1) shown in FIG. 12 are shown in FIGS. The meanings of the various balls and the contents of the confirmation points are as shown in FIGS. 18 and 19, but a supplementary explanation will be given below.

  The game ball total number information is the number of game balls held by P units. Note that the CU checks whether the number of game balls of the P units matches the number of game balls after the correction of the CU. If they do not match, the CU sends a communication disconnection request command to the P units. The communication is disconnected and P games are stopped (see FIG. 58, etc.) Then, the CU executes the recovery process and sends a communication start request to the P machines (see FIG. 37), thereby changing the game ball correction request to the P machines in accordance with the data correction request included in the communication start request command. The P game balls are corrected to the number of game balls after being corrected on the CU side.

  The symbol determination number 1 and the symbol determination number 2 are symbol determination information for winning a pachinko ball in the starting port 1 and the starting port 2, respectively. Is used.

  The number of start ports 1 and the number of start ports 2 are the number of times that the pachinko balls have won the P start ports 1 and 2 and the CU uses this data for checking the operating state of the game machine.

  The grand prize opening 1 and the big prize opening 2 are the number of times that the pachinko ball has won the P prize winning opening 1 and the big winning prize opening 2 (number), and the CU is the operating state of the game machine (P machine). Use this data for checking.

  The winning opening 1 to the winning opening 4 are the number (number) of the pachinko balls won in the P normal winning openings 1 to 4, and the CU uses this data for checking the operating state of the game machine.

  Referring to FIG. 14, the communication start request command transmitted from the CU to the P machine requests the P machine to correct the game ball and sequence number and to back up the new communication ID (communication start time). .

  Specific data of this communication start request includes connection time, data correction request, sequence number, and game ball data, as shown in the lower part of FIG. The connection time is the time when communication between the CU and the P unit is started, and is held by the CU and transmitted from the CU to the P unit. This connection time is used as a communication connection ID.

  The data correction request is a request from the CU to correct data to the P units, and is composed of 8 bits of Bit0 to Bit7. Bit 0 is a bit for designating whether or not there is a clear request. When it is “0”, there is no clear request, and when it is “1”, clear request is designated. When there is a clear request, a request for clearing the backup data held on the P side such as “game ball”, “sequence number”, “number of added balls”, “number of subtracted balls”, etc. to the P units is made.

  Bit 1 is a bit for designating whether or not there is a sequence number correction request. When it is “0”, there is no sequence number correction request, and when it is “1”, the sequence number correction request is specified.

  Bit 2 is a bit for designating whether or not there is a game ball correction request. When it is “0”, it indicates that there is a game ball correction request, and when it is “1”, it indicates that there is no game ball correction request.

  In the flowcharts of FIG. 24 and subsequent figures, when the bit specifying the presence / absence of a request is “0”, the request is not present, and when the bit is “1”, the request is present. For example, when Bit 0 of the data correction request is “1”, it is expressed as “clear request present”, and when “0”, “clear request not present”. In addition, as shown in parentheses in the data correction request column, “clear request” is “recovery clear”, “sequence number correction request” is “SQN correction”, and “game ball correction request” is “game ball correction”. ".

  The sequence number (also referred to as SQN) is a sequence number stored in the CU. The game balls are the number of game balls stored in the CU.

  The CU backs up the connection time and backs up the “main chip ID” and the “payout chip ID” when transmitting the communication start request command.

The P units perform the following processing when receiving this communication start request.
When the clear request is ON, the backup data held on the P side such as “game ball”, “sequence number”, “number of added balls”, “number of subtracted balls” is cleared to zero.

  When the sequence number correction request is ON, the notified sequence number is overwritten with the sequence number held by the P units.

  When the game ball correction request is ON, the notified game balls are overwritten with the game balls held by the P units.

Back up the connection time.
In addition, each process performed with the said P units is performed in an order from the top.

  The operation instruction commands transmitted from the CU to the P units shown in FIG. 15 are “addition of game balls”, “subtraction of game balls”, “game permission / prohibition”, “game balls and sequence numbers”. "Clear" operation is instructed, and transmission of various game machine information is requested. The CU uses this command to periodically check the status of P units.

  As an operation request, 8-bit data of Bit0 to Bit7 is transmitted from the CU to the P units. With respect to Bit 0, a game ball number addition request is instructed when “1”, and a game ball number addition non-request is instructed when “0”. For Bit1, “1” indicates that there is a game ball number subtraction request, and “0” indicates that there is no game ball subtraction request. As for Bit2, “1” indicates that a game permission is requested, and “0” indicates that no game permission is requested.

  For Bit 3, “1” indicates that there is a game prohibition request, and “0” indicates that there is no game prohibition request. With regard to Bit 4, when the number is "1", the presence of a clear request for the number of game balls and sequence number is instructed.

  Bit 5 is used for a glass door opening request, and Bit 6 is used for a cell (front frame) opening request. Bit 7 is provided as a spare.

  As shown in parentheses in FIG. 15, the “game ball number addition request” is also simply referred to as “addition”, the “game ball number subtraction request” is also simply referred to as “subtraction”, and the “game prohibition request” is It is also simply referred to as “prohibition request”, “game ball number and sequence number clear request” is also simply referred to as “clear request”, and “glass door open request” is also simply referred to as “glass open request”.

  When a plurality of bits of Bit0 to Bit7 are “1”, the P units execute in order from Bit0.

  The state of the CU corresponding to each bit base of the operation request is that the card is being held when Bit 0 is “1”, the card insertion process is being performed when Bit 1 is “1”, and Bit 2 is “1”. In some cases, addition display is in progress, subtraction display is in progress when Bit 3 is “1”, clear display is in progress when Bit 4 is “1”, and trial hit mode is in progress when Bit 5 is “1”.

  This CU state is composed of 6 bits of Bit0 to Bit5, but it may be composed of 16 bits of Bit0 to Bit15 so that the following information can be transmitted by each bit.

Bit0: 1 = Card insertion processing Bit1: 1 = Cash insertion processing Bit2: 1 = General card (visitor card) holding Bit3: 1 = Member card holding Bit4: 1 = Test card holding Bit7-5: Reserve Bit8 : 1 = Prepaid loan display in progress Bit9: 1 = Replay lending display in progress Bit10: 1 = Mochitama split display in progress
Bit 11: 1 = Wagon service is displayed Bit 12: 1 = Clear is displayed Bit 13: 1 = Breaking Bit 15-14: Preliminary Data for the number of balls requested to be added that is valid only when Bit 0 of the operation request is “1”. It is transmitted from the CU to the P platform. This data on the number of balls requested for addition indicates a value to be added to the number of game balls.

  Data of the number of balls required for subtraction that is valid only when Bit 1 of the operation request is “1” is transmitted from the CU to the P units. This subtraction request ball number data indicates a value to be subtracted from the game ball number.

  Further, card balance data indicating the balance of the card inserted in the CU is transmitted from the CU to the P units. The C-ID transmitted from the CU to the P platform is set with the following data depending on the state. When the card is not inserted, “ALL00h” is set. While the card is held, the C-ID of the card is set. “ALLFFh” is set during the test hit mode.

  It should be noted that during the holding of the card, the data may be such that the card inserted into the CU can be distinguished depending on whether the card is a membership card or a visitor card. For example, “holding card” is composed of 2 bits, and the first bit is set to “1” while the membership card is held, and the second bit is set to “1” while the visitor card is held. Furthermore, in the case of a visitor card, the card is basically kept in the CU at all times, so in the case of a visitor card, the card is held only when there is a balance in the visitor card. It may be controlled so that the C-ID is transmitted as (when Bit is 1). Further, the C-ID may not be stored in the visitor card, but the C-ID may be stored only in the member card.

  Further, the error code being displayed on the CU is transmitted from the CU to the P platform. Note that “ALL00h” is transmitted as the data of the CU error code in which no error has occurred.

  Referring to FIG. 16, the response of the operation response is transmitted from the P platform to the CU. The response of the operation response is to notify the CU of the execution result of the instruction operation and the game table information such as the number of game balls.

  As an execution result, it is transmitted from P units to the CU as 7-bit data of Bit0 to Bit6. For Bit0, when “1”, an execution result of the rejection of the number of game balls is indicated, and when “0”, an execution result indicating that the addition of the number of game balls is not rejected is indicated. Regarding Bit1, when “1”, the execution result of the rejection of the number of game balls is indicated, and when “0”, the execution result indicating that the subtraction of the number of game balls is not rejected is indicated. As for Bit2, when “1”, the execution result of the game permission rejection is shown, and when “0”, the execution result that the game permission is not rejected is shown.

  For Bit 3, when “1”, the execution result of the game prohibition rejection is indicated, and when “0”, the execution result indicating that the game prohibition is not rejected is indicated.

  For Bit 4, when “1”, the number of game balls and sequence number clear rejection result are shown, and when “0”, the execution result that game ball number and sequence number clear is not rejected is shown.

  For Bit 5, when “1”, an execution result indicating that the opening of the glass door is rejected is indicated, and when “0”, an execution result indicating that the opening of the glass door is not rejected is indicated.

  For Bit 6, when “1”, an execution result indicating that the cell release has been rejected is indicated, and when “6”, an execution result indicating that the cell release is not rejected is indicated.

  As shown in parentheses in FIG. 16, “game ball number addition refusal” is also simply referred to as “addition refusal”, “game ball number subtraction refusal” is also simply referred to as “subtraction refusal”, and “game permission refusal” ”Is simply referred to as“ permission denied ”,“ game ban refusal ”is also simply referred to as“ prohibition refusal ”,“ game ball number and sequence number clear refusal ”is also simply referred to as“ clear refusal ”, and“ glass door refusal ” Is simply referred to as “refusal to open glass”.

  The “game ball total number information” is the current number of game balls (the number of game balls obtained as a result of calculating addition / subtraction). The “game ball acquisition number information” is the number of acquired game balls, and is the total number information when there are a plurality of winnings at the time of transmission. The CU 3 adds the data of the game ball acquisition number information to the number of game balls currently held, but does not add the number of game balls when receiving this data without holding a card.

  “Back ball addition information” is the number of back balls (foul balls) when fired by the launch unit 38 (see FIG. 4). Information. The CU 3 adds the data of the back ball addition information to the number of game balls currently held, but does not add the number of game balls when receiving this data without holding the card. The “game ball firing number information” is the number of balls fired by the launching unit 38 (see FIG. 4). If there are a plurality of balls fired at the time of transmission, the information is the total number. The CU 3 subtracts the data of the game ball firing number information from the number of game balls currently held, but does not subtract the number of game balls when receiving this data without holding a card. CU3 does not subtract the number of game balls when the number of game balls held by CU3 is zero. The “symbol determination number of times 1” is symbol determination information for winning of the start port 1, and “1” is added when the symbol variation is stopped. The “symbol determination number of times 2” is symbol determination information for winning at the start port 2, and “1” is added when the symbol variation is stopped.

  The CU performs a game ball correction process using “game ball acquisition number information”, “back ball addition information”, and “game ball firing number information”. Specifically, the number of game balls + game ball acquisition number information + back ball addition information−game ball firing number information is calculated, and the calculation result is corrected to a new number of game balls (total number of game balls). Then, it is checked whether or not the total number of game balls transmitted from the P units matches the corrected number of game balls (game ball total number information). If they do not match, recovery processing is performed. A communication start request command is transmitted to the P units, and the data correction request data (Bit2 is “1” data) included in the command and the number of game balls stored in the CU are stored in the P units. Processing for correcting the number of game balls (game ball total number information) to the corrected number of game balls (game ball total number information) on the CU side is performed.

  Bits 0 to 3 are prepared as gaming machine error status 2, but this is provided as a reserve, and is used to deal with manufacturer-specific error information that is not used to specify the actual error status. Is.

  FIG. 20A shows details of each bit in the gaming machine state 1 in (Note 2) shown in FIG. Supplementary explanation will be given below.

  The game permission state / game prohibition state in Bit 0 of the game table state 1 indicates whether or not the game is permitted or prohibited by the CU, and the P device that has received an instruction by the command from the CU is instructed. Transition to the state. Further, when a communication abnormality occurs, the P cars transition to the game prohibition state.

  During standby / game in Bit1, it is data indicating whether or not the fan (player) is playing (launching a ball), and the state where the fan (player) is not firing a ball is waiting The state in which a fan (player) is firing a ball is playing. The completion of the game of Bit 3 indicates whether or not the launch of the ball is stopped in the P platform, and then all the pachinko balls that have been thrown into the game area 27 are collected and the whereabouts of all the launched balls is confirmed It is. The state in which the whereabouts of all the balls are unconfirmed is the game incomplete (Bit3 = 0), and the state in which the whereabouts of all the balls are confirmed is the completion of the game (Bit3 = 1). In addition, if the P platform has not confirmed the ball firing for 15 seconds or more, it times out and the game is completed.

  If the completion of the game has not been confirmed for 15 seconds or more and the game has been completed, and the ball clogging that has occurred in the game area has been resolved and the ball has won, etc. A display prompting reinsertion may be displayed on the display 312 or the display 54, and control may be performed so that other cards are not accepted until the previous card is reinserted. Then, after the previous card is reinserted, the number of game balls is manually corrected (manual correction) by a game clerk or the like.

  The gaming machine reset in Bit 4 indicates an initial reset signal of the gaming machine (P machines), and is set to “1” for 30 seconds after the P machines are activated. The presence of game table history information in Bit 5 is data indicating whether or not the P table has game table history information such as “start count” and “big hit count”, and when it is “0”, there is no game table history information. In the case of “1”, the presence of game table history information is indicated. If the game machine history information is cleared by clearing RAM, the P machine turns this data OFF. Further, after the RAM is cleared, this data is turned ON at a timing when data such as “start count” and “big hit count” is added. In order to match the game machine history data with the P machine, the CU 3 also clears the game machine history data held in the CU 3 when detecting this data OFF.

  FIG. 20B shows details of each bit in the gaming machine state 2 shown in (Note 3) of FIG. A supplementary explanation will be given below.

  The big hit 1 of Bit 0 is set to “1” during the big hit and during the small hit. The big hit 2 of Bit 1 is set to “1” during the big hit, during the small hit and during the high base. For the big hit 3 of Bit 2, “1” is set during the big hit (only the big hit that becomes the high base).

  The big hit 4 of Bit 3 is set to “1” during the big hit (only the big hit that becomes the high base) and during the high base. The high base of Bit4 is set to “1” during the high base.

  The gaming table error state 1 is composed of 8 bits of Bit0 to Bit7, and details of each bit are shown in Note 4 of FIG. 21 (c). Bit0 is a bit indicating whether or not the frame body (front frame 5), that is, the cell is being opened, and is set to “1” when the cell is being opened. Bit 1 is a bit indicating whether or not the glass plate, that is, the glass door 6 is being opened. “1” is set when the glass plate (glass door) is being opened. Bit2 is set to “1” when a magnetic sensor error is detected when the magnetic sensor detects an illegal occurrence of bringing a magnet close to a game area or the like. After “1” is set, Bit 2 is set to “0” by turning on / off power of the P units.

  Bit3 is set to “1” when an illegal winning of a pachinko ball is detected. Then, the power is restored by turning on / off the power of P units, and Bit4 becomes “0”.

  The gaming machine error state 2 indicates manufacturer-specific error information, and 4 bits of Bit0 to Bit3 indicate that a gaming machine error 1 is occurring, a gaming machine error 2 is occurring, a gaming machine error 3 is occurring, a gaming machine error 4 occurrences are indicated.

  FIG. 22 is a diagram illustrating a response (communication state response) transmitted from the CU communication control unit to the main control unit. The response of this communication status response is indicated by a hexadecimal string, and 0x00 indicates that the communication status is OK (appropriate). In other cases, that is, in the case of 0x01, 0x02, 0x03, 0x04, and 0x10, it is indicated that the abnormality is shown in FIG. In FIG. 22, CRC-NG means that the result of parity check is NG, that is, abnormal. MAC-NG is NG of Message Authentication Code. Decryption NG means that the data transmitted after being encrypted is decrypted and becomes abnormal as a result of not being proper data. The data length NG means that the length of the received data is not normal. The disconnection detection means an abnormality in which occurrence of disconnection between the P platform and the CU is detected.

  FIG. 23 is a diagram illustrating a response of a device information response transmitted from the CU communication control unit to the main control unit. The device information notified from the CU communication control unit to the CU includes a command code, a command size, an acquisition result, a main control chip ID, a manufacturer code, a format code, a payout control chip ID, a manufacturer code, a format code, and a MAC. It is.

  Referring to FIG. 23, a response of a device information response is transmitted from the CU communication control unit to the CU. The response of the device information response is to transmit information on the main control chip ID and the payout control chip ID to the CU. The command code identifies the command code. The data size of the command is specified by the code size. One of OK (with collected information), NG (without collected information), and uncollected is specified by the acquisition result. The main control chip ID is the chip ID recorded on the P main control boards 16, and the payout control chip ID is the P payout chip IDs stored in the payout control unit 17. It is.

  Next, a process executed by the CPU in the main control unit 323 of the CU and a process executed by the CPU mounted on the payout control unit 17 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  First, with reference to FIG. 24, the mode of transmission and reception of commands and responses between the CU and the P platform will be described. A command is transmitted from the CU to the P unit, and the P unit returns a response to the CU in response to the command. After receiving the response, the CU transmits the next command to the P units, and the P unit returns a response to the CU in response to the command. As shown in FIG. 24, the period from the transmission of the first command to the P units from the CU to the transmission of the next command is controlled to 200 ms, that is, 0.2 seconds. Further, the period from the transmission of a response from the P platform to the CU until the transmission of the next response is controlled to 200 ms, that is, 0.2 seconds.

  Thus, both a command and a response are transmitted between the CU and the P platform at an interval of 200 ms. On the other hand, in the P platform, by operating the hitting operation handle 25, 100 pachinko balls are shot into the game area 27 per minute, so the hitting time interval is 0.6 seconds. As a result, a plurality of commands and responses are transmitted and received while firing one ball.

  Therefore, the response of the motion response for notifying the amount of change in the number of game balls is sequentially transmitted from the P platform to the CU at intervals shorter than the ball firing time interval. As a result, the P units can finely notify the CU of the amount of change in the number of game balls. On the other hand, the CU can manage the points by finely reflecting the changes in the points on the P platform side.

  Here, the transmission interval of the command and the response is set to 200 ms, but the transmission interval may be longer or shorter than this. For example, the transmission interval may be set as the P emission time intervals. It is also possible to match.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 25, a process when communication disconnection is detected on the CU side will be described. If the response is not received within one second after the CU sends a command to the P machine, the same command is sent to the P machine again. If no response is received within one second, a second retransmission is performed in which the same command is transmitted to P devices. If no response is received from the P units within one second after the second retransmission, the CU determines that there is a communication abnormality at this stage. This communication abnormality may be caused by the disconnection of the connector 330 or 20 shown in FIG. 4 or the disconnection of the connection wiring or the power supply of the P units.

  The CU transmits a device information request command to the P devices in order to start the connection sequence again after 5 seconds after determining the communication abnormality. The specific contents of the process of transmitting the device information request command to the P devices and starting the connection sequence will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 26, a process when communication disconnection is detected on the P platform side will be described. A command is transmitted from the CU to the P machine, and the P machine sends a response to the CU in response to the command. Next, when the state in which the command from the CU is not transmitted to the P units continues for 4 seconds, the P unit determines that the communication is interrupted and stops the driving of the hitting ball motor 18 to prohibit the game. At the same time, the state transits to an unconnected state. The cause of the communication disconnection may be the disconnection of the connector 330 or 20, disconnection of the connection wiring, or the power supply disconnection of the CU, as described with reference to FIG.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 27, the processing of the connection sequence at the time of power activation will be described. The process of the connection sequence in FIG. 27 is a process that is executed when communication is resumed after the communication between the CU and the P unit is normally completed. Specifically, it is executed when communication is resumed after the power of the CU is turned off while the card is not inserted (see FIG. 38). A typical example is a case where the power supply is turned off after one day of business at the amusement hall is finished, and the power supply is turned on at the start of business the next day.

  First, at the time of power-on, communication is started after stopping the hitting motor 18 to stop the game in the P platform. In the CU, an authentication sequence process is first executed. The specific control contents of the authentication sequence process are shown in the flowcharts of the subroutine programs shown in FIGS. By this authentication sequence processing, a device information request command is transmitted from the CU to the P units. In response, the P device returns a response of a device information response. The response of this device information response includes a main chip ID and a payout chip ID.

  The CU that has received the device information response stores the information included in the device information response, and requests authentication for the P devices that have responded (P devices identified by the received main chip ID and payout chip ID). Is sent to P units.

The P devices that have received the authentication request return an authentication response to the CU.
Next, specific control contents of the processing of the authentication sequence shown in FIG. 27 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  28A and 28B are flowcharts showing a subroutine program of the authentication sequence shown in FIG. There are two types of authentication sequences shown in FIG. 27: an authentication sequence when the power supply of the CU is activated, and an authentication sequence when the power supply of the P units (game machines) is activated. The authentication sequence when the power supply of the CU is activated is shown in FIG. Referring to FIG. 28A, the main control unit 323 starts communication after completing authentication with the upper server 801 (see FIG. 112). The CU communication control unit 80 performs authentication with the P-unit communication control unit 81. Thereafter, communication is started. Then, a CU communication control unit authentication sequence is first executed between the main control unit 323 and the CU communication control unit 80, and then a chip ID authentication sequence is executed.

  FIG. 28 (b) shows an authentication sequence when the power source of P units (game machines) is activated. Referring to FIG. 28 (b), after communication disconnection with P units is detected in main control unit 323 and CU communication control unit 80, CU communication control unit 80 recovers P after communication with P units is restored. Authentication with the stand. Thereafter, a chip ID authentication sequence is executed between the main control unit 323 and the CU communication control unit 80. Thereafter, communication with P units is possible.

  FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing a subroutine program of the CU communication control unit authentication sequence shown in FIG. The main control unit 323 starts communication after completing authentication with the upper server 801. Then, a BB serial ID authentication sequence is executed between the main control unit 323 and the CU communication control unit 80. By this BB serial ID authentication sequence, the BB serial ID, that is, the SID of the main control unit stored in the EEPROM 808 shown in FIG. 8 is authenticated. Next, the main control unit 323 executes the CU communication control unit serial ID authentication sequence only when the serial ID of the CU communication control unit is acquired from the upper server 801. The CU communication control unit serial ID is authenticated by the CU communication control unit serial ID authentication sequence.

  Next, a writer management information request command is transmitted from the main control unit 323 to the CU communication control unit 80. The writer management information is information related to the ROM writer used when writing the authentication information to the EEPROMs 813 and 808 described with reference to FIG. For example, data such as ROM writer ID, ROM writer manufacturer code, and key version stored in the ROM writer.

  Whether the main control unit 323 collates the writer management information included in the writer management information response transmitted from the CU communication control unit 80 with the writer management information stored in the main control unit 323, so that they match. Check whether or not. As a result of the collation check by the writer management information, a certain level of security is ensured and the security is improved even if the authentication keys of the main control unit 323 and the CU communication control unit 80 coincide.

  Next, a device authentication sequence using an authentication key is executed between the main control unit 323 and the CU communication control unit 80. Next, a counter information notification command for requesting transmission of counter information is transmitted from the main control unit 323 to the CU communication control unit 80. In response, the CU communication control unit transmits a response of a counter information notification response to the main control unit 323 to notify the initial vector of the CTR mode. When using the ECB mode, which is a simple block cipher usage mode, if the same plaintext is encrypted with a certain key, it becomes the same ciphertext. There is an inconvenience that it can be determined by comparing the ciphertext whether or not it is the same as the portion, and in order to solve this, the initial vector of the CTR mode is notified to the CU 323. The encryption mode is set by notification of the counter information. This encryption mode setting is reset every time the power is turned on every day at the game hall, so that security is improved. The ciphertext of communication after the setting of the counter information is further scrambled. For example, if this scramble processing is not performed, the same encrypted data is exchanged every day even if the encryption is performed, and the encryption is easily broken. Such inconvenience can be solved by scrambling.

  Next, the authentication key update sequence is executed between the main control unit 323 and the CU communication control unit 80 only when the main control unit 323 obtains update information from the upper server 801. By this authentication key update sequence, the authentication key can be changed to a new one.

  Next, the main control unit 323 transmits the current time to the CU communication control unit 80. The CU communication control unit 80 receives the time information, generates a session key (telegram key) from the authentication key stored in the EEPROM 813 and the received time information, and transmits it to the main control unit 323 as a time response. To do. The session key (message key) can be generated by any method. For example, the received time information and the authentication key are synthesized according to a predetermined algorithm (for example, exclusive OR). The time information generated or received may be encrypted with an authentication key, and the encryption result may be used as a session key (message key). The session key is cleared when the power is turned off and is generated again when the power is turned on next time.

  Next, an authentication sequence similar to the device authentication sequence shown in FIG. 33 is executed between the main control unit 323 and the CU communication control unit 80 using a session key. Then, when the authentication result is appropriate, encryption communication between the main control unit 323 and the CU communication control unit 80 is performed after encryption and decryption using the session key.

  FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing a subroutine program of the chip ID authentication sequence shown in FIGS. The main control unit 323 starts communication after completing authentication with the CU communication control unit 80. Then, a payout control authentication result request command is transmitted from the main control unit 323 to the CU communication control unit 80. This payout control authentication result request command requests the authentication result of the CU communication control unit 80 authenticating the P unit communication control unit 81 provided in the LSI 799 of the P unit 2. The CU communication control unit 80 transmits a response of a payout control authentication result response for notifying the authentication result with the P-unit communication control unit 81 of the payout control chip (LSI) to the main control unit 323.

  Next, a device information request command is transmitted from the main control unit 323 to the CU communication control unit 80. This device information request command requests the chip ID of the CU communication control unit. The CU communication control unit 80 transmits the chip ID of the CU communication control unit 80 to the main control unit 323 as a device information response. Receiving this, the main control unit 323 makes an inquiry to the upper server 801 to check the device information (chip ID), and stops communication after NG (inappropriate). If it is not NG, a business message can be transmitted to the P machines thereafter. Then, transmission / reception of a recovery request, a recovery response, an operation instruction, and an operation response command response is performed between the main control unit 323 and the CU communication control unit 80.

  FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing a subroutine program of the BB serial ID authentication sequence shown in FIG. 29, and challenge-response authentication is performed. Challenge-response authentication is generally an authentication method that prevents eavesdropping of IDs and the like during communication by applying special processing to character strings. For example, the authenticating side performs authentication. A random number sequence (called "challenge code") is sent to the recipient, and the recipient of the challenge code synthesizes the ID etc. and the received challenge code according to a predetermined algorithm, and a response code Generate and reply. On the side that received the response code, generate a response code in the same way from the transmitted challenge code and pre-stored ID, etc., and compare the sent response code with the generated response code to see if they match Authentication is performed to determine whether or not.

  In the present embodiment, first, a command of BB serial ID request 1 is transmitted from the main control unit 323 to the CU communication control unit 80. Upon receiving this, the CU communication control unit 80 transmits a response requesting a challenge code as the BB serial ID authentication response 1. Upon receipt of the request, the main control unit 323 generates a challenge code using the BB serial ID, that is, the SID of the main control unit stored in the EEPROM 808 illustrated in FIG. 8, and uses the challenge code as the BB serial ID authentication request. It transmits to the communication control part 80. Upon receiving this, the CU communication control unit 80 generates a response code using the BB serial ID, that is, the SID of the main control unit stored in the EEPROM 813 shown in FIG. 8, and the response code is used as the BB serial ID authentication response 2. To the main control unit 323. In response to this, the main control unit 323 checks the response code to determine whether it is appropriate. When it is inappropriate (NG), control is performed so that subsequent communication is not performed.

  Any algorithm for generating the challenge code and generating the response code may be used. An example of the algorithm is described below. As a challenge code generation, a random number (binary number) having the same data length is generated for the code data (binary number) of the BB serial ID, and an exclusive OR (exclusive OR) of the BB serial ID and the random number is generated. The calculation result is transmitted to the CU communication control unit 80 as a challenge code. On the other hand, as a response code generation in the CU communication control unit 80, an exclusive OR of a BB serial ID (binary number) is calculated for the received challenge code. If the BB serial ID on the main control unit 323 side matches the BB serial ID on the CU communication control unit 80 side, it means that the exclusive OR of the same BB serial ID has been calculated twice for the random number. The result is the original random number. Then, the original random number is transmitted to the main control unit 323 as a response code. The main control unit 323 determines whether or not the generated random number matches the random number sent as a response code. If they match, the main control unit 323 determines that the random number is appropriate, while if not, the main control unit 323 determines that the generated random number is incorrect (NG). judge.

  FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing a subroutine program of the CU communication control unit serial ID authentication sequence shown in FIG. First, the CU communication control unit serial ID authentication request 1 is transmitted from the main control unit 323 to the CU communication control unit 80. Upon receiving this, the CU communication control unit 80 generates a challenge code A using the CU communication control unit serial ID, that is, the SID of the CU communication control unit stored in the ROM 809 shown in FIG. The CU communication control unit transmits the serial ID authentication response 1 to the main control unit 323. Receiving this, the main control unit 323 generates a response code A using the CU communication control unit serial ID, that is, the SID of the CU communication control unit stored in the EEPROM 808 shown in FIG. The communication control unit serial ID authentication request 2 is transmitted to the CU communication control unit 80. Receiving it, the communication control unit 80 checks the response code A to determine whether it is appropriate. Then, the CU communication control unit serial ID authentication response 2 including the determination result (check result) and the challenge code B request is transmitted to the main control unit 323. Receiving this, the main control unit 323 performs control so that subsequent communication is not performed when the check result is inappropriate (NG).

  The algorithm of challenge code generation and response code generation shown in FIG. 32 may be any algorithm. For example, the algorithm using exclusive OR described in FIG. 31 can be used. .

  The challenge-response authentication algorithm is not limited to the above, and may be as follows. For example, the random number R1 is generated in the CU communication control unit 80, and the challenge code A is generated by encrypting the random number R1 using the SID (referred to as SIDM) of the CU communication control unit stored in the CU communication control unit 80 as a key. If expressed by an equation, challenge code A = ESIDM (R1). This is transmitted to the main control unit 323. The main control unit 323 generates a response code A by decoding with the stored SIDM. Expressed by the equation, response code A = DSIDM (challenge code A) = DSIDM (ESIDM (R1)) = R1. This is returned to the communication control unit 80, and it is checked whether or not the random number R1 previously generated in the communication control unit 80 matches the returned response code A (= R1). It is determined that the authentication is successful.

  Further, the main control unit 323 generates a random number R2 and encrypts the random number R2 using the SID (referred to as SIDT) of the main control unit stored in the main control unit 323 as a key to generate a challenge code B. If expressed by a formula, challenge code B = ESIDT (R2). This is transmitted to the communication control unit 80, and decrypted with the SIDT stored in the communication control unit 80 to generate the response code B. Expressed by the equation, the response code B = DSIDT (challenge code B) = DSIDT (ESIDT (R2)) = R2. This is returned to the main control unit 323, and the random number R2 previously generated in the main control unit 323 is compared with the returned response code B (= R2) to check whether they match. It is determined that the authentication is successful.

  FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing a subroutine program of the device authentication sequence shown in FIG. This device authentication sequence is an encryption / decryption authentication sequence using an encryption key (authentication key), and an ECB mode is used as a block encryption mode. First, the main control unit 323 transmits a device authentication request 1 to the CU communication control unit 80. Upon receiving this, the CU communication control unit 80 generates a random number A and encrypts the random number A with the authentication key stored in the EEPROM 813 shown in FIG. Also create a MAC. This MAC is a Message Authentication Code. For example, a value obtained by calculating the generated random number A using a predetermined hash function is defined as MAC. That is, the message digest of the generated random number A becomes the MAC. Then, the CU communication control unit 80 transmits the encrypted random number A and MAC as the device authentication response 1 to the main control unit 323.

  Receiving this, the main control unit 323 generates the original plaintext random number A by decrypting the received encrypted random number A with the authentication key stored in the EEPROM 808 shown in FIG. The MAC is calculated using the hash function. Then, it is checked whether or not the calculated MAC matches the MAC transmitted from the CU communication control unit 80. If they match, it is determined to be appropriate, and if they do not match, it is determined to be inappropriate (NG).

  Next, the main control unit 323 generates a random number B, and encrypts the random number B using the authentication key stored in the EEPROM 808 shown in FIG. Further, the random number B is calculated using a predetermined hash function to create a MAC. Then, the encrypted random number B and MAC are further transmitted as an apparatus authentication request 2 to the CU communication control unit 80 as an authentication result based on the apparatus authentication response 1. Receiving it, the CU communication control unit 80 decrypts the encrypted random number B received using the authentication key stored in the EEPROM 813 shown in FIG. Then, the MAC is calculated by calculating the random number B using a predetermined hash function. It is checked whether or not the calculated MAC matches the received MAC. If they match, it is determined to be appropriate, and if they do not match, it is determined to be inappropriate (NG). Then, the determination result is transmitted as a device authentication response 2 to the main control unit 323. When the determination result is inappropriate (NG), control is performed so that subsequent communication is not performed.

  FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing a subroutine program of the authentication key update sequence shown in FIG. When there is an authentication key update request from the upper server 801, the main control unit 323 transmits the authentication key update request to the CU communication control unit 80. The update request from the higher-level server 801 includes new authentication key data. The main control unit 323 updates the authentication key stored in the EEPROM 808 shown in FIG. 8 to a new authentication key transmitted from the upper server 801, and sends an authentication key update request transmitted from the upper server 801. Transmit to the CU communication control unit 80. Upon receiving this, the CU communication control unit 80 performs processing to update the authentication key stored in the EEPROM 813 shown in FIG. 8 to the new authentication key that has been transmitted, and uses the result as an authentication key update response. To H.323.

  Receiving this, the main control unit executes a device authentication sequence with the communication control unit 80 using the newly updated authentication key. This device authentication sequence is the same authentication sequence as the control shown in FIG. If the authentication result is appropriate, communication is performed using the authentication key thereafter.

  FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the storage setting of the authentication key in the EEPROM 808. The authentication key is transmitted from the CU communication control unit 80 to the main control unit 323, and the authentication key is stored in the EEPROM 808 of the main control unit 323. .

  Referring to FIG. 35, this authentication key setting sequence is an authentication key writing sequence at the time of card unit (CU) manufacture. First, the main control unit 323 waits for transmission of authentication key information from the CU communication control unit 80 on condition that an authentication key with the CU communication control unit 80 is not written. The CU communication control unit 80 starts communication in response to a request from a dedicated IC writer (ROM writer). Then, the CU communication control unit 80 transmits the BB serial ID, that is, the SID authentication request A of the main control unit stored in the EEPROM 808 shown in FIG. 8 to the main control unit 323. Receiving it, the main control unit 323 transmits a BB serial ID authentication response A for requesting a challenge code to the CU communication control unit 80 to the CU communication control unit 80. Receiving it, the communication control unit 80 generates a challenge code using the BB serial ID, that is, the SID of the main control unit stored in the EEPROM 813 shown in FIG. 8, and uses the challenge code as the BB serial ID authentication request B. Transmit to the main control unit 323.

  Receiving this, the main control unit 323 generates a response code using the BB serial ID, that is, the SID of the main control unit stored in the EEPROM 808 shown in FIG. 8, and uses the response code as the BB serial ID authentication response B. Transmit to the CU communication control unit 80. Receiving it, the CU communication control unit 80 determines whether or not the response code is appropriate, and transmits the authentication key information shown below only when it is appropriate (OK). The challenge response authentication shown in FIG. 35 can also use the same algorithm (for example, exclusive OR) as the challenge response authentication shown in FIGS.

  When the CU communication control unit 80 determines that the authentication result is appropriate, the authentication key information written from the dedicated IC writer (ROM writer), that is, the authentication key stored in the EEPROM 813 shown in FIG. Information is transmitted to the main control unit 323 as an authentication key setting request. Receiving this, the main control unit 323 stores the transmitted authentication key in the EEPROM 808 shown in FIG. 8 and transmits an authentication key setting response indicating that the authentication key has been stored to the CU communication control unit 80.

  As a result, a common authentication key (common key) is stored between the main control unit 323 and the CU communication control unit 80. The CU communication control unit 80 then performs device authentication using the common authentication key. This device authentication is the same as the device authentication sequence shown in FIG. If it is determined that the device authentication is appropriate, the subsequent communication is not performed, and a reset wait state is entered.

  Next, returning to FIG. 27, the CU that has received the authentication response next transmits a recovery request to the P units. In response to this, the P machine returns the recovery data backed up inside the P machine (specifically, the payout control unit 17) to the CU as a response. This recovery data includes connection time, last SQN (sequence number), C-ID, previous ball related information, and current ball related information. To be precise, it is the various data shown in FIG. 12, and “recovery data” in the subsequent flowcharts is exactly the various data shown in FIG. In the present embodiment, the “final SQN” included in the recovery data is the SQN transmitted last by the P devices as described above.

  The CU that has received this recovery response starts recovery processing from that point. This recovery process is a process for recovering the consistency of each other's data between the CU and the P platform, and is not only executed when the power is turned on, but also recovered as a result of trouble as described later. Sometimes even executed.

  The CU counts up this SQN (sequence number) each time an “operation instruction” is transmitted. However, it is not counted up when the operation instruction is retransmitted. The CU backs up the SQN and its request contents when transmitting an “operation request”. The P platform stores the SQN received by the “operation instruction” and sends it back to the CU as it is by “operation response”. When the P unit receives an operation instruction of the same SQN as the previously received SQN, the P unit determines that the re-transmission text is that the communication failure has occurred and the CU retransmits the operation instruction.

  After the recovery process is completed, the CU updates the main chip ID, the payout chip ID, and the connection time to the values received from the P units, updates the SQN to “0”, and sends a communication start request (recovery clear ON). As commands, a command of SQN correction ON, game ball correction ON, SQN = 0, game ball = 0 is transmitted to the P units. In response to this, the “P” matches the “sequence number” and “game ball” backed up on the P table with the information of the CU (SQN = 0, game ball = 0). Also, the notified “connection time” is backed up. And the P platform returns a communication start response to the CU. Thereafter, an operation instruction command and an operation response response are transmitted and received between the CU and the P platform.

  As described above, the CU counts up the sequence number (SQN) by one each time this operation instruction is transmitted. First, in the first operation instruction, an operation instruction command of no game permission request, SQN = 0, C-ID = 00h is transmitted to the P units. In the case of the P unit, SQN = 1, C-ID = 00h, the number of pre-added balls = 0, the number of pre-subtracted balls = 0, the number of front start ports (1) = 0, the number of front start ports (2) Back up the data of = 0. Further, the P platform clears the values of the counters of the number of added balls, the number of subtracted balls, the number of start ports (1), and the number of start ports (2), which are current ball related information, to zero. Then, as for the P platform, as operation response, SQN = 1, C-ID = 00h, number of game balls = 0, number of added balls = 0, number of subtracted balls = 0, start port (1) number of times = 0, start port ( 2) The response of the number of times = 0 and the game prohibition (game stop state) is transmitted to the CU.

  The CU that has received the operation response backs up SQN = 1 on the basis of the operation response, calculates the current number of game balls by calculating the current number of game balls 0 + the received number of added balls 0−the received number of subtraction balls 0. In addition to backing up 0, the cumulative number of added balls = 0, the cumulative number of subtracted balls = 0, the cumulative number of start ports (1) = 0, and the total number of start ports (2) = 0 are backed up.

  Next, at the stage where the start-up process is completed on the CU side, the CU sends a game permission request presence, SQN = n, C-ID = 00h operation instruction to the P units, As follows: Game refusal OFF, SQN = n + 1, C-ID = 00h, number of game balls = 0, number of added balls = 0, number of subtracted balls = 0, start port (1) times = 0, start port (2) times = 0, and a game permission response is returned to the CU.

  When a proper authentication result is obtained as a result of the authentication sequence using the session key of FIG. 29, the business message sequence shown in FIG. 36 is executed. FIG. 36A shows a case where the business message sequence is normal, and FIG. 36B shows a case where the business message sequence is abnormal.

  First, referring to FIG. 36A, after an operation instruction command is transmitted from the main control unit 323 to the CU communication control unit 80, a request for confirming the communication state of the operation instruction message (communication state request). Is transmitted to the CU communication control unit 80. The CU communication control unit 80 notifies the main control unit 323 of the reception status of the operation instruction message (MAC abnormality, CRC abnormality, decoding abnormality, data length abnormality, disconnection detection) as a communication state response (see FIG. 22).

  The main control unit 323 confirms the communication state based on the received communication state response, and determines that it is normal when normal.

  On the other hand, the CU communication control unit 80 transmits the operation instruction command to the P units (specifically, the P unit communication control unit 81) based on the reception of the operation instruction command. In response to this, the P platform returns an operation response to the CU communication control unit 80, and the CU communication control unit 80 receives it and transmits a response to the operation response to the main control unit 323.

  On the other hand, the case where the business message sequence is abnormal is shown in FIG. The difference from FIG. 36A is that the main control unit 323 that has received the communication status response transmitted from the CU communication control unit 80 confirms the communication status based on the communication status response and determines that it is abnormal. It is a point to do. This is determined to be abnormal when the transmitted response of the communication state response is numerical data other than 0x00 shown in FIG. If the main control unit 323 determines that there is an abnormality, the main control unit 323 executes a retry of checking the communication state. Specifically, after an operation instruction command is transmitted to the CU communication control unit 80 again, a communication state request is transmitted to the CU communication control unit 80 again, and based on the communication state response returned from the CU communication control unit 80. To determine whether a communication status error has occurred. If the main control unit 323 determines that the communication state is still abnormal as a result of executing the retry, the communication state abnormality notification control is performed. As the communication state abnormality notification control, for example, an abnormality notification command is transmitted to the display control unit 797 to notify the communication state abnormality by the display 312 or the abnormality notification lamp (not shown) is turned on or blinked. Or a signal indicating that a communication state abnormality has occurred may be transmitted to the hall management computer 1. The number of executions of this retry is one in FIG. 36B, but may be executed twice or more.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 37, the process of the connection sequence when the CU and the P stand are reconnected will be described. Here, “at the time of reconnection” refers to the time when communication is resumed after the communication between the CU and the P platform has ended abnormally. This “abnormal end” is described later, when the power supply is activated while holding the card in FIG. 51, or when the P unit in FIG. This is a case where power is cut off. As will be described later, when resuming the connection sequence, the CU resumes the connection sequence in a state other than waiting (see FIG. 38), b. It is determined whether the connection sequence is resumed later (see FIG. 58), or whether the SQN backed up by c.CU is inconsistent with the SQN transmitted from the P unit, When it is determined that any one of c is present, it is determined that the normal communication is not completed (abnormal termination), and the connection sequence at the time of reconnection shown in FIG. 37 is executed instead of FIG.

  The connection sequence at the time of reconnection is similar to the connection sequence at the time of power activation described with reference to FIG. 27, and here, differences will be mainly described.

  First, the time when P devices prohibit the game and start communication is immediately after receiving the device information request command from the CU. This is because the P unit can recognize that the P unit has been reconnected only after receiving a device information request from the CU.

  Next, since the connection sequence in FIG. 27 is when the power is turned on, a recovery start request command for recovery clear ON is transmitted from the CU to the P units, and the recovery data is cleared by the P unit. At the same time, the sequence number (SQN) is set to 1 according to SQN = 0 sent in the first operation instruction, and all the previous ball related information and current ball related information are cleared to “0”.

  However, in the case of the connection sequence of FIG. 37, since it is at the time of reconnection, there is a case where the recovery information backed up inside the P units does not match the information stored on the CU side. Therefore, in the CU, after starting the recovery process, the game balls and the like are corrected in accordance with the contents of the recovery data (the previous ball related information, the current ball related information, etc.) on the P platform included in the recovery response. Execute the process. Specifically, based on the game ball acquisition number information, back ball addition information, and game ball launch number information included in the recovery data sent from the P unit, the number of game balls + game ball acquisition number information + back Ball addition information—Calculates the number of game balls fired and performs processing to correct the stored number of game balls to the calculated new number of game balls. Recovery data from the corrected number of game balls and P units Is compared with the game ball total number information transmitted as, and it is determined whether or not they match. If they do not match, a command with game ball correction ON, that is, Bit 2 of data correction request set to “1” is transmitted to the P units as a communication start request. Further, the final SQN included in the recovery data sent from the P unit is compared with the final SQN stored in the CU to determine whether or not they match. SQN correction ON, that is, a command for setting Bit 1 of the data correction request to “1” is transmitted to the P units. Also, the correct number of game balls to be corrected = 300 and SQN = 3 are included in the communication start request and transmitted to the P units.

  The P machine receives the communication start request command, and performs a correction process to match the “sequence number” and “game ball” backed up on the P machine with the information of the CU. Specifically, a process of correcting SQN = 3 and game balls = 300 and backing up the notified “connection time” is performed.

  The CU backs up the main chip ID and the payout chip ID transmitted from the P units at the stage where the recovery process is completed, and backs up the connection time that is the time of reconnection. And about the sequence number, when the last SQN transmitted from P units is not abnormal, the sequence number (SQN) is continued.

  On the other hand, in the CU, after the recovery process is started, if it is determined that the communication partner P units do not match, or if the SQN is determined to be abnormal, the recovery response transmitted from the P unit The number of the current game balls included in is converted to a one-handed ball. The “mochidama” refers to the number of game balls recorded on a game recording medium (card or the like) owned by the player. Then, after the possession ball is recorded on the recording medium, the replay button 319 is operated to use the possession ball of the recording medium, and the possession ball is converted into a game ball, and then replay is possible. At that time, similar to the connection sequence at the time of power activation shown in FIG. 27, the recovery clear ON is transmitted as a communication start request transmitted from the CU to the P units, and the P unit receives the recovery data in response to the request. clear. In the CU, the sequence number is set to “0”, SQN = 1 is transmitted to the P units in the first operation instruction, and the PQ backs up the SQN = 1. In addition, in the P-unit, the number of pre-added balls = 0, the number of pre-subtracted balls = 0, the number of front start ports (1) = 0, the number of front start ports (2) = 0 is backed up, and the number of additional balls, subtracted balls The counter values of the number, the number of start ports (1) and the number of start ports (2) are cleared to zero.

  Next, processing during standby will be described with reference to FIG. This standby state is a state in which no game is played on the P platform, a card is not inserted in the CU, and the rental button 321 and the replay button 319 are not operated at all.

  First, an operation instruction command of no addition, no subtraction, SQN = n, and C-ID = 00h is transmitted from the CU to the P units. In response to this, in the P-unit, as response of the operation response, SQN = n + 1, C-ID = 00h, number of gaming balls = 0, number of additional balls = 0, number of subtracted balls = 0, number of start ports (1) = 0 The start port (2) number of times = 0, and data indicating that the game is possible are transmitted. The CU backs up SQN = n + 2 every time an operation instruction command is transmitted. In the next operation instruction command from the CU to the P platform, data of SQN = n + 2 and C-ID = 00h is transmitted. In the P-unit that has received this, SQN = n + 3, C-ID = 00h, the number of pre-added balls = 0, the number of pre-subtracted balls = 0, the number of front start ports (1) = 0, and the number of front start ports (2) = 0 is backed up, and the counter values of the number of added balls, the number of subtracted balls, the number of start ports (1), the number of start ports (2), and the number of game balls are cleared to zero.

  Then, as for the P platform, as an operation response, SQN = n + 3, C-ID = 00h, the number of game balls = 0, the number of additional balls = 0, the number of subtraction balls = 0, the number of start ports (1) = 0, the start port ( 2) The number of times = 0 and a game ready response are transmitted to the CU. In the CU, every time a response of the operation response from the P platform is received, SQN, C-ID = 00h, number of game balls = 0, cumulative number of additional balls = 0, total number of subtracted balls = 0, start port (1) The total = 0 and the starting port (2) total = 0 are backed up.

With reference to FIG. 39, the processing of the CU and P units when a card is inserted will be described.
In the CU, when a card is inserted, a command signal for taking the card is output to the card reader / writer 327, and the information recorded on the taken card is read by the card reader / writer 327 and the read information is received. For example, the card insertion process is executed.

  In this insertion process, a card insertion request command for reading the C-ID recorded on the inserted card by the CU and transmitting the C-ID to the P units is transmitted to the P unit. In response to this, the P device returns a response of the card insertion response notifying the CU that the reception of the C-ID is completed to the CU. Further, as this insertion processing, control as shown in FIG. 40 described later is executed.

  The CU is in a card balance inquiry state for a predetermined period after the card is inserted. This is done by inquiring about the suitability of the inserted card, whether it is a membership card registered at the amusement hall, or inquiring the upper-level server such as the hall management computer 1 etc. This means that it is in the middle of executing the process of displaying on the display 312 and displaying on the P-side display 54. As will be described later with reference to FIG. 83 and the like, the CU displays that the card inserted into the display unit 312 is being inquired, and issues an operation instruction including card holding ON, C-ID, and card insertion processing ON. Send to P units. In the P-unit, upon receiving the operation instruction command, the payout control unit 17 transmits a display device control command including ON during card holding and ON during card insertion processing to the display effect control board 53 to display the display effect. Control is performed to display that the control board 53 is inquiring about the card inserted into the display 54 (see FIG. 83).

  After that, as for P, as operation response, SQN = n + 3, C-ID, number of gaming balls = 0, number of additional balls = 0, number of subtracting balls = 0, number of starting ports = 0, number of starting ports = 2, game A response including OFF, prohibition, special prize, and probability change is transmitted to the CU. Specifically, the special prize and the probability change are OFF in a state in which Bits 0 to 4 in the gaming machine state 2 shown in FIG.

  The CU determines the balance and the ball when the card balance and the ball that has been inserted as a result of the inquiry about the card balance can be confirmed. In the CU, control is performed to display the prepaid balance of the confirmed card on the display 312, and addition display that is in the process of transmitting the confirmed holding ball (5000) as a gaming ball to the gaming machine (P units). The display inside is displayed on the display 312 (see FIG. 83).

  Then, SQN = n + 4, C-ID, game balls = 0 (number of game balls before update) +5000 (number of balls required for addition) = 5000 and backed up balls = 0. At this point, the consumption of the ball is finalized.

  Next, as an operation instruction, a command including addition present, card holding ON, card insertion processing OFF, addition display ON, SQN = n + 4, C-ID, number of balls required for addition = 5000 and card balance = 7000 is P Send to the stand. The operation instructions during the card holding process and the card insertion process are divided into the membership card and the visitor card as described with reference to FIG. The operation may be displayed separately for each type of card. In the P unit, when the payout control unit 17 receives an operation instruction command including ON during addition display and the number of balls requested to be added = 5000, display control including ON during addition display and the number of balls requested to be added = 5000 is performed. The command is transmitted from the payout control unit 17 to the display effect control board 53. In response to this, the display effect control board 53 displays on the display 54 that 5000 balls are being added as game balls (addition display is being performed) (see FIG. 83).

  FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing a subroutine program of the insertion time process shown in FIG. In the present embodiment, the steps indicated by broken lines indicate the control contents of the modification. The solid arrows indicate the flow of control, and the two-pointed arrows indicate the flow of information to be transmitted. In FIG. 40, CU performs each step of S1-S7, and P units perform S8-S10 and S12-S15.

  First, in step (hereinafter simply referred to as S) 1, the CU determines whether or not it is interrupted. Whether or not the game is being interrupted is determined based on whether or not an interrupting operation shown in FIG. If it is suspended, it is determined in S2 whether or not the C-ID of the inserted card matches the C-ID of the suspended card. If not, the inserted card is inserted in S5. The card is ejected and the process proceeds to standby (see FIG. 38).

  On the other hand, if the C-ID of the inserted card matches the C-ID of the card that has been suspended, it is determined that the suspended player has returned to the gaming machine and started the game. Therefore, the control advances to S4, the suspended state is canceled, and the process of restarting the game is executed in S6.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in S1 that it is not interrupted, a process of transmitting the C-ID of the inserted card to the P cards is performed in S3. The P units receive the C-ID and compare the received C-ID with the C-ID stored in the backup area (backup data storage unit shown in FIG. 6) (S8). Then, in S9, it is determined whether or not the comparison results match. If they do not match, it is determined that a player different from the player who has left the seat has started playing, and the subroutine program for this insertion processing ends. .

  In addition, you may perform the process of S15 and S7 as control content of a modification. Through S15, the game history data and the C-ID stored in the backup area (backup data storage unit) are transmitted to the CU and then deleted. The CU receives it and transmits the received data to the upper server 801. The host server 801 stores the received game history data and C-ID as a backup.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that they match in S9, the process proceeds to S12, in which the game history data in the backup area (backup data storage) is returned to the current area (player game history data storage unit shown in FIG. 6), and the game history data is restored. The game history data is newly added and updated.

  In addition, you may perform the process of S10, S13, and S14 as a control content of a modification. If YES in S9, the control proceeds to S10, where it is determined whether or not a predetermined time (for example, 20 minutes) has elapsed since the previous card was ejected. If it is determined that the game history data and the C-ID of the backup area (backup data storage unit) are deleted, a process is performed in S13. Further, after S12, in S15, a notification that the players are the same is transmitted to the CU. In addition, as a control content of a modification, you may control to perform all the processes of S10, S13, S14 and the processes of S15, S7.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 41, a process when the prepaid balance recorded on the inserted recording medium (card) is consumed will be described. In the process of FIG. 41, the prepaid balance is “1000” and the current game ball is “50”. First, a command with no addition, addition display OFF, SQN = n, C-ID, number of balls required for addition = 0, and number of balls required for subtraction = 0 is transmitted as operation instructions from the CU. In response to this, in the P platform, SQN = n + 1, C-ID, the number of game balls = 50, the number of added balls = 0, the number of subtracted balls = 0, the number of start ports (1) = 0, the start port ( 2) A response indicating that the number of times = 0, the game is possible, the special prize is OFF, and the probability variation OFF is returned.

  On the other hand, the CU lends 500 yen, that is, 125 balls by one lending operation (ball lending operation). When the lending button (lending button) 321 is pressed in the CU, SQN = n + 2, C-ID, number of game balls = 50 (number of game balls before update) +125 (number of ball to be added) = 175 and balance = 500 Back up. In this way, the balance consumption is determined by the CU alone at the stage where the lending operation is performed. Next, the CU is in the addition display. During this addition display, the display 312 displays that 125 balls have been withdrawn from the balance and are being added to the game balls.

  Then, the CU transmits, to the P units, commands with addition being present, ON during addition display, SQN = n + 2, C-ID, addition request ball number = 125, and subtraction request ball number = 0. Upon receiving the command, the payout control unit 17 transmits to the display effect control board 53 a display control command including ON during addition display and the number of balls required for addition 125 included in the operation instruction command. . In response to this, the display effect control board 53 causes the display 54 to display a screen on which the number of game balls 125 is being added.

  Next, the P platform has SQN = n + 2, C-ID, pre-added ball count = 0, pre-subtracted ball count = 0, front start port (1) number of times = 0, and front start port (2) number of times = 0. After backing up and creating a response, the counter values of the number of added balls, the number of subtracted balls, the number of start ports (1), and the number of start ports (2) are cleared to 0, and the current number of game balls is 50 The number of game balls is updated to a value of 175 to which the number of balls requested for addition 125 is added.

  Then, as an operation response, addition rejection OFF, SQN = n + 3, C-ID, number of gaming balls = 175, balance = 500, number of additional balls = 0, number of subtraction balls = 0, start port (1) times = 0, start Mouth (2) Number of times = 0, game possible, special prize OFF, probability change OFF response is returned.

  In response to this, the CU calculates and backs up SQN = n + 3, C-ID, number of game balls = 175 (number of game balls before update) +0 (number of balls required for addition) −0 (number of balls for subtraction) = 175 The cumulative number of added balls = 0, the total number of subtracted balls = 0, the starting port (1) cumulative = 0, and the starting port (2) cumulative = 0 are backed up.

  Thus, unlike the determination of the balance consumption, the determination of the number of game balls is determined after waiting for the response of the operation response from the P units.

  In addition, in the P machine, when an operation instruction command including the number of balls with and without addition is received, the addition is the same without distinguishing between the consumption of the ball (replay of the stored ball) and the consumption of the prepaid balance. The subsequent processing is executed in the sequence.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 42, the process at the time of replay which consumes a stored ball is demonstrated. In FIG. 42, the storage ball specified by the inserted recording medium (member card or the like) is “1000”, and the initial game ball is “0”. The replay process in FIG. 42 is similar to the process when the balance shown in FIG. 41 is consumed. On the CU side, when a replay button 319 is pressed in a state where a player's own game recording medium (member card or the like) is inserted and there is a storage ball specified by the card, SQN = n + 2 , C-ID, number of game balls = 0 (number of game balls before update) +125 (number of balls requested to be added) = 125, storage balls = 875 are backed up. Storage ball = 875 becomes 875 at 1000-125 since 125 (the number of addition request balls) was withdrawn from the original storage ball = 1000. This is because the balance in the case of FIG. 41 is data in monetary units, while the holding ball in FIG. 42 is data in units of balls, so that it is sufficient to simply subtract 1000-125.

  Then, the CU sends, as an operation instruction, a command including addition present, ON during addition display, SQN = n + 2, C-ID, number of balls required for addition = 125, number of balls required = 875, number of balls required for subtraction = 0 to P units. To do. Upon receiving the command, the payout control unit 17 transmits to the display effect control board 53 a display control command including ON during addition display and the number of balls required for addition 125 included in the operation instruction command. . In response to this, the display effect control board 53 causes the display 54 to display a screen on which the number of game balls 125 is being added.

  The other processes are the same as those in FIG. As described above, the consumption of the ball is determined by the CU alone when the replay button 319 is pressed without waiting for the response of the operation response from the P platform, and the number of balls stored (the number of game balls is also The same) is determined after waiting for the response of the operation response from the P units.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 43, the processing of subtracting the number of game balls (wagon service etc.) according to the instruction from the CU side will be described. In the amusement hall, a wagon service is provided in which a game ball owned by the player is consumed and drinks are provided to the player. When the player receives such a wagon service, the player touches the display 312 (see FIGS. 94 to 98) and places a wagon order so that the order content ordered by the player is a card unit. 3 IR photosensitive unit 320 is input as an infrared signal to a remote control possessed by a shop clerk.

  The amusement hall clerk performs a wagon service according to the contents of the order entered on the remote control. FIG. 43 shows a case where a wagon order that consumes “300” used game balls is generated in a state where there are “1000” game balls owned by the player. When a wagon order is generated, the CU performs a process of backing up “300”, which is the number of used balls of the game balls accompanying the occurrence of the wagon order, as SQN = n + 2, C-ID, the number of balls required for addition = 0, and the number of balls required for subtraction Do. At this stage, the CU does not actually subtract 300 from the game balls, but simply backs up “300” as the number of balls required for subtraction. Then, a command of subtraction present, subtraction display ON, SQN = n + 2, C-ID, addition request ball number = 0, and subtraction request ball number = 300 is transmitted as an operation instruction from the CU to the P platform. Then, the CU causes the display 312 to display a display indicating that subtraction is being performed (see FIGS. 98 and 99).

  The P machines that have received the command determine whether or not the value of the game ball counter stored therein is equal to or greater than the subtraction request number. This determination is performed by the payout control unit 17. In FIG. 43, it is assumed that the value of the game ball counter is equal to or greater than the number of subtraction requests. In the P-unit, when the payout control unit 17 receives an operation instruction command including ON during subtraction display and the number of balls required for subtraction = 300, display control including ON during subtraction display and the number of balls required for subtraction = 300 The command is transmitted from the payout control unit 17 to the display effect control board 53. In response to this, the display effect control board 53 displays on the display 54 that 300 balls are being subtracted as a game ball (during subtraction display).

  Next, the P platform backs up SQN = n + 3, C-ID, number of pre-added balls = 0, number of pre-subtracted balls = 0, number of front start ports (1) = 0 and number of front start ports (2) = 0 In addition, the value of each counter of the number of added balls, the number of subtracted balls, the number of start ports (1), and the number of start ports (2) is cleared to zero. Then, according to the subtraction request ball number = 300, the game ball number is updated to “700” obtained by subtracting the subtraction ball number 300 from the current game ball number 1000.

  Then, from the P platform to the CU, subtraction refusal OFF, SQN = n + 3, C-ID, the number of current game balls = 700, the number of additional balls = 0, the number of subtraction balls = 0, the number of start ports (1) = 0, start port (2) number of times = 0, game possible, special prize OFF, and probability change OFF response are returned.

  In the CU, SQN = n + 3, C-ID, number of game balls = 1000 (number of game balls before update) −300 (number of balls required for subtraction) +0 (number of balls added) −0 (number of balls subtracted) = 700 Then, the number of game balls is corrected to “700” and backed up. Thus, the subtraction of the number of game balls is determined only after waiting for the response of the motion response from the P units.

  Further, the CU backs up C-ID, cumulative number of added balls = 0, cumulative number of subtracted balls = 0, starting port (1) cumulative = 0, and starting port (2) cumulative = 0.

  On the other hand, when the P units determine that the value of the game ball counter stored therein is less than the subtraction request number, the P units do not perform subtraction of the game ball number according to the subtraction request number. . In this case, the P platform returns an operation response indicating that the subtraction rejection is ON to the CU as an operation response. As a result, the CU is notified that the game balls have not been subtracted based on the subtraction request because the P cars refused the subtraction request.

  As described above with reference to FIG. 42, the subtraction of the number of game balls based on the instruction from the CU is determined only after waiting for a response of the operation response from the P units. On the other hand, as described with reference to FIG. 41, the accumulated (capped ball) consumption based on the instruction of the CU is determined when the CU receives the consumed ball.

  In this way, the reason for determining the different timings for the “subtraction of the number of game balls based on the instruction of the CU” and the “consumed ball consumption based on the instruction of the CU” is as follows.

  At the stage when the CU has received a subtraction process for the number of game balls, such as a wagon order, the subtraction instruction is sent because there is a margin in the number of game balls, but the game balls are used in the game when the P units receive the subtraction instruction. As a result, there are cases where the number of game balls corresponding to the subtraction instruction does not remain.

  In such a case, if the subtraction is confirmed based on the number of game balls stored in the CU at the stage when the CU accepts the subtraction process, the number of game balls actually does not remain on the gaming machine side. Nevertheless, the subtraction will be finalized, resulting in a contradiction. Therefore, in the present embodiment, “subtraction of the number of game balls based on the instruction of the CU” is determined after waiting for a response of the operation response from the P units.

  On the other hand, for “consumed ball consumption based on the instruction from the CU”, it is an instruction to add the number of game balls, so the P units are stored when the instruction reaches the P units. Even if the number of game balls fluctuates, there is no problem in adding the game balls corresponding to the addition instruction. For this reason, from the viewpoint of speeding up the processing, “save (contained ball) consumption based on CU instruction” is determined when the CU accepts the storage (contained) consumption.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 44, a process when a big hit occurs during the game will be described. In FIG. 44, the initial number of game balls is 1010, and the probability change big hit occurs while the operation instruction and the response of the operation are being transmitted and received between the P and the CU in the game. After the completion of the control, the probability change in which the jackpot occurrence probability is improved is shown.

  First, in the CU, SQN = n, C-ID is backed up, and a command of no addition, no subtraction, SQN = n, C-ID is transmitted as an operation instruction from the CU to the P units. In the P-unit that received it, SQN = n + 1, C-ID, number of pre-added balls = 3, number of pre-subtracted balls = 13, number of front start ports (1) = 1, and number of front start ports (2) = 1 , The number of game balls = 1010 + 3 (the number of added balls) −13 (the number of subtracted balls) = 1000 is calculated, and the number of game balls is updated to 1000. Further, after the response is created, the counter values of the number of added balls, the number of subtracted balls, the number of start ports (1), and the number of start ports (2) are cleared to zero.

  And as for P platform, as operation response, SQN = n + 1, C-ID, number of game balls = 1000, number of addition balls = 3, number of subtraction balls = 13, start port (1) number of times = 1, start port (2) The response of the number of times = 1, the game possible, the special prize OFF, and the probability variation OFF is transmitted to the CU. In this way, the P units transmit not only the number of subtraction balls and the number of addition balls, but also the number of game balls to the CU. As a result, the CU can determine whether or not the number of game balls stored in the P unit matches the number of game balls managed by the CU.

  In addition, in the P platform in the present embodiment, as described above, 100 pachinko balls are shot into the game area 27 per minute, and therefore, one pachinko ball is shot into the game area in 0.6 seconds. Will be included. As described with reference to FIG. 24, since the command / response is transmitted at intervals of 200 ms, the number of subtraction balls from the previous response transmission to the current response transmission is 0 or 1. Therefore, the number of subtraction balls transmitted from the P platform to the CU is either 0 or 1. However, when the number of subtraction balls is set to such a small value, the number of game balls does not change so much, and the processing flow becomes difficult to understand. Therefore, in the drawing of the processing flow in the present embodiment, for the sake of simplicity, the number of subtraction balls and the change in the number of addition balls as necessary are exaggerated for convenience.

  In the CU that has received the response of the operation response, the number of game balls = 1010 + 3-13 = 1000 is calculated and the 1000 is backed up as the number of game balls, and the cumulative number of added balls = 3, the total number of subtracted balls = 13, the start port (1) Accumulation = 1 and Start port (2) Accumulation = 1 are backed up.

  While repeatedly performing the transmission / reception of such an operation instruction command and an operation response response, a probable big hit occurs in the P units, and the ball related information includes the number of game balls = 1100, the number of additional balls = 120, The number of subtraction balls is changed to 20, the number of start ports (1) = 2, and the number of start ports (2) = 2. Then, the probability change starts after the big hit at the P platform. In the CU, SQN = n + 2, C-ID is backed up, and commands of no addition, no subtraction, SQN = n + 2, and C-ID are transmitted to the P units as operation instructions.

  In the P platform, SQN = n + 3, C-ID is backed up, and the number of pre-added balls = 120, the number of pre-subtracted balls = 20, the number of front start ports (1) = 2, and the number of front start ports (2) = 2 is backed up, and the number of game balls = 1000 + 120−20 = 1100 is calculated, and the number of game balls is updated to 1100. Further, after creating the response, the counter values of the number of added balls, the number of subtracted balls, the number of start ports (1), and the number of start ports (2) are cleared to zero.

  Then, as for P platform, SQN = n + 3, C-ID, number of game balls = 1100, number of added balls = 120, number of subtracted balls = 20, start port (1) number of times = 2, start port (2) The response of the number of times = 2, the game is possible, the special prize ON, and the special prize ON is transmitted to the CU.

  In response to this, the CU calculates SQN = n + 3, C-ID, number of game balls = 1000 + 120-20 = 1100, and corrects and backs up the number of game balls in the 1100, and the cumulative number of balls = 120, The total number of subtraction balls = 20, the starting port (1) total = 2, and the starting port (2) total = 2 are backed up. Further, the CU detects that the “special prize” has started.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 45, a process in the case where it is detected that there is no game ball while playing with P cars will be described. Initially, the number of game balls is set to 20, first, the CU backs up SQN = n and C-ID, and sends commands of no addition, no subtraction, and SQN = n, C-ID to the P units as operation instructions. . In the P platform, SQN = n + 1, C-ID, number of pre-added balls = 3, number of pre-subtracted balls = 18, front start port (1) times = 1, and front start port (2) times = 1 are backed up. . Then, after the response is created, the counter values of the number of added balls, the number of subtracted balls, the number of start ports (1), and the number of start ports (2) are cleared to zero.

  Then, as for the P platform, SQN = n + 1, C-ID, number of game balls = 5, number of added balls = 3, number of subtracted balls = 18, start port (1) number of times = 1, start port (2) The response of the number of times = 1, the game possible, the special prize OFF, and the probability variation OFF is transmitted to the CU. In the CU, SQN = n + 1, C-ID, number of game balls = 20 + 3-18 = 5 is calculated and then the number of game balls is corrected and backed up, and the cumulative number of additional balls = 3, the total number of subtracted balls = 18 , Starting port (1) cumulative = 0 and starting port (2) cumulative = 0. After that, since the number of subtracted balls is 5 in P units, the number of game balls = 5-5 = 0 is calculated and the number of game balls = 0, the number of additional balls = 0, the number of start ports (1) = 0 The starting port (2) number of times fluctuates to zero. At the stage where the number of game balls becomes 0, no balls are detected in the P units, and the payout control unit 17 automatically stops driving the ball striking motor 18 so that the ball cannot be hit into the game area. Control to prohibited state. It should be noted that if the variable display device is already in variable display at that stage, the variable display is continued only by stopping the hitting of the hit ball. If there is a start memory at the start port (1) count or the start port (2) count at the stage where the firing stop control is performed, the variable display control of the variable display device based on the storage is continued.

  In the CU, SQN = n + 2, C-ID is backed up, and commands of no addition, no subtraction, and SQN = n + 2, C-ID are transmitted to the P units as operation instructions.

  In the P unit, SQN = n + 3, C-ID is backed up, the number of pre-added balls = 0, the number of pre-subtracted balls = 5, the number of front start ports (1) = 0, and the number of front start ports (2) = 0 Are backed up and a response is created, and then the counter values of the number of added balls, the number of subtracted balls, the number of start ports (1), and the number of start ports (2) are cleared to zero.

  Then, the P platform has SQN = n + 3, C-ID, number of game balls = 0, number of added balls = 0, number of subtracted balls = 5, start port (1) number of times = 0, start port (2). The response of the number of times = 0, the game possible, the special prize OFF, and the probability variation OFF is transmitted to the CU.

  In response to this, the CU calculates the number of game balls = 5 + 0−5 = 0, corrects the number of game balls to 0, and backs up, and also adds the total number of balls = 0, the total number of subtraction balls = 5, the start port (1) Cumulative = 1, and start port (2) Cumulative = 0.

  In this way, the main management of the number of game balls is performed by the CU, but only when the game prohibition control (launching stop control) is performed when the number of game balls reaches 0 in the P platform, It is determined that the number of game balls has become 0, and game prohibition control (launch stop control) is performed. Thereafter, as the operation response, the final ball related information is transmitted to the CU, and the final game ball number “0” is determined on the CU side. The reason for controlling in this way is that it is necessary to perform ball hitting stop control at the moment when the number of game balls becomes zero on the P platform side.

  For example, on the CU side which mainly manages the number of game balls, the response of the motion response including the number of added balls and the number of subtracted balls when the number of game balls sent from the P platform side becomes 0 is received. Wait, when the final number of game balls is calculated on the CU side and becomes 0, a command for operation instruction with a prohibition request for prohibiting the game is transmitted to the P base side, and received When hitting ball stop control is first performed on the P platform side, there is a possibility that a pachinko ball will be shot and fired during the response and command transmission / reception, and a new number of subtraction balls may be generated during that time. On the other hand, although the number of game balls has already become “0”, a new subtraction ball number is generated and eventually the game ball number becomes negative. In order to prevent such an inconvenience, only the ball hitting stop control when the number of game balls becomes 0 is controlled based on the number of game balls on the P platform side.

  As described above, since the game control represented by the hitting ball stop control is performed based on the number of game balls stored in the P player itself, this control is performed based on the number of game balls managed and stored in the CU. Compared with the case where such game control is performed, the game control in accordance with the fluctuation of the number of game balls can be performed in real time.

  Here, although the example in which the payout control unit 17 performs the hitting ball firing stop control is shown, the main control board 16 (see FIG. 4) may be configured to perform the hitting ball shot stop control.

  In this case, for example, the payout control unit 17 transmits a signal indicating that the number of game balls is 0 to the main control board 16 when the number of game balls is determined to be 0. In response to this signal, the main control board 16 prohibits the driving of the ball striking motor 18.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 46, processing when a card return operation is performed will be described. In the state where the number of game balls is initially set to 500, an operation instruction from the CU to the P unit, and in response to an operation response from the P unit to the CU, when the return button 322 is pressed, the CU As a next operation instruction, a command of prohibition for prohibiting a game, no clear request, clear display OFF, SQN = n + 2, and a command of C-ID are transmitted to the P units. In the P platform, in accordance with the instruction with the prohibition request included in the command, the driving of the hitting motor 18 is stopped to control the hitting stop state. Thereafter, a waiting time of 15 seconds is provided in consideration of the time until all balls that have already been shot flow down in the game area 27 and flow to the out balls, that is, the floating ball processing waiting time. During the 15 second wait time, polling is continued between the P units and the CU. As an operation response during the wait time, the P platform is prohibited refusal OFF, SQN = n + N, C-ID, the number of gaming balls = 500, the number of additional balls = 0, the number of subtracted balls = 0, the number of start ports (1) = 0 The response of start port (2) times = 0, game prohibition, game completion OFF, special prize OFF, and probability change OFF is transmitted to the CU. As an operation instruction during the wait time, the CU transmits no prohibition request, no clear request, clear display OFF, SQN = n + N + 1, and C-ID to the P units.

  Then, as a response after 15 seconds have passed, the P platform is SQN = n + N + 2, C-ID, the number of gaming balls = 500, the number of additional balls = 0, the number of subtracted balls = 0, the number of start ports (1) = 0, The operation response of start port (2) times = 0, game prohibition, game completion ON, special prize OFF, and probability change OFF is transmitted to the CU. This “game completion ON” has a role as initializeable information indicating that it is possible to accept information for instructing initialization of the number of game balls in the P units. The number of game balls transmitted at this time is the final number of game balls at the end of the game. This sequence example shows a case where the number of added balls and the number of subtracted balls are not changed by the floating ball. If a prize is generated by a floating ball, or if a foul ball is generated, the number of payouts or the number of foul balls corresponding to the winning is transmitted to the CU as an “added ball number”.

  The CU that has received the response of the operation response detects the completion of the game, and backs up SQN = n + N + 3 and data with clear request. Furthermore, according to “the number of added balls, the number of subtracted balls, the number of start ports (1), the number of start ports (2)” included in the motion response, the stored “number of game balls, total number of added balls, total number of balls” Each data of “the number of subtraction balls, start opening (1) total winning prize, starting opening (2) total winning prize” is updated. As a result, the number of game balls at the end of the game is determined on the CU side. As described above, since the final number of game balls is determined on the CU side, it is not necessary to provide a point management function on the P platform side, and the cost of the P platform can be suppressed as much as possible.

  Then, the CU sends a command including clear request, clear display ON, SQN = n + N + 3, and C-ID to the P units as an operation instruction. Thereafter, the CU displays on the display 312 a display indicating that the CU is being cleared (see FIG. 103 and FIG. 104). This “clear request exists” is data instructing initialization of the number of P game balls.

  In the P platform, the payout control unit 17 transmits a display control command including ON during clear display included in the command transmitted from the CU to the display effect control board 53. In response to this, the display effect production control board 53 causes the display 54 to display a display screen that is being cleared (screen that is being cleared).

  In this example, the CU receives the input of the “signal for requesting the end of game” based on the operation of the return button 322, and determines the number of game balls at the end of the game. However, the “signal for requesting the end of the game” is not limited to a signal based on the operation of the return button 322.

  For example, the CU is provided with a fingerprint authentication unit that authenticates a player's fingerprint. At the start of the gaming machine, authentication by the fingerprint authentication unit is mandatory, and the fingerprint information specified by the game card inserted into the CU by the player at the start of the game matches the fingerprint information detected by the fingerprint authentication unit. The game is allowed as a condition. Furthermore, authentication by the fingerprint authentication unit is essential at the end of the game, and the game is ended on condition that the fingerprint information detected by the fingerprint authentication unit matches the fingerprint information detected at the start of the game. In this case, the “signal for requesting game end” is fingerprint information detected by the fingerprint authentication unit.

  In addition, when a game end request signal is input to the CU from a server or the like that manages the entire gaming machine installation island, the game may be ended regardless of whether or not the return button 322 is operated. In this case, the “game end request signal” is constituted by the game end request signal input from the server.

  Returning to the description of FIG. With clear request present, during clear display, the P units that have received the command of SQN = n + N + 3 and C-ID shift the game history data and C-ID currently updated and stored in the storage area and store them in the backup area .

  Next, as for the operation P, the clear rejection OFF not to reject the clear request as an operation response, SQN = 0, C-ID, the number of game balls = 0, the number of additional balls = 0, the number of subtracted balls = 0, the start port (1) Number of times = 0, start port (2) Number of times = 0, game prohibition, game completion ON, special prize OFF, and probability variation OFF responses are transmitted to the CU. Then, the CU backs up SQN = 0, game balls = 0, and holding balls = 500. This holding ball = 500 is a value obtained by adding 500, which is the number of game balls received immediately before the clear request, to the holding ball.

  After that, the CU records the holding ball = 500 on the inserted card, discharges it, and returns it to the player. Then, as an operation instruction, a command including no prohibition request, no clear request, clear display OFF, SQN = m, and C-ID = 00h is transmitted to the P units. After that, as for the P platform, as the operation response, SQN = m + 1, C-ID = 00h, number of game balls = 0, number of added balls = 0, number of subtracted balls = 0, start port (1) number of times = 0, start port ( 2) The response of the number of times = 0, the game prohibition, the game completion ON, the special prize OFF, and the probability change OFF is transmitted to the CU. Instead of directly recording the card score on the card, the higher server may store the score in association with the card number of the card. In that case, the number of game balls stored in the CU and the card number of the inserted card are transmitted to the upper server and stored in association with the card number received by the upper server. And the score is updated to a value corresponding to the number of game balls stored in the CU. The CU then ejects the card. In this way, both the recording of the card score directly on the card and the storing of the score in association with the card number in the host server are collectively referred to as “associating” the score with the card. To do.

  In FIG. 46, there is shown a weight of 15 seconds for the floating ball processing waiting time on the P platform side. In addition, on the P platform side, the number of fired balls−the number of foul balls−the number of out balls−the winning prize It may be determined that the number of balls = 0 or the number of fired balls−the number of foul balls−the number of balls detected by the merge path detection switch 32 = 0 is determined and the processing of the floating balls is completed. It may be determined that the processing of the floating ball has ended when the earlier condition of such a determination and the elapse of 15 seconds is satisfied, and the game completion may be turned ON. Further, when the game completion is turned ON based on the passage of 15 seconds, even if the CU that has received the game completion ON is timed out when, for example, 20 seconds elapses from the card return operation or the like, Good. Also, when the game completion is turned on based on the passage of 15 seconds, or when the card discharge process is executed when 20 seconds have elapsed, the number of fired balls−the number of foul balls−the number of out balls−the number of winning balls ≦ predetermined threshold value Alternatively, it may be executed on condition that the number of shot balls−the number of foul balls−the number of balls detected by the joining path detection switch 32 ≦ a predetermined threshold value.

  FIG. 47 is a diagram showing an example of processing of the card unit and the pachinko machine when the game is interrupted.

  46 is similar to the processing of the card unit and the pachinko machine when returning the card in FIG. 46, and the difference is that an interruption operation is performed instead of pressing the return button. This interruption operation is an operation for the player to temporarily suspend the game so that the player can finish the use, and the player calls a store clerk at the game hall and asks the store clerk to perform a remote control operation to interrupt the game. Then, the IR signal output from the remote controller is received by the IR light receiving unit 315, converted into an electronic signal, and input to the main control unit 323. In the case of this game interruption process, even if the CU detects the completion of the game, the clear request is not transmitted to the P machines. As a result, the P machines store and hold data (C-ID, number of game balls, etc.) regarding the interrupted player. Then, when the CU discharges the card, the card with 0 points is discharged and returned to the player. Thereafter, during the interruption, the game of other players is prohibited (see FIG. 40).

  With reference to FIG. 48, the process when the glass door 6 is unlocked and opened will be described. First, as a first operation instruction, a command including an instruction not to open a glass door and requesting no glass opening is transmitted from the CU to the P platform. Receiving it, the P vehicle returns a normal response including the number of game balls = 500 to the CU as an operation response. At this stage, for example, if a trouble occurs such as a pachinko ball that has been driven into the game area 27 on the P platform, the player calls the attendant at the game hall. An infrared signal for unlocking and opening the glass door 6 by operating the remote controller is transmitted to the IR photosensitive unit 320. In response to this, the IR photosensitive unit 320 inputs a glass door opening instruction signal included in the received infrared signal to the main control unit 323. Upon receiving the instruction to open the glass door, the CU transmits, as operation instructions, commands for prohibiting the game to stop, no glass opening request, and SQN = n + 2 to the P platform. That is, before the glass door 6 is actually opened, first, an operation instruction with a prohibition request and no glass opening request is sent to the P platform in order to perform the hitting stop control at the P platform.

  In response to this, the P platform stops the driving of the hitting ball launch motor 18 and controls the hitting ball shot stop state. Next, the P platform returns, as an operation response, a response including prohibition rejection OFF indicating that the game prohibition is not rejected and game prohibition data indicating that the game prohibition state is set to the CU.

  On the other hand, in the CU, after the operation instruction command including the above-described prohibition request is transmitted to the P units, the time until all balls fired in the game area 27 in the P units flow out and are collected, that is, floating In consideration of the ball processing waiting time, a 10-second wait is provided. During this time, the CU continues to poll by sending a command including an instruction indicating that the game is prohibited, that is, a prohibition request, to the P units.

  Then, when the wait time of 10 seconds has passed, a command including a glass opening request for releasing the lock of the glass door 6 to be opened and an instruction of SQN = n + N is transmitted to the P units as an operation instruction.

  In response to this, the P door energizes the glass door opening solenoid 10 to unlock the glass door 6 to open the glass door 6, and turns on the bit during the development of the glass door. Until it is closed (until the detection signal from the glass door closing detector 12 is inputted). Then, the P platform returns a response including a response such as glass open refusal OFF, SQN = n + N + 1, C-ID, game prohibition, and glass development students as an operation response to the CU.

  In the CU, if the glass opening request command is not rejected, that is, if a response including a response of glass opening rejection ON is not returned, it is determined that the glass door 6 has been opened. Thereafter, a command including no glass opening request is transmitted to the P units as an operation instruction.

  FIG. 49 shows a modification of the glass door opening process shown in FIG. The difference from the processing of FIG. 48 is that when the glass door opening instruction input is detected in the CU, not only the prohibition request for instructing the prohibition request of the game but also the glass door 6 is unlocked. A command with a glass opening request instructing an opening request is transmitted to the P units. Upon receiving this command, the P platform stops the driving of the hitting ball launch motor 18 and controls the hitting ball shot stop state. At the same time, all the balls shot in the game area 27 flow into the out balls and are collected. Considering the floating ball processing waiting time, a 10 second weight is provided. During the wait time of 10 seconds, the CU and the P platform continue to transmit / receive operation instructions / operation responses. When the wait time of 10 seconds elapses, the glass door opening solenoid 10 is excited to unlock the glass door 6 and the glass door 6 is opened. Then, the bit during the development of the glass door is turned ON, and thereafter, it remains ON until the glass door 6 is closed (until the detection signal from the glass door closing detector 12 is inputted).

  And as for P platform, glass opening refusal OFF which does not refuse opening of a glass door as an operation response, a game prohibition which shows that it is in the state where ball hitting is stopped, and that the lock of the glass door is released and it is being opened A response including data such as that during glass development is shown to the CU.

  The CU determines that the glass door 6 has been opened by receiving an operation response of glass opening refusal OFF.

  As described above, the modification shown in FIG. 49 is characterized in that the 10-second wait process considering the floating ball process waiting time is executed not on the CU side but on the P platform side.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 50, a process of releasing the lock of the cell (front frame) 5 and releasing it will be described. The opening process of the cell (front frame) 6 is the same as the opening process of the glass door 6 shown in FIG. Here, the differences will be mainly described.

  When an attendant at the game hall operates the remote control to unlock and release the front frame (cell) 5, infrared light including a cell release command signal is output from the remote control to the IR photosensitive unit 320. Is done. In response to this, the IR photosensitive unit 320 outputs a cell opening command signal to the main control unit 323. As a result, it is determined in the CU that a cell opening instruction input for opening the cell has been detected. Then, the CU transmits, as an operation instruction, a command including data such as prohibition request existence and cell opening request absence data for prohibiting the game to the P units. In response to this, the P platform stops the driving of the hitting ball firing motor and controls the hitting ball firing stop state.

  In the CU, a 10-second wait is provided in consideration of the floating ball processing waiting time, and when the 10-second wait time ends, the cell open request data that is an instruction to unlock and release the cell is received. The command including it is transmitted to P units. In response to this, the P platform releases the front frame 5 by exciting the front frame opening solenoid 11 to unlock the front frame 5. Then, the bit during cell development is turned ON, and thereafter ON is maintained until the cell is closed (until a detection signal is input from the front frame closing detector 13).

  And as for the P platform, as an operation response, cell opening rejection OFF that does not reject the cell opening request, game prohibition indicating that it is in a ball hitting stop state, cell development underway indicating that the cell is being opened, etc. A response including data is transmitted to the CU.

  If the CU is not rejected with respect to the cell opening request, that is, if a response including cell opening rejection OFF is returned, the CU determines that the cell has been opened.

  In the process when the cell shown in FIG. 50 is released, the P platform side has a function of providing a 10-second weight in consideration of the floating ball processing waiting time as in the modification shown in FIG. When the command input for cell opening is detected, the CU sends a command including instructions for prohibition request and cell opening request to the P units, and the P unit side receives the command and performs the hit ball firing prohibition control. After that, the operation instruction / response is continued between the 10-second wait period CU and the P platform, and when the 10-second wait time has elapsed, the front frame opening solenoid 11 is excited to lock the front frame 5 May be released after being released, and then a response including data indicating that cell open refusal OFF and cell development is in progress may be transmitted to the CU.

  As described above with reference to FIGS. 48 to 50, according to the present embodiment, the closed state of the glass door or the cell, which is a specific example of the front member of the P platform, is released without affecting the game progress. It becomes possible.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 51, a description will be given of processing when the power is activated while the CU is holding the card, and an abnormality in which the P units are not connected at that time occurs. Since a communication interruption occurred between the CU and the P unit while the card was inserted and the P unit was playing, the recovery request command was issued from the CU when the CU power was restarted. Sent to. However, since an unconnected abnormality of P units has occurred, a response from P units is not returned to the CU. Then, as described with reference to FIG. 25, the CU retransmits the recovery request command to the P units. Nevertheless, if no response is returned from the P units, the second recovery request is retransmitted to the P units. If no response is returned from the P units for the second retransmission, at this stage, the CU determines that there is a communication error and displays on the display 312 that an error has occurred due to no connection. And a control to turn on or blink the abnormality notification lamp. A device information request command may be transmitted instead of the recovery request.

  In this state, when the store clerk operates the remote controller for the CU and outputs an infrared signal forcibly ejecting the inserted card to the IR photosensitive unit 320, the forced ejection signal is sent to the main control unit 323. Entered. In response to this, the CU adds the “number of game balls” backed up by the CU to the “held ball” of the inserted card and clears the “number of game balls” and “connection time” of the CU to 0. Then, a command to eject the inserted card is output to the card reader / writer 327. Receiving it, the card reader / writer 327 discharges the taken card. Instead of directly recording the card score on the card, the higher server may store the score in association with the card number of the card. In that case, the number of game balls stored in the CU and the card number of the inserted card are transmitted to the upper server and stored in association with the card number received by the upper server. And the score is updated to a value corresponding to the number of game balls stored in the CU. The CU then ejects the card.

  Thereafter, the CU transmits a recovery request command to the P units, and performs a resumption process of the connection sequence (see FIG. 37). The CU determines that the connection sequence is resumed in a state in which the card is inserted (a state other than standby), and executes the connection sequence at the time of reconnection in FIG. 37 instead of the connection sequence at the time of power-on in FIG. To do. The number of balls to be added (for example, j) or subtraction balls during the period from when the P connection failure occurs until the connection sequence (see FIG. 37) is restarted and the first operation response is transmitted by the P units. Processing when a number (for example, r) has occurred is performed in the restart processing of FIG. Referring to FIG. 37, the CU receives the recovery response from the P units, thereby calculating the number of game balls = 0 + j (the number of added balls) + r (the number of subtracted balls), and the number of game balls that is the result of the calculation. = J + r is backed up. Then, as described with reference to FIG. 37, SQN correction ON, game ball correction ON, and a communication start request including the value of SQN and the value of game balls are transmitted to P units, and the SQN of P units and the number of game balls And correct it.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 52, a process when an operation instruction from the CU (no requested operation) has not reached P units will be described.

  As described with reference to FIG. 44 and the like, the P platform receives the operation instruction command from the CU, so that the current addition subtraction ball number and the current start port number data stored in the current ball related information storage area are obtained. The back-up information is stored in the front ball related information storage area as the number of pre-addition subtraction balls and the number of previous start ports, and the current addition subtraction ball number and the current start port number data stored in the current ball related information storage area are cleared to 0 In the case of FIG. 52, the operation instruction from the CU has not yet reached the P units. Therefore, the above-described backup clear process is not performed on the P units. As a result, each time the number of added balls, the number of subtracted balls, or a start win occurs, these data are accumulated and stored as current ball related information in the current ball related information storage area.

  First, in a state where the current number of game balls is 520, the CU sends a command of no request and SQN = n to the P units as an operation instruction. However, since the command does not reach the P machines, the response from the P machines is not returned to the CU. As a result, as described with reference to FIG. 25, the CU transmits the same operation instruction command to the P units again. If this re-transmission does not reach the P units, the response from the P units is not returned to the CU, so the CU performs the second retransmission for the same operation instruction. When this retransmission is repeated, the value of SQN is maintained at n, and the addition update of “1” is not performed.

  When the command reaches P units in the second re-transmission, until the operation instruction arrives, P unit uses the current ball related information as the data of the number of addition subtraction balls and the number of start ports as described above. As a cumulative memory. Then, using the accumulated and stored number of balls = 6 and the number of subtracted balls = 36, the current number of gaming balls = 520 + 6-36 = 490 is calculated, and SQN = n + 1, the number of gaming balls = 490, the number of added balls = 6, the number of subtracted balls = 36, the number of times of starting port (1) = 1, and the number of times of starting port (2) = 1 are transmitted to the CU.

  In response to this, the CU calculates the number of game balls = 520 + 6 (the number of added balls) −36 (the number of subtracted balls) = 490, and corrects and stores the number of game balls in 490.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 53, the processing when the operation response from the P platform (response to the absence of requested operation) has not reached the CU will be described. In the case shown in FIG. 53, since the command from the CU is input to the P units, the above-described backup clear processing is executed, but the SQN value of the command transmitted from the next CU to the P unit is performed. Since (= n) is the same as the previous SQN value (= n), the P units determine that the response of the operation response transmitted to the CU is retransmission due to not reaching the CU, and the previous time The current addition / subtraction ball number and the current start port number as the current ball related information are cumulatively added to the data without clearing the data of the previous addition / subtraction ball number and the previous start port number which are the ball related information.

  Specifically, assuming that the current number of game balls is 520, the CU first sends a command of no request and SQN = n to the P units as an operation instruction. Upon receiving this, the P clearing process described above is performed to calculate the current number of game balls = 520−13 + 3 = 510, back up the number of game balls = 510, back up SQN = n + 1, The current addition / subtraction balls count and the current start port count data are backed up and stored in the pre-addition subtraction balls count and the previous start aperture count, and an action response command is created to present the current addition / subtraction balls count and the current start. Clear the mouth count data to zero. Further, the current number of game balls 510 is included in the response data of the motion response. Then, the P units have SQN = n + 1, the number of game balls = 510, the number of added balls = 3, the number of subtracted balls = 13, the number of start ports (1) = 1, and the number of start ports (2) = 0. Is sent to the CU.

  However, since the response does not reach the CU, the CU transmits the same operation instruction as that of the previous time, that is, no request, SQN = n command to the P units.

  In the P machine that has received it, since the SQN received this time is the value (= n) immediately before the SQN (= n + 1) backed up, the response of the transmitted operation response does not reach the CU. The current addition subtraction ball number as the current ball related information and the data of the previous addition subtraction ball number as the previous ball related information and the data of the number of times of the previous start port without clearing the data Back up data by cumulatively adding the data of the current number of starting ports. As a result, the number of pre-added balls = 3 + 3 = 6, the number of pre-subtracted balls = 13 + 8 = 21, the number of front start ports (1) = 1 + 0 = 1, and the number of front start ports (2) = 0 + 1 = 1. After the response of the operation response composed of these data is created, the data of the current number of added and subtracted balls and the current number of starting ports are cleared to zero. And as an operation response, the P platform is SQN = n + 1, the number of game balls = 505, the number of added balls = 6, the number of subtracted balls = 21, the number of start ports (1) = 1, the number of start ports (2) = 1 Send the response to the CU. However, since this response also does not reach the CU, the CU transmits the same operation instruction (no request, SQN = n) command to the P units again.

  In response to this, the P unit determines that the SQN received this time is the value (= n) one before the SQN (= n + 1) backed up, and the response of the operation response has reached the CU. It is detected that there is no retransmission. As a result, the P platform performs cumulative addition storage on the previous ball related information, as described above, creates a response of the operation response, and returns it to the CU. Specifically, the response of SQN = n + 1, the number of game balls = 485, the number of additional balls = 12, the number of subtraction balls = 47, the number of start ports (1) = 2, the number of times of start port (2) = 2 as operation responses. To the CU.

  Since the response of this operation response has reached the CU, the CU calculates the number of game balls = 520 + 12−47 = 485, and performs processing for correcting and storing the data of the game balls in the 485.

  As described above, when the previously transmitted operation response does not reach the CU, the P units do not transmit the next operation response after retransmitting the unachieved operation response, but information that has not been reached. The information after adding up is transmitted as the next operation response. As a result, the gaming apparatus can reliably and efficiently collect information regarding the number of game balls and the number of winning entries. In the example of FIG. 53, the case where the operation response from the P platform has not reached once has been described. However, if the operation response has not reached twice, the operation response transmitted for the third time is not included. , The total value obtained by adding the motion response information transmitted the second time is included.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 54, processing when an operation instruction (addition request) from the CU has not reached P units will be described. The number of game balls at the current time is set to 520, the number of balls to be added when there is an operation for replaying a stored ball or a withdrawal from a prepaid balance is set to 125, and first, as an operation instruction, the CU has an addition request, SQN = n, and A command including data of the number of balls to be added = 125 is transmitted to the P units. However, since the command does not reach the P units, the response from the P units is not returned to the CU. As a result, as described above, the CU retransmits the command with the same operation instruction. Since the re-send command has not reached the P units, the corresponding response from the P units is not transmitted to the CU. Therefore, as described above, the CU performs the second retransmission for the command with the same operation instruction. This second retransmission command reaches P units. In the period when the operation instruction command from the CU has not yet reached, the P units do not perform the above-described backup clear process, and the addition / subtraction data and the start port are added to the current addition / subtraction ball number and the current start port number as the current ball related information. Accumulated addition of count data is stored.

  Then, P units calculate the current game ball number = 520 + 125 (addition request ball number) +6 (current addition ball number) −36 (current subtraction ball number) = 615, and the current game ball number data is set to 615. Create an action response. Specifically, the P platform has an addition refusal OFF, SQN = n + 1, the number of game balls = 615, the number of additional balls = 6, the number of subtraction balls = 36, the number of start ports (1) = 1, and the start as an operation response Mouth (2) Response of number of times = 1 is transmitted to the CU.

  In response to this, the CU calculates the number of game balls = 520 + 125 + 6-36 = 615, and corrects and stores the game ball number data in that 615.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 55, processing when the operation response from the P platform (response to the addition request) has not been reached will be described. An explanation will be given of a case where the initial number of game balls is 520 and an operation for using the game as a replay of stored balls or a withdrawal from a prepaid balance is performed and a request for adding 125 balls is generated. First, the CU transmits, as an operation instruction, a command with an addition request, SQN = n, and the number of addition request balls = 125 to P units. In response to this, the P units, as the current ball related information, add ball number = 3, subtract ball number = 13, start port (1) number of times = 1, and start port (2) number of times = 0, and SQN = n + 1. Is stored in the previous ball related information storage area, and the number of game balls = 520 + 125 + 3-13 = 635 is calculated and the number of game balls = 635 is stored.

  Then, after creating the response of the motion response, the P platform clears the stored data in the current ball related information storage area to 0, and as the motion response, addition rejection OFF, SQN = n + 1, number of game balls = 635, number of added balls = 3, number of subtraction balls = 13, start port (1) number of times = 1, and start port (2) number of times = 0 responses are transmitted to the CU.

  However, since the response did not reach the CU, the CU retransmits the same operation instruction command to the P units. At the time of the retransmission, the SQN having the same value n as the previous time is transmitted to the P units without updating the SQN by adding “1”.

  In the P unit, it is determined that the SQN received this time is a value (= n) immediately before the backed up SQN (= n + 1), and the response of the operation response does not reach the CU. Although the transmission is detected, the received command includes the number of balls requested for addition = 125, but the game balls are not added and updated based on the command. That is, the addition update according to the addition request is not executed twice.

  In addition, since the command P is detected again in the P platform, the previous ball related information already stored in the previous ball related information storage area is stored in the current ball related information storage area in the same manner as the process of FIG. The accumulated data, that is, the number of added balls = 3, the number of subtracted balls = 8, the number of start ports (1) = 0, and the number of start ports (2) = 1 are accumulated and stored. Then, the number of game balls = 635 + 3-8 = 630 is calculated, and the number of game balls is corrected to 630 and stored.

  Thereafter, the P units create a response of the operation response. Specifically, as an operation response, addition rejection OFF, SQN = n + 1, number of game balls = 630, number of addition balls = 6, number of subtraction balls = 21, start port (1) number of times = 1, and start port (2) Number of times = 1 is transmitted as a response to the CU.

  Since this response also did not reach the CU, the CU performs a second retransmission of the command with the same operation instruction.

  In the P units, the retransmission detection is performed in the same manner as described above, and the addition request ball number = 125 is received, but the addition update is not performed, and the addition update according to the addition request is not performed twice. In the same manner as described above, after accumulating in the previous ball related information storage area, calculating the number of game balls, generating a response, and clearing the current ball related information storage area to 0, as an operation response, addition rejection OFF, SQN = N + 1, number of game balls = 610, number of added balls = 12, number of subtraction balls = 47, start port (1) number of times = 2, and response of start port (2) number of times = 2 are transmitted to the CU. Since this response reaches the CU, the CU calculates the number of game balls = 520 + 125 + 12−47 = 610, corrects the number of game balls to 610, and stores it.

  In this way, in the P units, even if the command including the addition request ball number data transmitted from the CU is received, the SQN received this time is the value immediately before the SQN (= n + 1) backed up (= = N), it is determined that it is a re-transmission, it is not determined that it is an additional addition request, the addition update of the game balls is not performed, and the addition update in response to the addition request is performed twice. Absent.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 56, processing when the operation instruction (subtraction request) from the CU has not reached the P units will be described. A case will be described where an initial number of game balls = 520 and a subtraction request for 300 balls is generated due to the occurrence of a wagon order or the like. First, the CU transmits, as operation instructions, commands with a subtraction request, SQN = n, and the number of subtraction request balls = 300 to P units. However, since the command did not reach the P machines, the response from the P machines is not returned to the CU. Therefore, the CU transmits the same operation instruction command to the P units again. Since this re-transmission command also did not reach the P units, the response from the P units is not returned to the CU. Therefore, the CU performs a second retransmission of the same operation instruction command. This second retransmission command reaches the P units.

  In the P unit, during the period in which the operation instruction command from the CU has not yet reached, as in the process of FIG. 52, each time an addition / subtraction ball number and a start winning are generated, these data are accumulated and stored in the current ball related information storage area. To do. Then, at the stage when the command command for the second operation is input to the P machines, the game ball = 520−300 + 6-36 = 190 is calculated, and the game ball = 190 is stored. Then, as an operation response, the subtraction rejection OFF, SQN = n + 1, the number of game balls = 190, the number of additional balls = 6, the number of subtraction balls = 36, the number of start ports (1) = 1, and the number of start ports (2) = 1 Is sent to the CU.

  In response to this, the CU calculates game balls = 520−300 + 6-36 = 190, and corrects and stores the game balls in 190.

  In this way, when subtracting from the game balls, the CU first sends an operation instruction command including data on the number of subtraction requests and the number of subtraction request balls to the P units, and a response as an operation response to the command is received. After waiting for the response to the CU, the subtraction request is subtracted from the game ball. Although the main management function for adding and subtracting game balls and managing the current game balls is on the CU side, the number of balls added and subtracted from the P units on the CU side is different from the game balls that change momentarily as the game progresses on the P units. It is possible to calculate the current game ball by adding / subtracting the game balls only after the response including the motion response is returned, and the game in the CU compared to the P device for the period of waiting for the motion response from the P device. The calculation time of the ball is delayed. Therefore, the current game ball data on the CU side is data with a time delay with respect to the P units, and even if the current game ball on the CU side is the number of subtraction request balls, In reality, however, there may be no game balls left for the number of balls required for subtraction. Therefore, in this embodiment, when subtracting the game balls, the CU waits for a response of the operation response from the P platform, and subtracts the game balls for the subtraction request.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 57, a process when the operation response from the P platform (response to the subtraction request) has not reached the CU will be described. Assuming that the initial number of game balls = 520 and the number of balls required for subtraction = 300, first, the CU transmits, to the P units, commands indicating that there is a subtraction request, SQN = n, and the number of balls required for subtraction = 300. In response to this, the P units, as the current ball related information, add ball number = 3, subtract ball number = 13, start port (1) number of times = 1, and start port (2) number of times = 0, and SQN = n + 1. Is stored in the previous ball related information storage area, and the number of game balls = 520-300 + 3-13 = 210 is calculated and the number of game balls = 210 is stored.

  Then, after creating the response of the motion response, the P units clear the stored data in the current ball related information storage area to 0, and as the motion response, addition rejection OFF, SQN = n + 1, the number of game balls = 210, the number of added balls = 3, number of subtraction balls = 13, start port (1) number of times = 1, and start port (2) number of times = 0 responses are transmitted to the CU.

  However, since the response did not reach the CU, the CU retransmits the same operation instruction command to the P units. At the time of the retransmission, the SQN having the same value n as the previous time is transmitted to the P units without updating the SQN by adding “1”.

  In the P unit, it is determined that the SQN received this time is a value (= n) immediately before the backed up SQN (= n + 1), and the response of the operation response does not reach the CU. Although it is detected that the transmission is a transmission, the received command includes the number of subtraction request balls = 300, but the game balls are not subtracted and updated based on the command. That is, the subtraction update corresponding to the subtraction request is not executed twice.

  In addition, since the command P is detected again in the P platform, the previous ball related information already stored in the previous ball related information storage area is stored in the current ball related information storage area in the same manner as the process of FIG. The accumulated data, that is, the number of added balls = 3, the number of subtracted balls = 8, the number of start ports (1) = 0, and the number of start ports (2) = 1 are accumulated and stored. Then, the number of game balls = 210 + 3-8 = 205 is calculated, and the number of game balls is corrected to 205 and stored.

  Thereafter, the P units create a response of the operation response. Specifically, as an operation response, addition rejection OFF, SQN = n + 1, number of gaming balls = 205, number of additional balls = 6, number of subtracting balls = 21, number of start ports (1) = 1, and start port (2) Number of times = 1 is transmitted as a response to the CU.

  Since this response also did not reach the CU, the CU performs a second retransmission of the command with the same operation instruction.

  In the P units, retransmission detection is performed in the same manner as described above, and the subtraction update is not performed while receiving the subtraction request ball count = 300, and the subtraction update is not performed twice in response to the subtraction request. In the same manner as described above, after accumulating in the previous ball related information storage area, calculating the number of game balls, generating a response, and clearing the current ball related information storage area to 0, as an operation response, addition rejection OFF, SQN = N + 1, number of game balls = 205 + 6-26 = 185, number of added balls = 12, number of subtracted balls = 47, start port (1) number of times = 2, and response of start port (2) number of times = 2 are sent to the CU . Since this response reaches the CU, the CU calculates the number of game balls = 520−300 + 12−47 = 185, corrects the number of game balls to 185, and stores it.

  In this way, in the P units, even if the command including the addition request ball number data transmitted from the CU is received, the SQN received this time is the value immediately before the SQN (= n + 1) backed up (= = N), it is determined that it is a re-transmission, it is not determined that it is an additional subtraction request, subtraction update of the game ball is not performed, and subtraction update in response to the subtraction request is executed twice. Don't do it.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 58, a description will be given of a process in the case where P units return an addition rejection response to the CU addition request. The initial number of game balls = 520, the balance of the game recording medium (card) inserted in the CU = 1000 yen, and as the operation instruction from the CU, there is no request, SQN = n, C-ID commands are P units Sent to. The P platform calculates the number of game balls = 520 + 3-23 = 500, the number of game balls, the number of added balls, the number of subtraction balls, the number of start ports (1), the number of start ports (2), SQN = n + 1, and C− An operation response including ID data is returned to the CU. The CU calculates a game ball based on the motion response and corrects it to game ball = 500.

  Next, the lending button 321 is pressed, and the CU transmits, as an operation instruction, a command including addition request present, SQN = n + 2, C-ID, balance = 500, and addition request ball count = 125 to P units. In the P platform, for some reason, a response of an operation response including addition rejection ON that rejects addition is returned to the CU.

  Since the CU has received an operation response including addition refusal OFF, it is determined that a game ball cannot be added on the P units, and there is a difference between the P units and the CU, and the communication connection is disconnected. In order to do so, a communication disconnection request command is transmitted to the P units. Upon receiving the request, the P platform returns a response to the communication disconnection response to the CU, disconnects the communication connection, and transmits a launch control signal for stopping the launch from the payout control unit 17 to the launch control board 31. The launch control board 31 that has received this stops the drive of the launch motor 18 and stops the game.

  In addition, as for recovery data, SQN = n + 3, C-ID, previous addition number of balls = 6, number of previous subtraction balls = 36, previous start port (1) number = 2, previous start as recovery data Number of mouths (2) = 2, Current number of balls as current number of balls = 460, Current number of added balls = 3, Current number of subtracted balls = 13, Current starting port (1) Number of times = 1, Current starting port (2 ) Store data of number of times = 1.

  Next, after performing chip ID authentication between the CU and the P platform, a recovery request command and a recovery response are transmitted and received. In the response of this recovery response, the above-described recovery data stored on the P platform side is transmitted to the CU side.

  The CU calculates and backs up the number of game balls = 595 + 3-13 = 583 according to the recovery data (current number of added balls = 3, current number of subtracted balls = 13). Thereafter, the process proceeds to the reconnection process (connection sequence) shown in FIG. 37, and the CU transmits a command including game ball correction ON and game ball = 583 to the P units in the communication start request. In response to this, the P platform corrects the game ball to 583. The CU determines that the connection sequence is resumed after transmitting a communication disconnection request and disconnecting the communication, and executes the connection sequence at the time of reconnection in FIG. 37 instead of the connection sequence at the time of power-on in FIG. To do.

  Also in the processing of FIG. 58, since the consumption of the balance is determined on the CU side without waiting for the response of the operation response from the P units, a response including addition rejection ON is received as the operation response from the P unit. Even if a reply is received, the balance consumption has already been confirmed on the CU side at an earlier stage.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 59, a description will be given of a process in the case where P units return a subtraction rejection response to a CU subtraction request. Since the initial number of game balls is 520, the number of balls to be added is 3 and the number of balls to be subtracted is 13 at the stage when the command of the operation instruction and the response of the operation response are transmitted and received once between the CU and the P platform. Then, the game ball = 520 + 3-13 = 510.

  At this stage, when a wagon service order or the like occurs and a subtraction request for 500 balls is generated, the CU uses a command of subtraction request, SQN = n + 2, and the number of subtraction request balls = 500 as an operation instruction. Send to the stand. At the stage of receiving this command, the number of balls to be added is 6 and the number of balls to be subtracted is 36 in P units, and the number of game balls at the present time is 510 + 6-36 = 480. As a result, since the current number of game balls (480) is smaller than the number of balls required for subtraction (500), the subtraction request of 500 cannot be satisfied. Therefore, as for the operation P, the subtraction rejection ON indicating that the subtraction request is rejected as an operation response, SQN = n + 3, the number of game balls = 480, the number of additional balls = 6, the number of subtracted balls = 36, the number of start ports (1) = 2 and the response of start port (2) number of times = 2 is transmitted to the CU.

  In response, the CU calculates a game ball = 510 + 6-36 = 480 and corrects the game ball to 480. Then, subtraction rejection is detected, and subtraction cancellation processing is performed. In the subtraction cancellation process, for example, the display 312 displays a message such as “Unable to subtract due to insufficient game balls”.

Thereafter, normal operation instruction and operation response polling are performed.
Next, with reference to FIG. 60, a process when the P units return a clear rejection response to the CU clear instruction request will be described. When the return button 322 is pressed down with the initial number of game balls = 520, the CU instructs the P units to have a prohibition request for prohibiting the game and clears it as an operation instruction. A command including unrequested data is transmitted to the P units. In response to the request, the P platform returns a response including prohibition rejection OFF and game prohibition data to the CU as an operation response. Then, similarly to the process of FIG. 46, the P platform is provided with a 10-second wait, and polling is continued between the P platform and the CU during this 10-second wait.

  Thereafter, the CU transmits a command for clear request and an operation instruction command of SQN = n + N + 3 to the P units. Receiving it, the P stand indicates that it cannot be cleared for some reason, SQN = n + N + 4, number of game balls = 480, number of added balls = 6, number of subtracted balls = 36, start port (1) times = 1, start port (2) number of times = 2 response of operation response is transmitted to CU. At this stage, the game ball is 480. Then, the CU detects clear rejection, transmits a command of no request and SQN = n + N + 4 as operation instructions to the P units, and performs clear cancel processing. This clear canceling process is, for example, a process of displaying a message such as “Return operation is performed but canceling is not possible” on the display 312. Thereafter, normal polling of operation instructions and response is performed between the CU and the P platform.

  With reference to FIG. 61, a process when P units respond with a permission rejection response to the CU game permission request will be described. Initially, the number of game balls is set to 520, and in the trouble state where some kind of game prohibition factor has occurred, the operation instruction command and the response of the operation response are transmitted and received between the CU and the P device in a state in which P games are prohibited. Then, it is assumed that the game prohibition factor is eliminated at the stage of “game elimination factor elimination” in FIG.

  At that time, the CU transmits a game permission request presence and a command of SQN = n + 2 to the P machines as operation instructions. However, the P platform returns to the CU an operation response command including, for some reason, a state where the ball cannot be shot, that is, a game rejection ON that rejects the game permission request.

  In response to this, the CU repeatedly transmits a command including a game permission request to the P machines as an operation instruction until the game is permitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 62, a process when the P units return a prohibition rejection response to the CU game prohibition request will be described. The initial number of game balls is set to 520, and a normal operation instruction command and a normal operation response response are transmitted and received between the CU and the P platform. At the stage of “game prohibition factor generation” in FIG. Assume that a game prohibition factor such as an operation of the return button 322 occurs. At this stage, the CU transmits a game prohibition request presence and a command of SQN = n + 2 to the P machines as operation instructions. In the P machine, the response of the operation response including the prohibition rejection ON for rejecting the game prohibition request for some reason is returned to the CU. In response to this, the CU detects a game prohibition refusal, and transmits a command including a game prohibition request to the P units as an operation instruction until the game is prohibited.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 63, a process when the P platform returns a glass opening rejection response to the glass opening request of the CU will be described. When an input of opening instruction of the glass door 6 is detected with the initial number of game balls = 520, although not shown in FIG. 63, as in the process of FIG. And a command of no glass opening request is transmitted to P units. In response to this, the P platform performs control to stop the driving of the hit ball launch motor 18 and transmits a response including prohibition rejection OFF and game prohibition to the CU as an operation response. The CU provides a 10-second wait in consideration of the floating ball processing waiting time, and for 10 seconds, the CU continues polling with the operation instruction (game prohibition) to the P units. Then, at the stage when the 10-second wait is completed, the CU transmits a command for glass opening request and an operation instruction command of SQN = n + 2 to the P units. In response to this, the P platform transmits a response of an operation response including a glass opening refusal ON that refuses to unlock and open the glass door 6 for some reason to the CU.

  In response to this, the CU detects glass open refusal, sends a command including no request to the P units as an operation instruction, and executes normal polling after performing glass open cancel processing. The glass opening canceling process is, for example, a process of displaying a message such as “Cannot open the glass door” on the display 312.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 64, a process when the P units return a cell opening rejection response to the CU cell opening request will be described. When the input of a cell opening instruction is detected with the initial number of game balls = 520, although not shown in FIG. 64, as in the process of FIG. A command with no open request is sent to the P units. In response to this, the P platform performs control to stop the driving of the hit ball launch motor 18 and transmits a response including prohibition rejection OFF and game prohibition to the CU as an operation response. The CU provides a 10-second wait in consideration of the floating ball processing waiting time, and for 10 seconds, the CU continues polling with the operation instruction (game prohibition) to the P units. Then, at the stage when the 10-second wait is completed, the CU transmits a command for cell opening request and an operation instruction command of SQN = n + 2 to the P units. In response to this, the P platform transmits a response to the operation response including the cell open rejection ON which refuses to release the cell lock for some reason and releases it.

  In response to this, the CU detects cell open refusal, sends a command including no request to the P units as an operation instruction, and executes normal polling after performing cell open cancel processing. The cell opening canceling process is, for example, a process of displaying a message such as “Cannot open cell” on the display 312.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 65, a description will be given of a recovery process when a power interruption occurs on the CU side after reaching an operation response related to addition / subtraction data. The number of game balls is initially 520 and SQN = n and an operation instruction command is transmitted to the P machines. The P machines, as operation responses, have SQN = n + 1, C-ID, the number of game balls = 500, the number of additional balls. A response including addition / subtraction data of = 3 and the number of subtraction balls = 23 is transmitted to the CU. After the response reaches the CU, after the SQN = n + 1, C-ID, and the number of game balls = 500, when a power failure occurs in the CU, the commands from the CU are not transmitted to the P units thereafter. . As described with reference to FIG. 26, in the case of the P platform, when the command is not received after 4 seconds, it is determined that the communication is interrupted, the state is changed to the unconnected state, and the driving of the hitting ball motor 18 is stopped. Play is stopped. Cumulative storage of the addition / subtraction data and the number of start ports after the response of the motion response including the previous addition / subtraction data is transmitted in the current ball related information storage area, and accordingly, game balls = 500 + 6-36 = 470 are calculated. Then, the game ball = 470 is stored.

  Next, when the power supply is restored and started in the CU, the CU communication control unit authentication sequence and the chip ID authentication sequence are executed, and the recovery request and the recovery response are transmitted and received, as in the process of FIG. With the stand.

  In the P-unit, as the recovery data, SQN = n + 1, C-ID, the previous number of balls as the previous number of balls = 3, the number of the previous subtraction balls = 23, the number of the previous start port (1) = 1, the previous start port ( 2) Number of times = 1, Current number of balls as current number of balls = 470, Current number of added balls = 6, Current subtractive ball = 36, Current start port (1) number = 2, Current start port (2) number = 2 is stored and transmitted to the CU as a recovery response.

  The CU determines that the communication partners are the same and that both SQNs match, and performs a process of correcting the backup value based on the recovery data transmitted in the recovery response. Specifically, the number of game balls = 500 (number of CU game balls) +6 (current number of added balls) −36 (current number of subtracted balls) = 470, cumulative number of added balls = 6, cumulative number of subtracted balls = 36, start The mouth (1) total = 2, and the starting port (2) total = 2 are corrected.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 66, a description will be given of recovery processing when a power interruption occurs on the CU side before reaching the operation instruction. As the initial number of game balls = 520, the P units that have received the operation instruction command have SQN = n + 1, C-ID, number of game balls = 500, number of additional balls = 3, number of subtracted balls = 23, After the response of the start port (1) count = 1 and the start port (2) count = 1 is sent to the CU and the CU modifies it to SQN = n + 2 and the game ball = 500, the CU No request, SQN = n + 2, and C-ID commands are transmitted to P units. If the command does not reach P units and a power failure occurs in the CU immediately after that, P units cannot receive commands for more than 4 seconds after sending the last response, as in the process of FIG. If it is determined that the communication has been interrupted, a transition is made to the unconnected state, and at the same time, the driving of the ball striking motor 18 is stopped and the play is stopped.

  Next, when the power supply is restored and started in the CU, the CU communication control unit authentication sequence and the chip ID authentication sequence are executed, and the recovery request and the recovery response are transmitted and received, as in the process of FIG. With the stand.

  In the P-unit, as the recovery data, SQN = n + 1, C-ID, the previous number of balls as the previous number of balls = 3, the number of the previous subtraction balls = 23, the number of the previous start port (1) = 1, the previous start port ( 2) Number of times = 1, Current number of balls as current number of balls = 500 + 6-36 = 470, Current number of added balls = 6, Current subtractive ball = 36, Current starting port (1) Number of times = 2, Current starting port ( 2) Store the number of times = 2 and send it as a recovery response to the CU.

  In the CU, the communication partner is the same, the operation instruction is not being transmitted, and the SQN on the CU side is advanced by one than the SQN on the P base side. Therefore, based on the recovery data transmitted in the recovery response Performs processing to correct the backup value. Specifically, the number of game balls = 500 (number of CU game balls) +6 (current number of added balls) −36 (current number of subtracted balls) = 470, cumulative number of added balls = 6, cumulative number of subtracted balls = 36, start The mouth (1) total = 2, and the starting port (2) total = 2 are corrected.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 67, a description will be given of recovery processing when a power failure occurs on the CU side before reaching an operation response related to addition / subtraction data. Assuming that the initial number of game balls is 520, a normal operation instruction and a normal operation response are sent back and forth between the CU and the P platform, and then no request, SQN = n + 2, and C-ID operation instruction commands After being transmitted to the P unit, the P unit has an operation response as follows: SQN = n + 3, C-ID, number of game balls = 470, number of additional balls = 6, number of subtracted balls = 36, start port (1) number of times = 2, Response of start port (2) times = 2 was sent to CU. However, when the response does not reach the CU and the power failure occurs in the CU before the CU executes the operation response process according to the response, If no command is transmitted, the cutting is detected, the driving of the hitting motor 18 is stopped, and the play is stopped.

  Next, when the power supply is restored and started in the CU, the CU communication control unit authentication sequence and the chip ID authentication sequence are executed, and the recovery request and the recovery response are transmitted and received, as in the process of FIG. With the stand.

  In the P-unit, as recovery data, SQN = n + 3, C-ID, the number of pre-addition balls = 6, the number of pre-subtraction balls = 36, the number of front start ports (1) = 2, the number of front start ports ( 2) Number of times = 2, Current number of balls as current number of balls = 470-3 = 467, Current number of added balls = 0, Current subtractive number of balls = 3, Current starting port (1) Number of times = 0, Current starting port ( 2) Store the number of times = 0 and send it to the CU as a recovery response.

  In the CU, since the communication partners are the same and the P SQNs are advanced by 1, the backup value is corrected based on the recovery data transmitted in the recovery response. Specifically, the number of game balls = 500 (the number of game balls of the CU) +6 (current number of added balls) +0 (current number of added balls) −36 (current number of subtracted balls) −3 (current number of subtracted balls) = 467, Total number of balls added = 6 (current number of added balls) + 0 (current number of added balls), total number of subtracted balls = 36 (current number of subtracted balls) + 3 (current number of subtracted balls), starting port (1) cumulative number = 2 (previous Start port (1) number) +0 (current start port (1) number), start port (2) total = 2 (previous start port (2) number) +0 (current start port (2) number).

  FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing the control contents when the communication counterparts do not match in the recovery when the CU-side power cut-off shown in FIG. 65 occurs. (A) shows a case where the CU is replaced with a new CU and becomes inconsistent, and (b) shows a case where the P units are replaced with a new P unit and become inconsistent.

  For example, a power failure occurs due to a failure of a CU, and the failed CU is often replaced with a new CU. In the amusement hall, a plurality of CUs are aged by unit stockers. This aging is a standby state connected to a host server. FIG. 68 (a) shows a state in which the failed CU is replaced with the CU that is aged by the unit stocker, connected to the P unit, and restarted. In this case, it is determined that the connected party (P units) is different based on the device information response sent from the P units, and the recovery data of the P units is not used for correction of the game balls. In this case, since the P units display untransmitted data when the CU is not connected, if there is untransmitted data, the game of the card is based on the data displayed on the screen in the manager mode described later by the store clerk of the game hall. Manually correct the number of balls. Specifically, by displaying a screen in the administrator mode on the P platform side on the display 54, it is possible to confirm untransmitted data to the CU. If untransmitted data is displayed, it is determined by a game shop clerk. Perform artificial hand correction. This prevents the player from suffering a loss.

  Instead of the artificial manual correction, automatic correction may be performed under a certain condition as indicated by a broken line. A modification of this automatic correction will be described below.

  First, the CU receives a recovery response including the C-ID, and temporarily stores the C-ID. In that state, it waits for the card to be inserted, and when the card is inserted, the C-ID recorded on the card is read and sent as a recovery response with the C-ID of the inserted card. It is determined whether or not the C-ID matches, and if it matches, the following correction processing is performed.

Number of game balls = 470, cumulative ball total = 6, subtractive ball cumulative = 36, starting port 1 cumulative = 2, starting port 2 cumulative = 2
In addition, when the determination result of C-ID does not correspond, the process which transmits the present game ball number contained in the recovery response to the high-order server 801 is performed. At that time, the C-ID included in the recovery data may also be transmitted to the upper server 801. Receiving it, the upper server 801 backs up the current number of game balls received in association with the C-ID. In the case where the determination results of the C-IDs do not match, the player is playing a game during a replacement operation in which the CU fails and is replaced with a new CU that is aged while the player is playing a game. This is a case where the continuation is given up and another player inserts a card to start the game after the replacement work is completed. In such a case, it is necessary to compensate for a loss for a player who has given up continuation of the game during the replacement work. A player who gives up continuation of such a game causes the upper server 801 to read the C-ID of the member card owned by the host server 801 and associates it with the member card as the current number of game balls backed up. Discharge and exchange prizes. In addition, when a player who gave up continuation of the game leaves the game hall once and then leaves the game hall, the player who has left the game hall is present on the upper server 801 for several days so that the loss can be compensated. The number of game balls is backed up, and the player who visits the store again reads the C-ID of the member card owned by the host server 801 and uses the current number of game balls backed up as a ball to the member card. They may be discharged in association with each other so that prizes can be exchanged.

  The condition for automatically correcting the backup value may be that a predetermined time (for example, 20 minutes) has not elapsed in addition to the C-ID matching determination. In other words, the work of replacing a failed CU with a new CU is completed in about 10 minutes. Therefore, after a predetermined time (for example, 20 minutes) in which the replacement work can be sufficiently performed, the card is inserted. Even if it is determined that the C-IDs coincide with each other after insertion, the backup data may not be automatically corrected.

  If the failed CU is a minor failure and can be communicated, the CU is returned to the unit stocker, and the number of game balls and the C-ID are transmitted from the unit stocker together with the stocker ID to the upper server 801. , The new CU connected to the P unit transmits the game ball number data corrected based on the recovery data from the P unit to the upper server 801, and the upper server 801 stores the data such as the number of game balls of both players. Control may be performed so as to confirm whether or not they match. If they do not match, an abnormality determination is performed and a predetermined abnormality process such as abnormality notification is performed.

  Furthermore, instead of the CU performing data correction based on the recovery data transmitted from the P platform, the CU may perform data correction by downloading the recovery data from the host server 801. Specifically, the CU periodically transmits data such as the number of game balls and C-ID to the upper server 801 and stores it in the upper server 801 as a backup, and is exchanged for a new CU and connected to the P units. When the C-ID included in the subsequent recovery response matches the C-ID recorded on the card inserted in the CU, the C-ID is transmitted to the upper server 801 and the C-ID -Recovery data such as the number of game balls stored in backup corresponding to the ID may be downloaded and stored in the CU.

  FIG. 68 (b) shows a case where the P base is replaced with a new one after the power is turned off. In that case, first, a startup process is performed, and a device information request, a device information response, an authentication request, an authentication response, a recovery request, and a recovery response are transmitted and received. Then, the CU determines that the connected P units are different based on the device information response, and does not use the P recovery data for the correction of the game ball. The recovery data of the original P units that were installed before being replaced with the new P units are manually manipulated based on the data displayed on the screen in the administrator mode, which will be described later, with the intervention of the amusement hall clerk. to correct.

  FIG. 69 shows the control when the communication partners do not match in the recovery when the CU-side power cut-off shown in FIG. 66 occurs. Also in the control of FIG. 69, the same control as the control operation described in FIG. 68 is executed. Here, repeated description is omitted.

  FIG. 70 shows the control in the case where communication partners do not match in the recovery when the CU-side power cut-off shown in FIG. 67 occurs. Also in the control of FIG. 70, the same control as the control operation described with reference to FIG. 68 is executed. Here, repeated description is omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 71, a description will be given of recovery processing when a power failure occurs on the CU side before the addition request is reached. Initial number of game balls = 520 and prepaid balance is 1000 yen, normal operation instruction and normal operation response are sent and received between CU and P units, based on the number of added balls and subtracted balls generated between them When the game ball reaches 500, the lending button 321 is pressed. Then, the CU sets SQN = n + 2 and the number of balls requested for addition = 125, calculates balance = 1000 yen−500 yen = 500 yen, updates the balance to 500 yen, and determines the consumption of the balance at this stage. Then, the CU transmits a command including an addition request, SQN = n + 2, C-ID, balance = 500, and addition request ball count = 125 as operation instructions to P units. If this command does not reach the P units, the P unit detects the disconnection and drives the hitting motor 18 when the command has not been received for 4 seconds since the last response was transmitted. Stop and enter play stop state.

  On the other hand, in the CU, as described with reference to FIG. 25, when there is no response from the P units due to the command not reaching, the response is transmitted even after the same command is repeatedly transmitted and the second retransmission is performed. Is not returned, a communication abnormality (communication disconnection) is detected, and a reconnection sequence is started after 5 seconds.

  After starting the reconnection sequence, the CU and the P platform perform the execution of the CU communication control unit authentication sequence and the chip ID authentication sequence, and the transmission / reception of the recovery request and the recovery response, as in the process of FIG.

  In the P-unit, as the recovery data, SQN = n + 1, C-ID, the previous number of balls as the previous number of balls = 3, the number of the previous subtraction balls = 23, the number of the previous start port (1) = 1, the previous start port ( 2) Number of times = 1, Current number of balls as current number of balls = 470, Current number of added balls = 6, Current subtractive ball = 36, Current start port (1) number = 2, Current start port (2) number = 2 is stored and transmitted to the CU as a recovery response.

  In the CU, the communication partner is the same, and the SQN on the CU side is advanced by one from the SQN on the CU side, so that the backup value is corrected based on the recovery data transmitted in the recovery response. . Specifically, the number of game balls = 625 (the number of game balls of the CU) +6 (current number of added balls) −36 (current number of subtracted balls) = 595, the total number of added balls = 6, the total number of subtracted balls = 36, start The mouth (1) total = 2, and the starting port (2) total = 2 are corrected.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 72, a description will be given of recovery processing when a power failure occurs on the CU side before reaching the operation response to the addition request. Initial number of game balls = 520, prepaid balance = 1000 yen, normal operation instruction and normal operation response are transmitted / received between CU and P units, and game balls = After reaching 500, the lending button 321 was pressed. Then, the CU calculates SQN = n + 2 and the number of balls requested for addition = 125, calculates balance = 1000 yen−500 yen = 500 yen, sets the balance to 500 yen, and determines the balance consumption at this stage. Then, the CU transmits, as an operation instruction, a command with an addition request, SQN = n + 2, C-ID, balance = 500, and addition request ball count = 125 to the P units. In response to this, the P units have SQN = n + 3, C-ID, the number of game balls = 595, the number of added balls = 6, the number of subtracted balls = 36, the number of start ports (1) = 2, and the start ports. (2) Send the response of number = 2 to the CU. If this response does not reach the CU and the power is cut off before the operation response process corresponding to this response is performed in the CU, the command from the CU is not transmitted to the P units thereafter. As described with reference to FIG. 26, in the case of the P platform, when the command is not received after 4 seconds, it is determined that the communication is interrupted, the state is changed to the unconnected state, and the driving of the hitting ball motor 18 is stopped. Play is stopped. Cumulative storage of the addition / subtraction data and the number of start ports after the P response transmission of the operation response including the previous addition / subtraction data is made in the current ball related information storage area, and accordingly, game balls = 595-3 = 592 are calculated. Then, the game ball = 592 is stored.

  Next, when the power supply is restored and started in the CU, the CU communication control unit authentication sequence and the chip ID authentication sequence are executed, and the recovery request and the recovery response are transmitted and received, as in the process of FIG. With the stand.

  In the P-unit, as recovery data, SQN = n + 3, C-ID, the number of pre-addition balls = 6, the number of pre-subtraction balls = 36, the number of front start ports (1) = 2, the number of front start ports ( 2) Number of times = 2, Current number of balls as current number of balls = 592, Current number of added balls = 0, Current number of subtractive balls = 3, Current start port (1) number of times = 0, Current start port (2) number of times = 0 is stored and transmitted to the CU as a recovery response.

  In the CU, it is determined that the communication partner is the same, the operation instruction is being transmitted, and the P SQNs are advanced by 1, and the backup value is corrected based on the recovery data transmitted in the recovery response. Specifically, the number of game balls = 625 (the number of game balls of the CU) +6 (the number of previous addition balls) +0 (the number of current addition balls) −36 (the number of previous subtraction balls) −3 (the number of current subtraction balls) = 592. Cumulative number of added balls = 6 (pre-added number of balls) + 0 (current number of added balls), cumulative number of subtracted balls = 36 (number of pre-subtracted balls) + 3 (current subtracted number of balls), starting port (1) cumulative number = 2 (previous Start port (1) number) +0 (current start port (1) number), start port (2) total = 2 (previous start port (2) number) +0 (current start port (2) number).

  FIG. 73 shows the control in the case where the communication partners do not match in the recovery when the CU-side power cut-off shown in FIG. 71 occurs. Also in the control of FIG. 73, the same control as the control operation described with reference to FIG. 68 is executed. Here, repeated description is omitted.

  FIG. 74 is a diagram showing control in the case where communication partners do not match in the recovery when the CU-side power cut-off shown in FIG. 72 occurs. Also in the control of FIG. 74, the same control as the control operation described with reference to FIG. 68 is executed. Here, repeated description is omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 75, a description will be given of recovery processing when a power failure occurs on the CU side before the subtraction request is reached. Assuming that the initial number of game balls = 520, normal operation instructions and normal operation responses are transmitted and received between the CU and the P platform, and the number of game balls = 500 according to the number of addition / subtraction balls in between. When a subtraction request for 300 balls is generated due to a request for a wagon service or the like, the CU assumes that SQN = n + 2, subtraction request ball count = 300, and has a subtraction request as an operation instruction, SQN = n + 2, C-ID, And a command of the number of subtraction request balls = 300 is transmitted to P units.

  When this command does not reach the P units, the P unit detects the disconnection and drives the hitting ball launch motor 18 when the command has not been received for 4 seconds since the last response was transmitted. Stop and enter play stop state.

  On the other hand, in the CU, as described with reference to FIG. 25, when there is no response from the P units due to the command not reaching, the response is transmitted even after the same command is repeatedly transmitted and the second retransmission is performed. Is not returned, a communication abnormality (communication disconnection) is detected, and a reconnection sequence is started after 5 seconds.

  After the reconnection sequence is started, the CU and the P unit perform the chip ID authentication sequence and transmit / receive the recovery request and the recovery response.

  In the P-unit, as the recovery data, SQN = n + 1, C-ID, the previous number of balls as the previous number of balls = 3, the number of the previous subtraction balls = 23, the number of the previous start port (1) = 1, the previous start port ( 2) Number of times = 1, Current number of balls as current number of balls = 470, Current number of added balls = 6, Current subtractive ball = 36, Current start port (1) number = 2, Current start port (2) number = 2 is stored and transmitted to the CU as a recovery response.

  In the CU, the communication partner is the same and the SQN on the CU side is advanced by 1. Therefore, it is determined that the subtraction request is not executed in the P units, and the backup value is based on the recovery data transmitted in the recovery response. The process which corrects is performed. Specifically, the number of game balls = 500 (number of CU game balls) +6 (current number of added balls) −36 (current number of subtracted balls) = 470, cumulative number of added balls = 6, cumulative number of subtracted balls = 36, start The mouth (1) total = 2, and the starting port (2) total = 2 are corrected.

  As described above, the CU determines that the subtraction request is not executed in the P units based on the value of the SQN, so that the subtraction request for 300 balls is generated in the correction of the backup value accompanying the recovery process. While subtracting, the subtraction request ball number 300 is not subtracted from the game ball number.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 76, a description will be given of the recovery processing when a power failure occurs on the CU side before reaching the operation response to the subtraction request. The initial number of game balls is set to 520, and normal operation instructions and normal operation responses are transmitted and received between the CU and the P platform, and the number of game balls is set to 500 according to the number of addition / subtraction balls generated during that time. In the stage, when a wagon service request for 300 balls is generated, the CU sets SQN = n + 2, the number of subtraction request balls = 300, and the operation instruction includes a subtraction request, SQN = n + 2, C-ID, and A command with the number of subtraction request balls = 300 is transmitted to the P units.

  In response to this, PQ receives SQN = n + 3, C-ID, number of gaming balls = 170, number of additional balls = 6, number of subtracted balls = 36, number of starting ports (1) = 2, and starting port (2) The response of the number of times = 2 is transmitted to the CU. If the response does not reach the CU and the power is cut off before the operation response process corresponding to the response is executed in the CU, the command from the CU is not transmitted to the P units thereafter. As described with reference to FIG. 26, in the case of the P platform, when the command is not received after 4 seconds, it is determined that the communication is interrupted, the state is changed to the unconnected state, and the driving of the hitting ball motor 18 is stopped. Play is stopped. Cumulative storage of the addition / subtraction data and the number of start ports after the P responses are transmitted in response to the motion response including the previous addition / subtraction data is made in the current ball related information storage area, and accordingly, game balls = 170-3 = 167 are calculated. Then, the game ball = 167 and SQN = n + 3 are stored.

  Next, when the CU is restored and powered off, the CU and the P unit perform the execution of the CU communication control unit authentication sequence and the chip ID authentication sequence, and the transmission / reception of the recovery request and the recovery response as in FIG. Do.

  In the P-unit, as recovery data, SQN = n + 3, C-ID, the number of pre-addition balls = 6, the number of pre-subtraction balls = 36, the number of front start ports (1) = 2, the number of front start ports ( 2) Number of times = 2, Current number of balls as current number of balls = 167, Current number of added balls = 0, Current subtraction ball = 3, Current starting port (1) number of times = 0, Current starting port (2) number of times = 0 is stored and transmitted to the CU as a recovery response.

  In the CU, the communication partner is the same, the operation instruction is being transmitted, and the SQN of the P units is advanced by 1. Therefore, it is determined that the P units have received the subtraction instruction, and the recovery sent in the recovery response The backup value is corrected based on the data. Specifically, the number of gaming balls = 500 (the number of gaming balls of the CU) +6 (the number of balls added previously) +0 (the number of balls added previously) −36 (the number of balls previously subtracted) −3 (the number of balls currently subtracted) = 467, Cumulative number of added balls = 6 (pre-added number of balls) + 0 (current number of added balls), cumulative number of subtracted balls = 36 (number of pre-subtracted balls) + 3 (current subtracted number of balls), starting port (1) cumulative number = 2 (previous Start port (1) number) +0 (current start port (1) number), start port (2) total = 2 (previous start port (2) number) +0 (current start port (2) number).

  The CU restarts the connection sequence by transmitting a device information request when the power is turned on, but determines that the SQN backed up by the CU and the SQN transmitted from the P unit do not match, as shown in FIG. The connection sequence at the time of reconnection shown in FIG. 37 is executed instead of the connection sequence at the time of power activation. As a result, in response to the operation instruction after recovery, the CU forces the game balls for subtraction cancellation to be added to the P platform side and corrects the SQN so that the game ball correction ON, the game ball = 467, the SQN correction ON, and the SQN = A communication start request including n + 2 is transmitted to the P units (see FIG. 37). In response to this, the P platform corrects and stores the game ball = 467 and SQN = n + 3.

  As described above, even when it is determined that the P units have received the subtraction instruction, the reason for performing the subtraction cancellation process is that the P unit side that has received the subtraction instruction always performs the subtraction process according to the subtraction instruction. There is a possibility that the subtraction is rejected on the P platform side. When such a rejection of subtraction on the P platform side is performed, if the subtraction is confirmed on the CU side, there is a disadvantage that the remaining number of game balls becomes a negative value. For this reason, subtraction cancellation is performed. As a result, when such a CU-side power interruption occurs, subtraction has been performed despite the fact that the P platform side should have rejected the subtraction instruction because the remaining points are insufficient. It is possible to prevent a disadvantage that the remaining number of game balls on the machine side becomes a negative value.

  FIG. 77 shows the control in the case where the communication partners do not match in the recovery when the CU-side power cut-off shown in FIG. 75 occurs. Also in the control of FIG. 77, the same control as the control operation described in FIG. 68 is executed. Here, repeated description is omitted.

  FIG. 78 shows the control in the case where the communication partners do not match in the recovery when the CU-side power cut-off shown in FIG. 76 occurs. Also in the control of FIG. 78, the same control as the control operation described with reference to FIG. 68 is executed. Here, repeated description is omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 79, a description will be given of recovery processing when a power failure occurs on the CU side before the clear request is reached. When the return button 322 for returning the inserted recording medium (card) is pressed, the number of game balls is 500. In FIG. 79, as in the process of FIG. 46, the CU transmits, to the P units, a command including data indicating that there is a prohibition request for prohibiting a game and no clear request as an operation instruction. In response to the request, the P platform returns a response including prohibition rejection OFF and game prohibition data to the CU as an operation response. Similarly to the processing of FIG. 46, the P platform is provided with a 15-second wait, and during this 15-second wait, polling is continued between the P platform and the CU.

  Then, the CU sets SQN = n + N + 3, and sends a command including SQN = n + N + 3 and C-ID to the P units as an operation instruction, clear request present, clear display, but the command reaches the P units. In the case where there is not, the P platform detects the disconnection and stops the driving of the hitting ball firing motor 18 in the stage where the command is not received after the last response is transmitted for 4 seconds, and the play is stopped. .

  On the other hand, in the CU, as described with reference to FIG. 25, when there is no response from the P units due to the command not reaching, the response is transmitted even after the same command is repeatedly transmitted and the second retransmission is performed. Is not returned, a communication abnormality (communication disconnection) is detected, and a reconnection sequence is started after 5 seconds.

  After starting the reconnection sequence, the CU and the P platform perform the execution of the CU communication control unit authentication sequence and the chip ID authentication sequence and the transmission / reception of the recovery request and the recovery response as in FIG.

  In the P-unit, as recovery data, SQN = n + N + 2, C-ID, as the previous number of balls, the number of previously added balls = 0, the number of previously subtracted balls = 0, the number of previous starting ports (1) = 0, the number of previous starting ports ( 2) Number of times = 0, Current number of balls as current number of balls = 500, Current number of added balls = 0, Current subtractive ball = 0, Current starting port (1) times = 0, Current starting port (2) times = 0 is stored and transmitted to the CU as a recovery response.

  In the CU, since the communication partner is the same and the SQN on the CU side is advanced by 1, it is determined that the clear request has not arrived, and the backup value is corrected based on the recovery data transmitted in the recovery response. Perform processing. Specifically, the number of game balls = 500 (current game balls) +0 (current number of added balls) −0 (current number of subtracted balls) = 500, cumulative number of added balls = 0, cumulative number of subtracted balls = 0, start opening (1) Accumulation = 0, start port (2) Accumulation = 0

  Next, with reference to FIG. 80, a description will be given of a recovery process when a power failure occurs on the CU side before reaching the operation response to the clear request. When the return button 322 for returning the inserted recording medium (card) is pressed, the number of game balls is 500. In FIG. 80, as in the process of FIG. 46, the CU transmits, to the P units, a command including data indicating a prohibition request with / without clear request for prohibiting a game as an operation instruction. In response to the request, the P platform returns a response including prohibition rejection OFF and game prohibition data to the CU as an operation response. Similarly to the processing of FIG. 46, the P platform is provided with a 15-second wait, and during this 15-second wait, polling is continued between the P platform and the CU.

  Then, the CU sets SQN = n + N + 3, and transmits a command including clear request, clear display ON, and SQN = n + N + 3 to the P units as operation instructions.

  Then, in response to this operation instruction, the P platform clears the game ball to 0 according to the clear request and sets the game ball to 0, and also clears SQN to 0 and sets SQN to 0. = 0, C-ID, number of game balls = 0, number of added balls = 0, number of subtraction balls = 0, start port (1) number of times = 0, and response of start port (2) number of times = 0 are sent to the CU . If this response does not reach the CU and the power is cut off before the operation response process corresponding to the response is performed in the CU, the command from the CU is not transmitted to the P units thereafter. As described with reference to FIG. 26, if the P station cannot receive a command after 4 seconds, it is determined that communication has been interrupted, and a transition is made to an unconnected state.

  Next, when the CU is powered off and restarted, the connection sequence is resumed in the same manner as in the process of FIG. 37, and device information request, device information response, authentication request, authentication response, recovery request, and recovery response are transmitted and received. CU and P stand.

  In the P-unit, as recovery data, SQN = 0, C-ID, the previous number of balls as the previous number of balls = 0, the number of previous subtraction balls = 0, the number of previous start ports (1) = 0, the previous start port ( 2) Number of times = 0, Current number of balls as current number of balls = 0, Current number of added balls = 0, Current subtraction ball = 0, Current starting port (1) times = 0, Current starting port (2) times = 0 is stored and transmitted to the CU as a recovery response.

  In the CU, since the SQN on the P platform side is 0, it is determined that the P platform is cleared, and the backup value is corrected based on the recovery data transmitted in the recovery response. Specifically, the number of gaming balls = 500 (CU backup value) +0 (current number of added balls) −0 (current number of subtracted balls) = 500, cumulative number of added balls = 0 (current number of added balls), number of subtracted balls Cumulative = 0 (current number of subtracted balls), starting port (1) cumulative = 0 (current starting port (1) number of times), starting port (2) cumulative number = 0 (current starting port (2) number of times).

  In the CU, since the SQN on the P platform side is 0, it is determined that the P platform is cleared, and the backup value is corrected based on the recovery data transmitted in the recovery response. Specifically, the number of gaming balls = 500 (CU backup value) +0 (current number of added balls) −0 (current number of subtracted balls) = 500, cumulative number of added balls = 0 (current number of added balls), number of subtracted balls Cumulative = 0 (current number of subtracted balls), starting port (1) cumulative = 0 (current starting port (1) number of times), starting port (2) cumulative number = 0 (current starting port (2) number of times).

  FIG. 81 shows the control in the case where the communication partners do not match in the recovery when the CU-side power cut-off shown in FIG. 79 occurs. Also in the control of FIG. 81, the same control as the control operation described with reference to FIG. 68 is executed. Here, repeated description is omitted.

  FIG. 82 shows the control in the case where communication partners do not match in the recovery when the CU-side power cut-off shown in FIG. 80 occurs. Also in the control of FIG. 82, the same control as the control operation described with reference to FIG. 68 is executed. Here, repeated description is omitted.

  FIG. 83 is a diagram showing transition of display screens on the CU side and the P base side in correspondence with the control operation when the card shown in FIG. 39 is inserted. Referring to FIG. 83, in a state where no card is inserted, an operation instruction command without an operation request is transmitted from the CU to the P unit while waiting, and a response of game ball = 0 is received as an operation response. A reply is sent from the P platform to the CU. During transmission / reception of such commands and responses, as shown in [Normal screen (no card inserted)] in the upper left of FIG. 83, “None” is displayed in the column of “Card type” on the CU display 312. “0 shot” is displayed in the title column of “game ball”. Further, as shown in [Normal screen (no card inserted)] in the upper right of FIG. 83, the P display units 54 have a title of “0 ball” and a card balance of “Game ball”. “0 yen” is displayed. In addition, the display 312 and the display 43 display various data indicating the gaming state of P units at the current time. For example, in FIG. 83, the number of start times, the number of jackpots, the number of chances of change, and the number of times of the highest consecutive number are displayed, and the number of start times between special prizes (effective start wins between one big hit and the next big hit) Count) is displayed as a bar graph. Further, the display unit 312 on the CU side includes a monetary amount setting amount display unit, a card balance amount display unit, a replay ball number display unit, a storage ball number display unit, and a ball lending rate display unit. Is provided.

  Further, the display unit 312 on the CU side is configured with a touch panel as described above, and display items of “device information”, “setting change”, and “order menu” are displayed on the upper left of each display screen. By selecting and touching, the display screen is switched to the touch-operated display screen. In FIG. 83, a screen in a state where “device information” is selected is displayed.

  In addition, the display unit 312 on the CU side is provided with a selection operation display section of “return”, “rental”, “replay”, and “call” in the lower part of each display screen. A command can be input to the CU by selecting and touching. For example, if "Return" is touched, the inserted card is returned, and if "Lending" is touched, a game ball is lent out from the prepaid balance recorded on the inserted card. If “Replay” is touched, replay can be performed using the possessed ball or the stored ball of the inserted card (member card). If “call” is touched, a notification for calling a game attendant is made.

  At the time when the card is inserted, the CU transmits a command indicating no operation request to the P units during the card insertion process as an operation instruction. In response to this, the P unit detects that the card insertion processing has been started on the CU side. After the transmission / reception of the operation instruction command, the host server (for example, the hall management computer 1) is in an inquiry state. In this inquiring state, the CU side display 312 displays “inquiry” as shown in the second “card balance inquiry screen” from the top, and the display on the P platform side. The device 54 inquires the server of the inserted card with an arrow displayed from the server to the IC in the lower left corner of the screen as shown in the second [normal screen (inquiring card balance)] from the top. Picture is displayed. “IC” in the display screen indicates a card (IC card).

  The P machines that have received the operation instruction described above return a response of game ball = 0 to the CU while waiting as an operation response.

  In the CU, if the inserted card is verified by making an inquiry to the server and the possessed ball (= 5000) and balance (= 7000) of the inserted card are determined, the card is being held as an operation instruction. Then, a command with the number of balls requested to be added = 5000 and a card balance = 7000 is transmitted to the P units. After the transmission of this command, the CU is being displayed for addition. In the P machines that have received this command, it is detected on the CU side that the card balance and the holding ball have been determined, and thereafter, the addition display is in progress.

  During the addition display, on the display unit 312 of the CU, “5000 balls” is displayed in the holding ball display column as shown in the third “ball lending screen” from the top, toward the gaming machine. An arrow is displayed and the player is informed that 5000 balls are being transmitted to the gaming machine. On the other hand, on the P platform, as shown in the third [normal screen (ball lending)] from the top by the display 54, an arrow is displayed from the IC toward the game ball display section and the card balance display section. As a result, a display indicating that the ball lending is being added (addition display is being performed) is performed. Then, “5000 balls” is displayed on the game ball display section, and “7000 yen” is displayed on the card balance display section.

  Next, a response including game balls = 5000 is transmitted as an operation response from the P platform to the CU. In the CU, when 2-3 seconds have elapsed since the start of the movement display of the ball indicating that the addition is being displayed, the addition display is ended, and the “member” indicating the card type inserted in the display 312, the game It switches to the state which displays "5000 shots" as a ball. On the other hand, on the P platform, the addition display is ended after a lapse of 2-3 seconds from the start of the movement display of the ball as the addition display is in progress, and the movement display of the ball by the display unit 54 is ended.

  As described above, the display of the start of the operation process such as inquiring or addition display is started at the same time between the CU and the P unit, while the end of the display of the operation process is completed from the CU to the P unit. It can be terminated at its own timing on the P platform side without transmitting a command or the like, and is not restricted by the termination timing on the CU side. As a result, unique display unique to the P platform can be performed.

  FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing a control process in the case where a player shares a game ball by dividing and transferring a game ball to another person during a game. The flowchart shown in FIG. 84 and FIGS. 85 and 86, which will be described later, shows control that allows the player to share and transfer the game balls to another person while continuing the game.

  Referring to FIG. 84, first, a card A as a membership card with a holding ball = 5000 is inserted into the CU. If this membership card is inserted into the CU, the membership card must be returned to the player at the end of the game, even if the gaming value of the membership card (money balls, savings and prepaid balance) is all zero. I must.

  After the card A is inserted, the CU transmits a command including the number of balls to be added = 5000 for adding “5000”, which is the ball of the card A, on the P platform side to the P platform. In response to this, the P platform updates the game ball to 5000, and transmits a response including the game ball to 5000 as an operation response to the CU. After that, the game is started on the P platform, and when the number of game balls decreases to 4000 with the execution of the game, 1000 balls of game balls are transferred to another person and the ball is shared (1000 When a ball (ball) designation operation is performed, the CU and the P platform are in a state of splitting the holding balls thereafter.

  The card B on which the ball to be divided and transferred (shared ball sharing) to another person is recorded, the stock card stored in the card stock section in the CU is taken out to the card reader / writer 327 to make up the card B Although writing and discharging from the CU, in order to discharge the card B, it is necessary to first discharge the card A that has already been inserted into the card reader / writer 327. At that time, if all the game balls (= 4000) at the present time are written and discharged to the card A (member card owned by the player), the game ball = 0 and the game can be continued thereafter. Disappear.

  Therefore, in order to make it possible to divide the points while sharing a game (shared ball sharing), the card A is ejected from the CU in the state of “held points = 0”, and the game balls corresponding to the points are CU To keep it as collateral information. Instead of directly recording the card score on the card, the higher server may store the score in association with the card number of the card. In that case, the card number of the inserted card A and the number of game balls = 0 are transmitted to the upper server, and the points stored in association with the card number received by the upper server are searched, The score is updated to 0. Thereafter, the CU ejects the card A.

  After the card A (point 0) is ejected from the card reader / writer 327 of the CU, the stock card B (point 0) in the CU is taken out to the card reader / writer 327 and compensated. At that time, the game balls are subtracted as the game continues in the P units, and the game balls are in a state of 3800. A command including an operation request (operation instruction) with the number of balls to be subtracted = 1000 is transmitted from the CU to the P units in order to write 1000, which is the ball to be divided and transferred (shared ball sharing) to the card B. In response to this, the P number subtracts 1000 from the current number of game balls 3800 to obtain the number of game balls = 2800, and transmits an operation response including the number of game balls = 2800 to the CU. In response to this, the CU backs up the data of game balls = 2800.

  Next, the CU writes “Moving Ball = 1000” to the card B by the card reader / writer 327 and returns (discharges) the card B. When the player hands the discharged card B to another person, the game ball can be divided and transferred (shared ball) to the other person. In addition, when the score is stored in association with the card number of the card in the host server instead of directly recording the score of the card on the card, the card number of the card B and the divided transfer (held ball) 1000) which is a point to be shared) is transmitted to the upper server, the score = 1000 is stored in association with the card number received by the upper server, and the card is divided and transferred (point sharing) It is stored as a history that 1000 points are points generated by sharing the ball. Thereafter, the CU ejects the card B.

  After the card B is ejected, the CU waits for reinsertion of the card A which is the player's membership card that has been ejected first, and displays on the display 312 to prompt the user to insert the card A (see FIG. 92). Then, the player who sees it inserts the card A into the CU. At that time, the game ball = 2750. If the card A is inserted into the CU, the CU determines whether the inserted card A is the same as the card A that has been ejected due to the point sharing process (for example, both card numbers match). If they do not match, the card A is ejected. If they match, the ball splitting (ball sharing) process ends, and a message to that effect is displayed on the display 312 (see FIG. 93).

  In the inserted card A, when the card is returned after the game is finished, the game ball is written as a holding ball and discharged from the CU.

  FIG. 85 shows the control operation in the case where the player inserts the visitor card B on which 5,000 balls are recorded into the CU and performs split transfer (shared ball sharing) while playing the game. Yes. In this case, since the card B inserted first is a visitor card that does not necessarily have to be returned to the player, the card to be divided by another person is written on the visitor card B inserted earlier. The ball is shared and the visitor card B is transferred to another person.

  First, by inserting the visitor card B (with balls = 5000) into the CU, an operation request including the number of balls to be added = 5000 for adding all the 5000 balls recorded on the inserted card B as game balls. (Operation instruction) is transmitted from the CU to the P platform.

  In response to this, the P platform stores the game ball = 5000 and returns an operation response including the game ball = 5000 to the CU. From that stage, the game is possible with P cars, and the game is in progress.

  Then, after the game balls are used in the game and the game balls are set to 4000, the player designates the shared ball (1000 balls) to divide and transfer the 1000 game balls to another person. From this stage, the player is in the state of dividing points. At this stage, the game balls are further used for the game and the game balls = 3800. Then, an operation request including a subtraction request number of balls = 1000 for subtracting 1000 balls of game balls for split transfer (share ball sharing) from the CU is transmitted from the CU to the P units. In response to this, the P platform subtracts 1000 from the current game ball 3800 to set the game ball = 2800, and returns an operation response including the game ball = 2800 to the CU. In response, the CU backs up the data of game balls = 2800. Then, “Moving Ball = 1000” is written in the card B held by the card reader / writer 327, and the card B is returned (discharged). At this stage, the process of split transfer of holding balls (share holding) is completed. Even after that, if the player continues the game with the P units, and the player presses the return button 322 to end the game, the process proceeds to the card return process shown in FIG. 46 and is stored in the CU. The stock card is taken out by the card reader / writer 327, and the data of the holding ball corresponding to the game ball at that time is recorded on the stock card and discharged.

  In addition, when the score is stored in association with the card number of the card in the host server instead of directly recording the score of the card on the card, the card number of the card B and the divided transfer (held ball) 1000) which is a score to be shared) is transmitted to the upper server, the score stored in association with the card number received by the higher server is searched, and the score is used as the number of game balls received from the CU. In addition to updating to a corresponding value (= 1000 points), it is stored as a history that the card has been divided and transferred (share points shared) and that 1000 points are points generated by share possession. Thereafter, the CU ejects the card B. And also about the stock card discharged | emitted at the time of a game end, the card number and the data of the number of game balls at the time of card | curd discharge | emission are transmitted to a high-order server, and it is matched with the card number received in the high-order server. And a history that the owner of the card B is changed to the owner of the stock card is stored. The CU then discharges the stock card.

  FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing another example of divided transfer of game balls (shared ball sharing). Differences from the control process shown in FIG. 84 will be mainly described. The flowchart shown in FIG. 86 is the same as FIG. 84 in that the card A, which is the player's membership card already inserted, is returned first when the game balls are divided and transferred (shared ball sharing). There is a game ball (200 collateral balls) necessary to continue the game during splitting, and the remaining game balls are recorded as cards in card A. Is different from FIG.

  Specifically, first, the player operates display unit 312 including a touch panel to designate holding ball sharing in which 1000 balls are divided and transferred. Then, the CU leaves the 1000 shared balls to be split and transferred and the 200 collateral balls described above in the CU, and calculates the remaining game balls 3800. Specifically, the current game ball (5000) −collateral ball (200) −shared ball (1000) = 3800 is calculated. Then, in order to subtract the calculated 3800 game balls, the CU transmits an operation request command including the number of subtraction request balls = 3800 to the P units. In response to this, the P units subtract 3800 from the current game ball 5000 and calculate and store the remaining game balls 1200. Then, an operation response including the game ball = 1200 is returned to the CU.

  The CU receives the operation response (response), leaves the collateral ball = 200, the shared ball = 1000 in the CU, and writes the holding ball = 3800 in the card A held by the card reader / writer 327. Discharge. In this way, in order to perform split transfer (shared ball sharing) of the holding ball while continuing the game in the P unit, the return of the card A that has been inserted leaving the collateral ball for play (play: 200 balls) in the CU Is done.

  Thereafter, the CU takes out the stock card (card B of the holding ball 0) stocked in the CU to the card reader / writer 327 and compensates it. In the meantime, the game is continued in P cars, and as a result, the number of added balls = 10 and the number of subtracted balls = 60 are generated. As a result, game balls = 1200 + 10 (number of added balls) −60 (number of subtracted balls) = 1150.

  In the CU, an operation request command including the subtraction request number of balls = 1000 is transmitted to the P units in order to divide and transfer 1000 shared balls (shared ball sharing).

  In response to this, the P player subtracts the number of subtraction request balls 1000 from the current game ball 1150 to calculate the remaining game balls = 150, and transmits a response of the motion response including the game balls = 150 to the CU.

  The CU receives it, writes “Mochitama = 1000” on the card B, and returns (discharges) it. The player can perform divided transfer (shared ball) of the game balls by giving the discharged card B to another person.

  After the card B is discharged, the CU displays on the display 312 to prompt the player to reinsert the member card A that has been discharged. The player who saw it re-inserts the previously ejected card A (mochitama = 3800) into the CU. In the meantime, the game continues with P units, and as a result, the number of added balls = 10 and the number of subtracted balls = 85 are generated. Therefore, the game ball at the time when the card A is reinserted = 150 + 10−85 = 75. When the card A is reinserted, the CU determines whether the inserted card A is the same as the card A that has been ejected along with the point sharing process (for example, both card numbers are the same). If they do not match, the card A is ejected. On the other hand, if they match, the CU adds 3800 recorded balls on the card A to the P units as a game ball. Accordingly, an operation request command including the number of addition request balls = 3800 is transmitted to the P units. In response to this, the P platform calculates a game ball = 75 + 3800 = 3875, stores it as the current game ball, and transmits a response of an operation response including the game ball = 3875 to the CU.

  In addition, when the score is stored in association with the card number of the card in the host server instead of directly recording the score of the card on the card, the card number of the card B and the divided transfer (held ball) 1000) which is a point to be shared) is transmitted to the upper server, the score = 1000 is stored in association with the card number received by the upper server, and the card is divided and transferred (point sharing) It is stored as a history that 1000 points are points generated by sharing the ball. Thereafter, the CU ejects the card B.

87 to 104 are screen views displayed by the display unit 312 of the CU.
First, based on FIGS. 87 to 93, a display screen displayed on the display 312 in the case of performing the ball sharing shown in FIG. 84 will be described.

  Referring to FIG. 87, the player selects and designates sharing the ball from a plurality of menus displayed by touching the display item (icon) of “Menu” displayed in the upper left half of the screen. This state is the display screen for sharing the ball shown in FIG. The shared ball sharing (game ball split transfer) can be either split transfer from a player-owned ball or split transfer from a stored ball. For this purpose, first, a message “Please select a ball sharing source” is displayed, and a display item (icon) representing a holding ball to be selected and a display item (icon) representing a storage ball are displayed.

  In the right half display screen of FIG. 87, the state of the card inserted at the present time is displayed. In FIG. 87, a membership card is inserted, and it is shown that the membership card has a card balance of 0 yen, a holding ball of 0 balls, a storage ball of 500 balls, and a current game ball of 10,000 balls.

  Further, as the state of the CU, it is displayed that the lending unit amount when lending a game ball from the card balance is 500 yen, and 125 balls corresponding to 500 yen is the number of payout balls. Further, it is shown that the player can reload the card balance of the inserted card by inserting a bill into the CU.

  The player touches either “mochidama” or “reserved ball” on the left half of the screen to select and input a ball sharing source. Here, a case where “mochitama” is selected is shown.

  When the player selects “mochitama”, the screen shown in FIG. 88 is displayed. A message “Please select the number of balls to share” is displayed on the left half of the screen, and the number of balls to be shared is 500 balls, 1000 balls, 1500 balls, 2000 balls, 2500 balls, 3000 balls, 3500 balls, Nine types of 4000 balls and 5000 balls are displayed. The player selects and inputs one of these nine types. Here, a case where “1000 balls” is selected and input will be described.

  If the player selects and inputs “1000 balls”, the screen shown in FIG. 89 is displayed. In the screen shown in FIG. 89, a message “Your ball is divided by the above details. Are you sure?” Is displayed, and the number of balls on your card is 9000 as the details of the number of shared balls. It is displayed that the number of balls of a shared card to be divided and transferred (shared ball sharing) is 1000. Then, a display item (icon) “start ball sharing” and a display item (icon) “cancel” are displayed. The player touches one of these display items to select and input. If “Cancel” is selected, sharing of the ball is canceled. On the other hand, if “start ball sharing” is selected and input, ball sharing processing as shown in the details of the number of balls to be shared is started.

  If the player selects and inputs “start ball sharing”, the screen shown in FIG. 90 is displayed. In the screen shown in FIG. 90, a message “My card will be ejected” is displayed, and a ball sharing processing status image indicating the progress of the ball sharing processing is displayed. This ball sharing process status image has three types, 1, 2, and 3 as the processing order. In the first process, the player's (player) card is discharged, the shared card is discharged as the second process, and the third process. As reinserted my card is displayed as ejected. In the “status” column, “processing” and “waiting” are displayed from the top, indicating that the first processing is currently being processed. An image in which the user's card is ejected by a broken line from the first process is shown.

  On the right half of the screen in FIG. 90, 10,000 balls that are game balls in the P units at the present time are displayed blinking.

  Next, the screen shown in FIG. 91 is displayed at the stage where the card has been ejected. In FIG. 91, the “status” column indicates that the discharge of the card as the first process is “completed” and the discharge of the shared card as the second process is being processed next. . A state in which the shared card is ejected from the second process is indicated by an arrow.

  Next, the screen shown in FIG. 92 is displayed when the discharge of the shared card is completed. In the screen shown in FIG. 92, the user's card has been ejected as the first process, and the shared card has been ejected as the second process. It is shown that there is. An image for inserting one's own card with an arrow is displayed at the third processing location.

  When the player reinserts his / her card into the CU, the screen shown in FIG. 93 is then displayed. In FIG. 93, a message “ball sharing is complete” is displayed, and the ball sharing processing status indicates that all of the first processing, the second processing, and the third processing have been completed. Then, since the sharing of 1000 balls has been completed, it is displayed that the number of game balls in P units at the present time is 10000-1000 = 9000, which is 9000 balls.

  Next, FIGS. 94 to 100 are diagrams of display screens by the display 312 when the control processing of the wagon service shown in FIG. 43 is executed.

  First, referring to FIG. 94, the display screen of FIG. 94 is a state in which the player touches and selects and inputs the display item (icon) of “Wagon Service” displayed in the upper part of the left half of the screen. First of all, the message “Please select the type you want to order” is displayed, and as the wagon menu, “5 classic menu items”, “30 drinks”, “10 food items”, “sweets 20” 4 types of menus are displayed, and an “order status confirmation” icon is displayed.

  On the right half of the screen in FIG. 94, 1000 balls are displayed as the number of game balls at the present time on P cars. The player selects a wagon menu that can be ordered within the range of 1000 balls, considering that the current number of game balls is 1000 balls. For example, when the player selects “30 drinks”, the screen shown in FIG. 95 is displayed. In FIG. 95, a message “Please select a product to order” is displayed, and six types of menus included in the drinks are shown. The number of game balls required to order each menu Is displayed. The player touches and selects and inputs an item to be ordered from the displayed menu in consideration that the current number of game balls is 1000 balls. An equilateral triangle icon and an inverted triangle icon are displayed on the right side where various menus on the left screen are displayed. When the player touches the equilateral triangle icon, the screen is scrolled down and the upper part of the screen is displayed. On the other hand, if the player touches the inverted triangle icon shown in FIG. 95, the screen is scrolled up and the lower portion of the screen is displayed.

  In FIG. 95, after the player selects a menu of coffee that requires 75 balls, the “add product” icon displayed in the title column of “order product details” in FIG. Returning to the wagon menu display screen of FIG. 94, the menu of “10 foods” in FIG. 94 is selected and the menu of foods is displayed, and “hamburger” that requires 100 game balls is displayed. The menu is selected, and further, the “add product” icon displayed in the title column of “order product details” in FIG. 96 is touched to return to the wagon menu display screen in FIG. 94 again. A case will be described in which the icon “20 sweets” is selected and input, and the player selects “ice” that requires 50 game balls from the display screen of the sweets.

  In that case, the screen shown in FIG. 96 is displayed next, and the details of the ordered product selected and input so far are displayed. In the order details, the name of the ordered product, the number of balls consumed, and the quantity of the ordered product are displayed. In the case of FIG. 96, it is shown that one hamburger with a consumption of 100 balls, one coffee with a consumption of 75 balls, and one ice with a consumption of 50 balls are ordered. And it is displayed that the total number of balls consumed is 225 balls. In addition, an “add” icon is displayed in the quantity column of the order item details. When the player touches and inputs this additional icon, the quantity is incremented by “1” each time it is touched. The A “delete” icon is displayed on the right side of the quantity corresponding to each ordered prize. When the player touches this icon, the order for the corresponding product can be deleted. For example, touching “Delete” at the top deletes the hamburger order, touching the second “Delete” deletes the coffee order, and touching “Delete” the third “Ice” Orders are deleted.

  Further, an “add product” icon is shown below the order product details, and when the player touches this, the player returns to the wagon menu display screen of FIG. It is possible to select an order item and place an additional order.

  Also, a “cancel” icon is shown below the order product details in FIG. 96, and by touching this icon, the player can cancel all the order products that have been ordered so far.

  Furthermore, an “order” icon is shown below the order item details, and when the player touches this, the order processing of the wagon service as shown in the order item details is executed. Become.

  When the player touches the “delete” icon corresponding to the “ice” order on the display screen of FIG. 96, the screen shown in FIG. 97 is displayed. FIG. 97 shows a state in which the order for “ice” has been canceled.

  On the other hand, when the player touches the “order” icon in FIG. 96, the screen shown in FIG. 98 is displayed. On the display screen of FIG. 98, an image being inquired about the ordered product is displayed. An arrow is displayed to indicate that transmission / reception is being performed between 225 balls, which is the total number of balls consumed, and 1000 balls currently played on P cars, indicating that communication is in progress. Specifically, with reference to FIG. 99, an arrow indicating that communication is in progress is first displayed in the direction from the “225” balls consumed to the “1000” balls in the P range. The text “Inquiry” is displayed.

  After this display is made, an arrow is displayed from the “1000” balls in the P direction toward the “225” balls to be consumed, and the text “inquiry” is displayed. Both of these displays are repeated a plurality of times. After the display, the screen of FIG. 100 is displayed next. In the screen of FIG. 100, a message “The order item has been received. The number of consumption balls has been withdrawn from the holding ball.” Is displayed, and the order item reception completion is displayed and the order item received and It is displayed that the total number of balls consumed is “225”. In the right half of the screen, it is displayed that the game balls in the current P units are “775” balls as a result of the consumption of 225 balls.

  101 and 102 are display screens during addition display in the card insertion process shown in FIG. 39, and the third display screen from the top among the display screens of the CU-side display 312 shown in FIG. Another example is shown.

  Referring to FIG. 101, the left half of the screen shows game table information showing the same contents as the display screen on the CU side of FIG. 83, although the screen configuration is different.

  On the right side of the screen in FIG. 101, a display is shown in which all 1000 balls, which are the balls of the card inserted into the CU, are moving from the CU to the P platform to the P platform side.

  Then, at the stage where the movement of the ball is completed, the screen is switched to the display screen shown in FIG. 102, a message “Moving ball movement complete!” Is displayed on the right side of the screen, and the field of the ball is 0 balls. 1000 balls are displayed as game balls in the P platform, and the display of “1000” blinking is made.

  103 and 104 are display screens showing that a clear display is being performed in the card return process shown in FIG. First, referring to FIG. 103, in the right half of the screen, it is displayed that the current number of game balls on P cars is 1000 balls, and “1000” is flashed. Then, a state in which the holding ball is moved from the P platform to the holding ball display field is displayed, and a character “moving ball holding” is displayed.

  Then, at the stage where the movement of the holding balls is completed, the screen is switched to the display screen shown in FIG. 104, and the state that the gaming balls on the P platform side are 0 balls is displayed, and 1000 balls are displayed as the holding balls. Then, “1000” is displayed blinking.

[Explanation of administrator mode in combination with card unit and pachinko machine]
Next, the administrator mode in the combination of the card unit 3 and the pachinko machine 2 will be described. The administrator mode is a mode in which stored information such as the card unit 3 or the pachinko machine 2 (or a slot machine 2S, which will be described later) can be checked or changed. The

  FIG. 105 is a flowchart showing the process flow of the administrator mode in the card unit 3. Referring to FIG. 105, in step S121, the CPU of main control unit 323 of card unit 3 does not play a game in pachinko machine 2 which is a gaming machine corresponding to card unit 3 when card unit 3 is activated. During standby, it is determined whether or not a test card has been inserted into the card reader / writer 327.

  When it is determined that a test card has been inserted into the card reader / writer 327 (when it is determined YES at step S121), at step S122, the CPU of the main control unit 323 changes the test hit mode (test mode) or the administrator mode described above. The display control unit 797 is controlled to display a menu for selection on the display 312 and it is determined whether or not the administrator mode is selected from the menu.

  When it is determined that a test card is not inserted (when NO is determined at step S121) and when it is determined that the administrator mode is not selected (when NO is determined at step S122), the main control unit 323 The CPU returns the process to be executed to the caller process of this process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the administrator mode has been selected (YES in step S122), in step S123, the CPU of the main control unit 323 moves the card unit 3 and the corresponding pachinko machine 2 to the administrator mode. Control to switch to.

  Next, in step S131, the CPU of the main control unit 323 determines whether or not the corresponding pachinko machine 2 corresponding to the connection destination has been changed. For example, it is determined whether the main chip ID and the payout chip ID stored in the card unit 3 are the same as the main chip ID and the payout chip ID of the currently connected pachinko machine 2, respectively.

  When it is determined that the connected pachinko machine 2 has not been changed (NO in step S131), in step S132, the CPU of the main control unit 323 displays information corresponding to the screen to be displayed on the card unit. 3 from the RAM of the main control unit 323 and the pachinko machine 2. Note that the information to be displayed may be acquired from the pachinko machine 2 at the timing when the mode is switched to the administrator mode, or the information that changes according to the game situation is constantly displayed in the player mode. It may be obtained from the pachinko machine 2. For example, the pachinko machine 2 may include the information in the operation response that is repeatedly transmitted every predetermined period and transmit the information to the card unit 3. Further, the card unit 3 that has received these pieces of information stores the received information in the main control unit 323 in order, and when switching to the administrator mode, the card unit 3 is in the administrator mode based on the stored information. Information may be displayed.

  Alternatively, such information is transmitted to a management device such as the hall management computer 1 at the timing when the mode is switched to the manager mode or in the player mode, and the card unit 3 is switched to the manager mode. The information may be received from the management device at the timing, and the information in the administrator mode may be displayed based on the received information.

  FIG. 106 is a diagram for explaining a storage information setting screen which is an example of a screen displayed in the administrator mode. Referring to FIG. 106, for example, the information for displaying the stored information setting screen is the information described with reference to FIG.

  Specifically, the CPU of the main control unit 323 reads the main chip ID of the corresponding pachinko machine 2, the payout chip ID of the corresponding pachinko machine 2, the connection time, the sequence number from the RAM of the main control unit 323 of the card unit 3. , The number of game balls, the total number of added balls, the total number of subtracted balls, the total number of winnings for starting port 1 and the total number of starting ports 2 are acquired.

  Further, the CPU of the main control unit 323, from the pachinko machine 2, the number of pre-added balls, the number of pre-subtracted balls, the number of pre-start opening 1 wins, the number of pre-start opening 2 wins, the current number of play balls, the current number of add balls, The number of subtraction balls, the current starting port 1 winning number, and the current starting port 2 winning number are acquired. In acquiring these information, the card unit 3 transmits a command for requesting transmission of these information to the pachinko machine 2, and the pachinko machine 2 transmits these information to the card unit 3 as a response to the request. Is done.

  Returning to FIG. 105, if it is determined that the connected pachinko machine 2 has been changed (YES in step S131), the CPU of the main control unit 323 displays the screen to be displayed in step S133. The corresponding information is acquired from the RAM of the main control unit 323 of the card unit 3 and the pachinko machine 2A connected last time.

  Normally, the information of the pachinko machine 2A connected last time is backed up and stored in the RAM of the main control unit 323 of the card unit 3. In S133, the information is backed up to the RAM of the main control unit 323 of the card unit 3. Based on the “information on the pachinko machine 2A connected last time”, information corresponding to the screen to be displayed is acquired. However, there may be a case where the recovery information of the pachinko machine 2A connected last time cannot be completely backed up in the RAM of the main control unit 323 for some reason. For example, even when a configuration in which information for the administrator mode is constantly transmitted and received between the card unit 3 and the pachinko machine 2A even in the game mode, the latest information from the pachinko machine 2A is used. If the connection between the two occurs before the information reaches the card unit 3 and the pachinko machine 2A is replaced after that, the information is stored on the card unit 3 side. The recovery information of the pachinko machine 2A that is being used is different from the actual state of the pachinko machine 2A.

  In such a case, it is necessary to refer to the information read directly from the pachinko machine 2A connected last time. For this purpose, for example, the pachinko machine 2A connected last time is connected to a management device such as the hall management computer 1 and the latest recovery information is sucked up by the management device from the pachinko machine 2A. On the other hand, it may be configured to transmit the latest recovery information. In S133, in such a case, information is acquired from the previously connected pachinko machine 2A via the management device.

  After step S132 or step S133, in step S134, the CPU of the main control unit 323 performs display control so as to display a screen indicating the acquired information (here, the storage information setting screen in FIG. 106) on the display 312. The unit 797 is controlled.

  Proceeding to FIG. 106, the stored information setting screen displays information stored in the card unit 3 on the left half and information acquired from the pachinko machine 2 on the right half. By confirming these pieces of information, it is possible to find inconsistencies between the information stored in the card unit 3 and the pachinko machine 2 respectively, which can be used as a reference for manual correction by a store clerk at the game hall.

  Returning to FIG. 105, in step S <b> 135, the CPU of the main control unit 323 determines whether or not an operation for changing the screen has been performed. For example, the operation of changing the screen is an operation of touching the “screen change” button on the screen of FIG.

  If it is determined that there has been an operation to change the screen (YES in step S135), a menu for selecting the screen is displayed, and the CPU of the main control unit 323 selects the screen selected from the menu as described above. The processing from step S131 to step S134 is executed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no operation to change the screen (NO in step S135), in step S136, the CPU of the main control unit 323 determines whether correction data has been input. The correction data is input by directly selecting a part of the screen information to be changed.

  If it is determined that correction data has been input (YES in step S136), in step S137, the CPU of the main control unit 323 corrects the input item data to the input correction data. Thereafter, the CPU of the main control unit 323 executes the processing from step S131 to step S134 described above for the screen on which the correction data is reflected.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that correction data has not been input (NO in step S136), in step S138, the CPU of the main control unit 323 determines whether there has been an operation to end the administrator mode. . For example, the operation to end the administrator mode is an operation of touching the “END” button on the screen of FIG.

  If it is determined that there is no operation to end the administrator mode (NO in step S138), the CPU of the main control unit 323 returns the process to be executed to the process of step S135.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that there is an operation for ending the administrator mode (YES in step S138), in step S139, the CPU of the main control unit 323 determines that the card unit 3 and the corresponding pachinko machine 2 are Control is made to switch to the player mode, and then the process to be executed is returned to the process of the caller of this process. The player mode is a mode in which the player can play with a gaming machine such as the pachinko machine 2 (or the slot machine 2S), and during this mode, a game is enabled.

  FIG. 107 is a flowchart showing a process flow of the administrator mode in the pachinko machine 2. In this process, the pachinko machine 2 executes the same process as that executed by the card unit 3 described with reference to FIG.

  Referring to FIG. 107, in step S141, the CPU of payout control unit 17 of pachinko machine 2 determines whether or not setting key switch 1012 is in the ON state. When it is determined that it is not in the ON state (when NO is determined in step S141), the CPU of the payout control unit 17 returns the process to be executed to the caller process of this process.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the setting key switch 1012 is in the ON state (when YES is determined in step S141), in step S142, the CPU of the payout control unit 17 connects the pachinko machine 2 and the corresponding card unit 3 to each other. Control to switch to administrator mode.

  Next, in step S151, the CPU of the payout control unit 17 determines whether or not the card unit 3 corresponding to the connection destination has been changed. For example, the main chip ID and the payout chip ID stored in the card unit 3 are acquired, and it is determined whether or not they are the same as the main chip ID and the payout chip ID of the own device, respectively.

  When it is determined that the connection-destination card unit 3 has not been changed (NO in step S151), in step S152, the CPU of the payout control unit 17 displays information corresponding to the screen to be displayed on the pachinko machine. 2 from the RAM of the payout control unit 17 and the card unit 3. Note that the information to be displayed may be acquired from the card unit 3 at the timing when the mode is switched to the administrator mode. Alternatively, in the player mode, the information that changes in accordance with the game situation is constantly displayed. It may be obtained from the card unit 3. For example, the card unit 3 may include the information included in the operation instruction command repeatedly transmitted every predetermined period and transmit the information to the pachinko machine 2. In addition, the pachinko machine 2 that has received these pieces of information stores the received information sequentially in the payout control unit 17, and when switching to the administrator mode, the pachinko machine 2 is in the administrator mode based on the stored information. Information may be displayed.

  Alternatively, such information is transmitted to a management device such as the hall management computer 1 at the timing when the mode is switched to the manager mode or in the player mode, and the pachinko machine 2 is switched to the manager mode. The information may be received from the management device at the timing, and the information in the administrator mode may be displayed based on the received information.

  Referring to FIG. 106 again, for example, the information for displaying the stored information setting screen is the information described in FIG. 5 as described in FIG.

  Specifically, the CPU of the payout control unit 17 reads from the RAM of the payout control unit 17 of the pachinko machine 2 the cumulative number of pre-added balls, the number of pre-subtracted balls, the number of pre-start port 1 wins, the number of pre-start port 2 wins, The current number of game balls, the current number of added balls, the current number of subtracted balls, the current starting port 1 winning number, and the current starting port 2 winning number are acquired.

  In addition, the CPU of the payout control unit 17 sends, from the card unit 3, the main chip ID of the corresponding pachinko machine 2, the payout chip ID of the corresponding pachinko machine 2, the connection time, the sequence number, the number of game balls, the cumulative number of balls, The cumulative number of subtraction balls, the cumulative number of winnings for starting port 1 and the number of starting ports 2 are acquired. To acquire these information, the pachinko machine 2 sends a command requesting transmission of these information to the card unit 3, and the card unit 3 sends these information to the pachinko machine 2 as a response to the request. Is done.

  Returning to FIG. 107, if it is determined that the card unit 3 to be connected has been changed (YES in step S151), the CPU of the payout control unit 17 displays a screen to be displayed in step S153. The corresponding information is acquired from the RAM of the payout control unit 17 of the pachinko machine 2 and the card unit 3A connected last time.

  In this case, the card unit 3A connected last time needs to be connected so as to be able to communicate with the pachinko machine 2 via the hall management computer 1 or the like. When not connected, the pachinko machine 2 cannot acquire information from the card unit 3 connected last time. If not connected, the information read from the card unit 3A connected last time is input to the card unit 3 via the pachinko machine 2 or directly.

  After step S152 or step S153, in step S154, the CPU of the payout control unit 17 displays the screen indicating the acquired information (here, the stored information setting screen of FIG. 106) on the display 54. The effect control board 53 is controlled.

  Returning to FIG. 106, on the storage information setting screen, information acquired from the card unit 3 is displayed on the left half, and information stored in the pachinko machine 2 is displayed on the right half. By confirming these pieces of information, it is possible to find inconsistencies between the information stored in the card unit 3 and the pachinko machine 2 respectively, which can be used as a reference for manual correction by a store clerk at the game hall.

  Returning to FIG. 107, in step S <b> 155, the CPU of the payout control unit 17 determines whether or not an operation for changing the screen has been performed. For example, the operation of changing the screen is an operation of the chance button 56 and the jog dial 57 for selecting the “screen change” button on the screen of FIG. The “change screen” button can be selected by moving the position of the pointer with the jog dial 57, placing the pointer on the “change screen” button, and pressing the chance button 56.

  When it is determined that there has been an operation to change the screen (when YES is determined in step S155), a menu for selecting the screen is displayed, and the CPU of the payout control unit 17 for the screen selected in the menu has been described above. The processing from step S151 to step S154 is executed.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that there is no operation to change the screen (when NO is determined in step S155), in step S156, the CPU of the payout control unit 17 determines whether correction data is input. The correction data is input by selecting a portion of the screen information to be changed by moving the pointer with the chance button 56 and the jog dial 57.

  If it is determined that correction data has been input (YES in step S156), in step S157, the CPU of the payout control unit 17 corrects the input item data to the input correction data. Thereafter, the CPU of the payout control unit 17 executes the processing from step S151 to step S154 described above for the screen on which the correction data is reflected.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that correction data has not been input (NO in step S156), in step S158, the CPU of the payout control unit 17 determines whether there has been an operation to end the administrator mode. . For example, the operation for ending the administrator mode is an operation for selecting the “END” button on the screen of FIG. 106 by moving the pointer with the chance button 56 and the jog dial 57.

  If it is determined that there is no operation to end the administrator mode (NO in step S158), the CPU of the payout control unit 17 returns the process to be executed to the process in step S155.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that there has been an operation to end the administrator mode (YES in step S158), in step S159, the CPU of the payout control unit 17 replaces the pachinko machine 2 and the corresponding card unit 3 with each other. Control is made to switch to the player mode, and then the process to be executed is returned to the process of the caller of this process.

  FIG. 108 is a flowchart showing an outline of the flow of recovery processing in the card unit 3. A gaming machine corresponding to the card unit 3 will be described as a pachinko machine 2.

  Referring to FIG. 108, in the recovery process described above, in step S101, the CPU of main controller 323 of card unit 3 determines whether a recovery response has been received from corresponding pachinko machine 2.

  If it is determined that a recovery response has not been received (NO in step S101), the CPU of the main control unit 323 returns the process to be executed to the process that called the recovery process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that a recovery response has been received (YES in step S101), in step S102, the CPU of the main control unit 323 determines that the main chip ID and the payout chip ID included in the recovery response are respectively It is determined whether the main chip ID and the payout chip ID stored in the RAM of the main control unit 323 match. That is, it is determined whether or not the corresponding pachinko machine 2 has been changed.

  When it is determined that the main chip ID and the payout chip ID match (when YES is determined in step S102), that is, when it is determined that the corresponding pachinko machine 2 has not been changed, in step S103, the main control unit 323 As described with reference to FIGS. 65 to 67, 71, 72, 75, 76, 79, and 80, the CPU determines the sequence number stored in the RAM and the sequence number included in the recovery response. Automatic correction for correcting the backup value is executed in accordance with the comparison result. Thereafter, the CPU of the main control unit 323 advances the process to be executed to the process of step S111 described later.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the main chip ID and the payout chip ID do not match (NO in step S102), that is, if it is determined that the corresponding pachinko machine 2 has been changed, the main control unit 323 is determined in step S104. The CPU controls the card unit 3 and the corresponding pachinko machine 2 to switch to the manager mode.

  Next, in step S105, the CPU of the main control unit 323 acquires the recovery information from the corresponding pachinko machine 2, acquires the recovery information of the pachinko machine 2A connected last time from the RAM of the main control unit 323, and acquires the recovery information. The display control unit 797 is controlled to display a screen showing the information on the display 312.

  Here, in addition to the information displayed on the screen described with reference to FIG. 106, the displayed screen further displays the recovery information of the pachinko machine 2A connected last time. That is, referring to FIG. 106, in addition to various information described as “CU side” in FIG. 106, recovery information of “game machine connected last time” and its pachinko machine information as “game machine side” information. Instead of the gaming machine 2A, recovery information of the “currently connected gaming machine” corresponding to the newly connected pachinko gaming machine 2A is displayed.

  However, there may be a case where the recovery information of the pachinko machine 2A connected last time cannot be completely backed up in the RAM of the main control unit 323 for some reason. For example, even when a configuration in which information for the administrator mode is constantly transmitted and received between the card unit 3 and the pachinko machine 2A even in the game mode, the latest information from the pachinko machine 2A is used. If the connection between the two occurs before the information reaches the card unit 3 and the pachinko machine 2A is replaced after that, the information is stored on the card unit 3 side. The recovery information of the pachinko machine 2A that is being used is different from the actual state of the pachinko machine 2A.

  In such a case, it is necessary to refer to the information read directly from the pachinko machine 2A connected last time. For this purpose, for example, the pachinko machine 2A connected last time is connected to a management device such as the hall management computer 1 and the latest recovery information is sucked up by the management device from the pachinko machine 2A. On the other hand, it may be configured to transmit the latest recovery information.

  Next, in step S106, the CPU of the main control unit 323 determines whether correction data has been input. The correction data is input by directly selecting a part of the screen information to be changed.

  If it is determined that correction data has been input (YES in step S106), in step S107, the CPU of the main control unit 323 corrects the input item data to the input correction data. Thereafter, the display control unit 797 is controlled to display the screen on which the correction data is reflected on the display 312.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that correction data has not been input (NO in step S106), in step S108, the CPU of the main control unit 323 determines whether there has been an operation to end correction.

  If it is determined that there is no operation to end the correction (NO in step S108), the CPU of the main control unit 323 returns the process to be executed to the process of step S106.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that there has been an operation to end the correction (YES in step S108), in step S109, the CPU of the main control unit 323 moves the card unit 3 and the corresponding pachinko machine 2 to the player. Control is performed to switch to the mode, and then the process to be executed is advanced to the process of step S111.

  In step S <b> 111, the CPU of the main control unit 323 controls the CU communication control unit 380 to transmit a connection confirmation request for confirming the connection with the pachinko machine 2 to the pachinko machine 2.

  Next, in step S112, the CPU of the main control unit 323 determines whether or not the CU communication control unit 380 has received a connection confirmation response to the connection confirmation request from the corresponding pachinko machine 2. If not received (NO in step S112), the CPU of the main control unit 323 repeats the process of step S112.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that a connection confirmation response has been received (YES in step S112), in step S113, the CPU of the main control unit 323 updates the backup value stored in the RAM to the corrected data. .

  Next, in step S <b> 114, the CPU of the main control unit 323 controls the CU communication control unit 380 to transmit the above-described communication start request to the pachinko machine 2. Thereafter, the CPU of the main control unit 323 returns the process to be executed to the process of the caller of this recovery process. In the recovery process, a process other than the process described here may be executed.

  (1) FIG. 109 is a diagram for explaining functions of the game system in the administrator mode. Referring to FIG. 109, the gaming system of the present embodiment is connected to pachinko machine 2 and pachinko machine 2 so as to be communicable, and is used for gaming such as a prepaid balance owned by a player, the number of possessed balls, or the number of stored balls. And a card unit 3 that can convert the value into points such as the number of possessions.

  The gaming system includes a display 54 of the pachinko machine 2 or a display 312 of the card unit 3 provided in at least one of the pachinko machine 2 and the card unit 3.

  As described in steps S121 to S123 in FIG. 105, steps S141 and S142 in FIG. 107, and steps S101, S102, and S104 in FIG. 108, the gaming system sets the gaming system to the manager mode for managers. Management mode switching units 802 and 902 for switching are provided.

  The gaming system includes display control units 801 and 901 that control display of the displays 312 and 54 such as the display effect control board 53 of the pachinko machine 2 or the display control unit 797 of the card unit 3.

  As described in steps S131 to S134 in FIG. 105, steps S151 to S154 in FIG. 107, and step S105 in FIG. 108, the display control units 801 and 901 have the pachinko machine 2 connected to the displays 312 and 54 in the administrator mode. The stored gaming machine information (for example, information on the left half of the stored information setting screen in FIG. 106) can be displayed, and the gaming device information stored in the card unit 3 (for example, the stored information in FIG. 106). Information on the right half of the setting screen) can be displayed.

  Thereby, in the administrator mode, not only gaming machine information but also gaming device information can be displayed on the display devices 312 and 54 provided in at least one of the pachinko machine 2 and the card unit 3. In one of the pachinko machine 2 and the card unit 3, not only the information on one side can be confirmed on the spot, but also the information on the other side can be confirmed together. As a result, it is possible to improve work efficiency such as confirmation work of the pachinko machine 2 and the card unit 3 by the administrator.

  Here, the display units 312 and 54 for displaying information may be provided in only one or both of the card unit 3 and the pachinko machine 2.

  The management mode switching units 802 and 902 are provided for only one of the pachinko machine 2 or the card unit 3, only a management device such as the hall management computer 1, all of the pachinko machine 2, the card unit 3 and the hall management computer 1, or What is necessary is just to make it provide in two of three persons.

  The operation on the management mode switching units 802 and 902 may be the operation of the setting key switch 1012 described above, insertion of a test card, or wireless or wired information from the administrator's mobile terminal. It may be an operation by input.

  (2) The pachinko machine 2 includes a connector 20 for connecting to the card unit 3 so as to be communicable. The pachinko machine 2 includes the display 54, the management mode switching unit 902, and the display control unit 901 described above. As described in steps S152 and S153 of FIG. 107, the pachinko machine 2 includes an information communication unit 904 that receives game device information stored in the card unit 3 from the card unit 3.

  Thereby, in the administrator mode, not only the gaming machine information but also the gaming device information can be displayed on the display 54 provided in the pachinko machine 2, so that the pachinko machine 2 side information on the pachinko machine 2 side can be displayed. As well as information on the card unit 3 side. As a result, it is possible to improve work efficiency such as confirmation work of the pachinko machine 2 and the card unit 3 by the administrator.

  (3) The card unit 3 includes a connector 380 for connecting to the pachinko machine 2 in a communicable manner. The card unit 3 includes the display 312, the management mode switching unit 802, and the display control unit 801 described above. As described in steps S132 and S133 in FIG. 105 and step S105 in FIG. 108, the card unit 3 includes an information communication unit 804 that receives gaming machine information stored in the pachinko machine 2 from the pachinko machine 2.

  As a result, in the manager mode, not only gaming device information but also gaming machine information can be displayed on the display 312 provided in the card unit 3, so that information on the card unit 3 side in the card unit 3 can be displayed. As well as information on the pachinko machine 2 side. As a result, it is possible to improve work efficiency such as confirmation work of the pachinko machine 2 and the card unit 3 by the administrator.

  (4) The pachinko machine 2 includes the connector 20 described above. The pachinko machine 2 manages the gaming machine information stored in the card unit 3 for the manager as in the process of transmitting information corresponding to the processes of steps S132 and S133 in FIG. 105 and step S105 in FIG. Information communication for transmitting gaming machine information to the card unit 3 so that the gaming machine information stored in the pachinko machine 2 can be displayed on the display 312 when the card unit 3 displays on the display 312 in the player mode Part 804.

  As a result, in the manager mode, not only gaming device information but also gaming machine information can be displayed on the display 312 provided in the card unit 3, so that information on the card unit 3 side in the card unit 3 can be displayed. As well as information on the pachinko machine 2 side. As a result, it is possible to improve work efficiency such as confirmation work of the pachinko machine 2 and the card unit 3 by the administrator.

  (5) The card unit 3 includes the connector 380 described above. The pachinko machine 2 stores the gaming machine information stored in the pachinko machine 2 in the manager mode for the manager in the manager mode as in the process of transmitting information corresponding to the processes of steps S152 and S153 in FIG. An information communication unit 904 that transmits game device information to the pachinko machine 2 is provided so that the game device information stored in the card unit 3 can be displayed on the display unit 54 when displayed.

  Thereby, in the administrator mode, not only the gaming machine information but also the gaming device information can be displayed on the display 2 provided in the pachinko machine 2, so that the pachinko machine 2 side information on the pachinko machine 2 side is displayed. As well as information on the card unit 3 side. As a result, it is possible to improve work efficiency such as confirmation work of the pachinko machine 2 and the card unit 3 by the administrator.

  (6) In the gaming system of (1) above, to the card unit 3 having the display 312 as in the process of transmitting information corresponding to the processes of steps S132 and S133 in FIG. 105 and step S105 in FIG. In order to transmit the gaming machine information, the information communication unit 904 provided in the pachinko machine 2 and the display 54 as in the process of transmitting information corresponding to the processes of steps S152 and S153 in FIG. In order to transmit game device information to the pachinko machine 2, at least one of information communication units 804 provided in the card unit 3 is further provided.

  As a result, the gaming machine information or gaming device information is directly transmitted from the pachinko machine 2 or the card unit 3, for example, once the gaming machine information is once taken from the pachinko machine 2 to another device. When the gaming machine information is stored in the card unit 3, or when the gaming machine information is once stored in the pachinko machine 2 after the gaming apparatus information is once taken from the card unit 3 to another device. In comparison, the latest information can be displayed on the display units 312 and 54.

  The information communication units 804 and 904 may transmit information when the mode is switched to the administrator mode, or the necessary information is generated when necessary information is generated regardless of whether or not the mode is switched to the manager mode. Information may be transmitted. In particular, when information is transmitted when the mode is switched to the administrator mode, the latest state of the information transmission source can be displayed by displaying the information on the display units 312 and 54 at the information receiving destination.

  (7) In the gaming system of (1) above, as shown in FIGS. 4 to 6, FIG. 116, FIG. 118, FIG. 119, FIG. In order to store information, an information storage unit 803 such as a RAM of the main control unit 323 provided in the card unit 3 having the display 312, and FIGS. 4 to 6, 116, 118, 119, 121 and 122, the RAM of the payout control unit 17 provided in the pachinko machine 2 having the display 54 is used to store the game device information when the game device information is received. The information storage unit 903 is further provided.

  Thus, by storing information in the information storage units 803 and 903 in advance, even when communication between the pachinko machine 2 and the card unit 3 is interrupted when the mode is switched to the administrator mode, the display units 312 and 54 Information on the other side can be displayed. As described in (6) and (7), the information may be transmitted at the time of switching to the administrator mode or may be transmitted in advance.

  Here, the information to be displayed in the administrator mode may be stored in both of the information storage units 803 and 903, or may be stored in only one, or both in the other. Information on the side may also be stored.

  (8) In the gaming system of (1), (6), and (7) above, the display control units 801 and 901 are displayed on the display unit as described in steps S151 to S154 in FIG. 107 and the stored information setting screen in FIG. Of the gaming machine information transmitted to the card unit 3 from the pachinko machine 2 having 54, the control for displaying the information that could not be received by the card unit 3 on the display 54, and steps S131 to S134 in FIG. As described in step S105 of 108 and the stored information setting screen of FIG. 106, the reception by the pachinko machine 2 of the gaming apparatus information transmitted from the card unit 3 having the display 312 to the pachinko machine 2 could not be confirmed. At least one of the controls for displaying information on the display 312 can be executed.

  As a result, the administrator can grasp information that has not been confirmed to be received on the other side from the information transmitted from one side to the other side. Therefore, the administrator can guarantee the player based on the information or store the data on the other side. It can be corrected.

  (9) In the gaming system of (1), (6), (7), and (8) above, as described in step S131 in FIG. 105, step S151 in FIG. 107, and step S102 in FIG. 108, the pachinko machine 2 and the card Correspondence relationship determination units 805 and 806 for determining a change in the correspondence relationship with the unit 3 are further provided. As described in step S133 in FIG. 105, step S153 in FIG. 107, and step S105 in FIG. 108, the display control units 801 and 901 determine that the correspondence relationship has been changed by the correspondence relationship determination units 805 and 806. The display units 312 and 54 display the gaming machine information of the connection pachinko machine 2A before exchange corresponding to the change of the correspondence relationship or the game apparatus information of the connection card unit 3A before exchange corresponding to the change of the correspondence relationship. Can be displayed.

  As a result, even when the correspondence between the pachinko machine 2 and the card unit 3 is changed due to a failure of the pachinko machine 2 or the card unit 3, the connection pachinko machine 2A before replacement corresponding to the change was made. Alternatively, by confirming the information of the pre-replacement connection card unit 3A with the indicators 312, 54, the player can be guaranteed based on the information, or the data of the pachinko machine 2 or card unit 3 whose correspondence relationship has been changed can be obtained. It can be adjusted.

  (10) The pachinko machine of the above (2) further includes a setting key switch 1012 for switching to the administrator mode and a power supply board 101 that generates a switching signal in accordance with an operation of the setting key switch 1012.

Thereby, it becomes possible to switch to the administrator mode on the pachinko machine 2 side.
(11) In the pachinko machine 2 of the above (2) and (10), the P communication control unit that receives a switching signal from the outside of the pachinko machine 2 (for example, from the hall management computer 1 and the remote controller via the card unit 3). 81 is further provided.

  As a result, the pachinko machine 2 is switched to the manager mode based on a switching signal from the outside. For example, in the management device outside the pachinko machine 2 (server such as the hall management computer 1), the pachinko machine 2 is switched to the manager mode. It becomes possible. Alternatively, it is possible to switch to the administrator mode by inputting a switching signal to the pachinko machine 2 from a portable management terminal such as a remote controller carried by the administrator.

  (12) The card unit 3 of (3) further includes a card reader / writer 327 that receives a test card for switching to the administrator mode and generates a switching signal in response to a test card receiving operation.

This makes it possible to switch to the administrator mode on the card unit 3 side.
(13) The card unit 3 of (3) and (12) above further includes an external communication unit 324 or an IR photosensitive unit 320 that receives a switching signal from the outside of the card unit 3.

  As a result, the card unit 3 is switched to the manager mode based on a switching signal from the outside. For example, in the server such as the hall management computer 1 outside the card unit 3, the card unit 3 can be switched to the manager mode. Become. Alternatively, it is possible to switch to the manager mode by inputting a switching signal to the card unit 3 from a portable management terminal such as a remote controller carried by the manager.

[Description of other examples of rear side configuration]
FIG. 110 is a diagram showing another example of the back side configuration of the pachinko machine 2 shown in FIG. Here, the differences will be mainly described.

  Referring to FIG. 110, various winning ball detection switches 700 a to 700 h that detect winning balls that are won in various winning ports provided in game area 27 are provided, and only the out balls collected from out port 145 are detected. An out-ball detection switch 701 is provided. The merge path detection switch 32 is provided in the merge passage path 702 where the out balls detected by the out ball detection switch 701 and the prize balls detected by the various prize ball detection switches 700a to 700h merge and pass. Yes.

  Of these various detection switches, only the merging path detection switch 32 is constituted by an optical sensor, and the other detection switches are constituted by proximity switches. By configuring the various detection switches in this way, when a so-called radio wave is generated and an illegal radio wave is transmitted and an illegal act of illegally outputting a winning ball detection signal from various winning ball detection switches occurs, the proximity switch is Although a detection signal is output in response to the illegal radio wave, only the junction path detection switch 32 is constituted by an optical sensor, and therefore does not output any detection signal without responding to the illegal radio wave.

  If it is normal, the total number of balls detected by the various detection switches constituted by the proximity switches should be the number of balls detected by the merge path detection switch. However, when a radio wave that transmits an illegal radio wave occurs, the detection signal from the detection switch constituted by other proximity switches is output without outputting the detection signal from the junction path detection switch 32. The ball detection total by the various detection switches configured by the proximity switches and the number of balls detected by the merge path detection switch 32 do not match. Based on the occurrence of such a mismatch phenomenon, it can be determined that an illegal act has occurred.

  For this purpose, the payout controller 17 receives the detection signals from the various winning ball detection switches 700a to 700h, the detection signal from the out ball detection switch 701, the detection signal from the foul ball detection switch 33, and the detection signal from the merge path detection switch 32. Then, the total number of balls detected by the winning ball detection switches 700a to 700h and the out ball detection switch 701 configured by proximity switches is calculated, and whether the total and the number of balls detected by the merging path detection switch 32 coincide with each other. Is determined. If it is determined that there is a predetermined number or more of gaps, the payout control unit 17 determines that an abnormality has occurred, transmits an abnormality display command to the display effect control board 53, and displays the display effect control board 53. Displays an abnormality on the display 54.

  As yet another example, the joining path detection switch 32 shown in FIG. 110 is provided at a position below the joining point where the foul balls detected by the foul ball detecting switch 33 join the joining passage path 702, and You may comprise so that the sum of an out ball | bowl and a foul ball | bowl may be detected by the joining path | route detection switch 32. FIG. In that case, the total number of balls detected by the various detection switches constituted by proximity switches, that is, the winning ball detection switches 700a to 700h, the out ball detection switch 701, and the foul ball detection switch 33 is calculated, and the total and the joining path are calculated. It is determined whether or not the number of balls detected by the detection switch 32 matches. If it is determined that there is a predetermined number or more of gaps, the payout control unit 17 determines that an abnormality has occurred, transmits an abnormality display command to the display effect control board 53, and displays the display effect control board 53. Displays an abnormality on the display 54.

  As yet another example, the joining path detection switch 32 shown in FIG. 110 is left in its position, and is separated from the joining point where the foul balls detected by the foul ball detection switch 33 join the joining passage path 702. May be configured such that the total of winning balls, out balls, and foul balls is detected by another merging path detection switch. In that case, the total number of balls detected by the various detection switches constituted by proximity switches, that is, the winning ball detection switches 700a to 700h, the out ball detection switch 701, and the foul ball detection switch 33 is calculated, and the total and the joining path are calculated. It is determined whether or not the number of balls detected by the detection switch 32 matches. If it is determined that there is a predetermined number or more of gaps, the payout control unit 17 determines that an abnormality has occurred, transmits an abnormality display command to the display effect control board 53, and displays the display effect control board 53. Displays an abnormality on the display 54. In addition, the above-described abnormality determination is performed by determining whether the total number of balls detected by the winning ball detection switches 700a to 700h and the out ball detection switch 701 matches the number of balls detected by the joining path detection switch 32 or not. Run in parallel.

[Description of other control of payout control unit]
Next, another control of the payout control unit 17 will be described based on FIG.

  FIG. 111 (a) shows the launch and lift control command output processing executed by the payout control unit 17. In step SA (hereinafter simply referred to as SA) 1, it is determined whether or not the game prohibition flag is ON. The game prohibition flag is turned on when an operation instruction including a prohibition request from the CU is received, and turned off when a game permission request is received. If NO is determined in SA1, processing for outputting a firing permission signal to the firing control board 31 is performed in SA2. Upon receipt of this, when the touch ring signal is input by the player operating the hitting operation handle 25, the launch control board 31 drives and controls the hitting motor 18 to hit the hit ball.

  A signal of the launch motor origin sensor is input as the hitting ball launch motor 18 is driven. If there is an input of the signal, a determination of YES is made in SA3, and control for driving the lifting motor 40 is performed in SA4.

  On the other hand, when the game prohibition flag is ON, a process of outputting a launch control signal including a launch prohibition signal to the launch control board 31 is performed at SA5. Upon receiving this, the launch control board 31 stops driving the hit ball launch motor 18 and puts it into a shot stop state where no hit ball is fired.

  FIG. 111 (b) shows error processing. In SA10, it is determined whether or not the game prohibition flag is ON. If YES is determined by SA10, it is determined whether or not a winning detection signal is input. If a detection signal is output from any of the winning ball detection switches 700 a to 700 h, the signal is input to the main control board 16, and the detection signal is input from the main control board 16 to the payout control unit 17. In SA11, it is determined whether or not the detection signal is input. More specifically, after receiving an operation instruction including a prohibition request from the CU, the floating ball processing waiting time (10 When the winning ball detection signal is input after the elapse of (second), a determination of YES is made by SA11.

  At this time, all the floating balls in the game area 27 should have been collected, and the fact that the winning ball detection signal has been input nevertheless means that a so-called radio wave attack that illegally generates a winning due to an illegal radio wave. There is a risk. In this case, the control proceeds to SA12, and an error notification signal corresponding to the type of error is output.

  On the other hand, when the game prohibition flag is OFF, it is determined by SA13 whether or not a firing motor origin sensor signal has been input. If not, that is, if the firing motor 18 is not driven, the lifting motor 40 should also be stopped (see SA3 and SA4). Nevertheless, if a detection signal is input from the cue detection switch (upper) 41a or the cue detection switch (lower) 41b, a determination of YES is made by SA14, and according to the type of error by SA12. An error notification signal is output.

  Specifically, the output of the error notification signal corresponding to the type of error is a signal for performing abnormality display by the indicator 54, the point of the abnormality notification lamp (or blinking) or the abnormality notification by sound from the speaker. The control part 17 outputs. For example, in the case of an abnormality determined to be YES by SA14, an abnormality display such as “the lifting device has operated abnormally” on the display 54, a point of the lifting device abnormality notification lamp (or blinking), or “ The payout control unit 17 outputs a signal to notify the abnormality from the speaker by a sound such as “the feeding device has abnormally operated”.

  When the firing motor 18 is not driven, that is, when a ball is not being fired, an error is notified when the lifting of the pachinko ball is detected by the ball raising detection switch (upper) 41a or the ball raising detection switch (lower) 41b. The reason is that if pachinko balls continue to be fed and supplied even though they are not being hit, there is a risk of clogging in the passage and failure may occur. This is so that it can be dealt with.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, since the number of game balls is managed on the CU side, there is no need to provide the management function on the P platform side, and the cost of the P platform is reduced accordingly. It can be suppressed as much as possible. In particular, the P machine has a short exchange cycle in the game hall in order to be able to provide a more interesting game as soon as possible, and tends to be exchanged early in units of several months if it is one year or early. . In addition, as new stands are being developed one after another, which quickly incorporates rapidly changing player preferences, there is also a tendency for the base exchange cycle in the amusement hall to be accelerated.

  On the other hand, CUs are rarely replaced from the viewpoint of preference, and in general, equipment replacement is performed in response to a failure. It is what is used. If no failure occurs, replacement is not performed for several years.

  For this reason, there is an advantage that the running cost of the game hall where the P units are introduced can be reduced by providing the management function of the game balls not on the P units side but on the CU side to suppress the cost of the P units.

[Description of distribution of authentication information]
FIG. 112 is a diagram illustrating an entire system for distributing authentication information including an authentication key and a unique ID (also referred to as SID) for ensuring security.

  In the amusement hall, a host server 801, a card unit 3, and a pachinko machine 2 are installed. The card unit 3 and the pachinko machine 2 perform encryption communication with each other. The card unit 3 and the upper server 801 are also performing encrypted communication with each other. Further, encryption communication is also performed between the main control unit 323 and the CU communication control unit 80 provided in the card unit 3. Further, cryptographic communication is also performed between the payout control unit 17 and the main control board 16 in the LSI 799 configured with one chip provided in the pachinko machine 2 and between the main control board 16 and the key management server 803. Yes. Further, intra-chip communication is performed between the P-unit communication control unit 81 and the payout control unit 17.

  The host server 801 is a server designed and manufactured by the manufacturer of the card unit 3, and has a function of managing sales in the case where a player inserts a card into the card unit 3 and plays a game using, for example, a prepaid balance. have. A key management server 800 that can communicate with the host server 801 is installed outside the game hall. This key management server 800 is also designed and manufactured by the manufacturer of the card unit 3.

  A key management server 803 that can communicate with the main control board 16 is installed outside the game hall. This key management server 803 is designed and manufactured by the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 2.

  The CU communication control unit 80 and the P-unit communication control unit 81 store a dedicated program common to each company regardless of the card unit manufacturer or the pachinko machine manufacturer, and the communication control is performed according to the program. As a result, the specifications of the communication interface between the main control unit 323 and the CU communication control unit 80 in order to enable communication between the main control unit 323 and the CU communication control unit 80 in any card unit manufacturer. Is open to each card unit manufacturer. Except between the main control unit 323 and the CU communication control unit 80, the specification of the communication interface is not disclosed. On the other hand, in the case of communication between the P-unit communication control unit 81 and the payout control unit 17, both are provided in the one-chip microcomputer and communication is performed within the chip. Need not be published.

  Key management server 800 and host server 801, host server 801 and main control unit 323, main control unit 323 and CU communication control unit 80, CU communication control unit 80 and P unit communication control unit 81, payout control unit 17 and main control board 16 and the main control board 16 and the key management server 803 mutually authenticate using the authentication information, and determine whether or not the counterpart devices are appropriate. Then, communication is performed with each other on the condition that an authentication result that is appropriate is obtained. Distribution of authentication information used for mutual authentication between the main control unit 323 and the CU communication control unit 80 will be described below with reference to FIG.

  The SID and authentication key of the CU communication control unit are transmitted from the key management server 800 in FIG. 112 to the main control unit 323 of the card unit 3 and stored in the EEPROM 808. Specifically, referring to FIG. 112, key management server 800 stores the SID and authentication key of the CU communication control unit in association with each SID of the main control unit. As described above, the card unit manufacturer stores the SID of the main control unit in the EEPROM 808 in the manufacturing stage of the card unit 3, and the SID of the CU communication control unit corresponding to the SID of the main control unit, that is, already stored in the ROM 809. The SID of the CU communication control unit and the authentication key stored in the EEPROM 813 are transmitted to the key management server 800 together with the SID of the main control unit stored in the EEPROM 808. Then, the key management server 800 receives it, and stores the SID and authentication key of the CU communication control unit transmitted in association with the transmitted SID of the main control unit. In this way, the key management server 800 constructs a database of authentication information for a pair consisting of the SID of the main control unit, the SID of the CU communication control unit corresponding thereto, and the authentication key that is a common key.

  As described above, the SID of the main control unit itself is authentication information, but is transmitted to the key management server 800 to identify the corresponding CU communication control unit SID and authentication key in the key management server 800. It is also used for authentication information identification information.

  When the card unit 3 is first turned on after the card unit 3 is installed in the amusement hall, the main control unit 323 manages the SID of the main control unit stored in the EEPROM 808 via the host server 801 and manages the key. Send to server 800. The key management server 800 searches for the SID and authentication key of the CU communication control unit 80 stored in association with the received SID of the main control unit 323, and searches for the SID and authentication of the searched CU communication control unit 80. The key is returned to the main control unit 323 via the host server 801. The main control unit 323 receives this, and stores the received SID and authentication key of the CU communication control unit 80 in the EEPROM 808. As a result, the same SID (pair) as the SID of the CU communication control unit 8 stored in the ROM 809 of the CU communication control unit 80 is stored in the EEPROM 808 and the same as the authentication key stored in the EEPROM 813 (pair). An authentication key is stored in EEPROM 808.

  Whether the SID of the CU communication control unit 80 stored in the ROM 809 is correct between the main control unit 323 and the CU communication control unit 80 using the SID of the CU communication control unit 80 stored in the EEPROM 808 The CU communication control unit 80 determines whether or not the CU communication control unit 80 is appropriate, and performs serial ID authentication and stores it in the EEPROM 808 using the SID of the main control unit stored in the EEPROM 813. BB serial ID authentication is performed to determine whether the SID of the main control unit 323 is correct and determine whether the main control unit 323 is correct. Further, whether or not a common authentication key is stored between the main control unit 323 and the CU communication control unit 80 is determined by using an authentication key stored in the EEPROM 808 and an authentication key stored in the EEPROM 813. Device authentication is performed by using and determining.

  Next, the reason why the key management server 800 is used as the distribution source for distributing the SID and authentication key of the CU communication control unit 80, which is a part of the authentication information, to the main control unit 323 will be described.

  For example, referring to FIG. 7 described above, the SID of the CU communication control unit 80 is stored in the ROM 804 in the main control unit 323 as well as the SID of the CU communication control unit 80 is stored in the ROM 809 during chip manufacture. When stored, the memory chip storing the SID of the same CU communication control unit 80 must be mounted on both the main control unit 323 and the CU communication control unit 80, and in the memory chip mounting process, A pair of memory chips must be mounted, and the mounting process becomes inconvenient.

  Therefore, for example, one of the pair authentication information, that is, the SID of the CU communication control unit 80, the SID of the main control unit 323, and the authentication key are stored in the CU communication control unit 80, and the card unit 3 is manufactured. At the time of installation or when the power is turned on for the first time after being installed in the amusement hall, one authentication information stored in the CU communication control unit 80 is transmitted to the main control unit 323. A method of storing the transmitted authentication information, that is, the SID of the main control unit, the SID of the CU communication control unit, and the authentication key by using the EEPROM 808 can be considered.

  However, in the case of this method, the authentication information is transmitted from the CU communication control unit 80 to the main control unit 323, so that there is a risk of leakage of the authentication information during that time, resulting in a security problem. In particular, between the main control unit 323 and the CU communication control unit 80, as described above, the communication interface specification is disclosed, and the authentication information is transmitted according to the disclosed communication interface specification. Accordingly, there is a disadvantage that the risk of leakage of authentication information increases. Moreover, the main control unit 323 and the CU communication control unit 80 are devices located in a local area as compared with, for example, the upper server 801 and the key management server 800, and the number thereof is also higher than that of the upper server 801 and the key management server 800. For this reason, there is a possibility that a person who attempts fraud easily allows an unauthorized person to intercept and eavesdrop on authentication information.

  Further, when the authentication information is transmitted from the CU communication control unit 80 to the main control unit 323, the following inconvenience occurs. For example, the CU communication control unit 80 is replaced with an illegally manufactured CU communication control unit 80, and then the authentication information is transmitted from the CU communication control unit 80 to the main control unit 323, and the main control unit 323 stores the authentication information. In the case where an illegal act is performed, in the mutual authentication between the main control unit 323 and the CU communication control unit 80, it is not determined that there is any abnormality, and the CU communication control unit 80 is illegal. Can not be found. In other words, in the case of a system in which authentication information is supplied from one side that performs mutual authentication to the other side that performs mutual authentication, one side that performs mutual authentication is replaced with an unauthorized one, and then the fraudulent act is performed by supplying authentication information. This creates a security hole that allows you to forgive.

  In order to prevent the above inconveniences, a download method is adopted in which the authentication information stored in the upper server 801 is downloaded and stored in the main control unit 323.

  Also, for the authentication information used for mutual authentication between the main control board 16 and the payout control unit 17 in the pachinko machine 2, the authentication information stored in the key management server 803 is downloaded as described above. Then, a download method of storing in the main control board 16 is adopted.

  Specifically, although not shown, in the ROM chip manufacturing stage of the payout control unit 17, the SID of the payout control unit 17 is stored in the ROM, and the main control board is used by a ROM writer or the like when the pachinko machine is manufactured. And the authentication key are written in the EEPROM of the payout control unit 17, and the SID of the main control board is written in the EEPROM of the main control board 16 by a ROM writer or the like when the pachinko machine is manufactured.

  In this state, when the power is turned on for the first time after the pachinko machine 2 is installed in the game hall, the SID of the main control board stored in the EEPROM of the main control board 16 is read from the I / O port of the main control board 16. Transmit to the key management server 803. The key management server 803 stores the SID and authentication key of the payout control unit in association with the SID of each main control board in a plurality of pachinko machines. The key management server 803 searches for the SID and authentication key of the payout control unit corresponding to the SID of the main control board transmitted from the main control board 16, and uses the searched SID and authentication key of the payout control unit. It returns to the main control board 16. The main control board 16 stores the returned SID of the payout control unit and the authentication key in the EEPROM.

  Further, in the authentication information used for mutual authentication between the main control board 116 and the payout control unit 117 in the slot machine 2S (FIGS. 113 to 120), which will be described later, the key management server 803 also stores information similar to the above. A download method is employed in which the stored authentication information is downloaded and stored in the main control board 116.

  Specifically, although not shown, in the ROM chip manufacturing stage of the payout control unit 117, the SID of the payout control unit 117 is stored in the ROM, and the main control board is read by a ROM writer or the like when the slot machine is manufactured. The SID and the authentication key are written into the EEPROM of the payout control unit 117, and the SID of the main control board is written into the EEPROM of the main control board 116 by a ROM writer or the like when the slot machine is manufactured.

  In this state, when the power is turned on for the first time after the slot machine 2S is installed in the amusement hall, the SID of the main control board stored in the EEPROM of the main control board 116 is read from the I / O port of the main control board 116. Transmit to the key management server 803. The key management server 803 stores the SID and authentication key of the payout control unit in association with the SID of each main control board in the plurality of slot machines. The key management server 803 searches for the SID and authentication key of the payout control unit corresponding to the SID of the main control board transmitted from the main control board 116, and uses the searched SID and authentication key of the payout control unit. It returns to the main control board 116. The main control board 116 stores the returned SID and authentication key of the payout control unit in the EEPROM.

[Embodiment for slot machine]
Next, a slot machine will be described as another example of the gaming machine. First, referring to FIG. 113, a slot machine (hereinafter sometimes abbreviated as “S”) 2S is attached to each of the game islands (not shown) arranged in the game hall, and the slots A card unit 3 as an example of a gaming device is installed in a one-to-one correspondence with the slot machine 2S at a side position on a predetermined side of the machine 2S.

  The card unit 3 is issued to a visitor card having a prepaid function, which is a game recording medium issued to a general player who has not registered as a member, or a member player who has registered as a member in the game hall. By accepting a membership card, which is a game recording medium, and converting the game value of the player specified by the record information of the card into a score, the corresponding slot machine 2S exchanges the score for the score It has a function to set a game so that it can be played.

  Each of the visitor card and the membership card has a function of recording the card balance and the points earned by the game so as to be specified by the record information of the card. The difference in the handling of points between membership cards and visitor cards is that the card that can use the medal saving function to save the points earned by the membership card cumulatively even after the game day, while the visitor card Is a card that cannot use the function. Visitor cards and membership cards are composed of IC cards. Hereinafter, both the membership card and the visitor card are also simply referred to as “cards”.

  In the case of the slot machine 2S, the replay button 319 is for executing a replay game using the membership card ID recorded on the membership card and the number of medals specified by the membership ID when the membership card is received. It is a button.

  In the case of the slot machine 2S, the lending button 321 is a button for performing an operation for withdrawing the prepaid balance specified by the inserted card and securing the points used for the game.

  When the replay button 319 is operated, if a score acquired by the player is recorded on the inserted card, a predetermined number of points will be deducted from that score and used for the game. When the inserted card is a membership card and the number of points is not recorded, and a stored medal is recorded in the hall management computer 1 or the like, a predetermined number of points are calculated from the stored medal. Will be withdrawn and given points for use in games.

  The “sold medal” is a point deposited in a game hall, and is generally managed by the hall management computer 1 or other management computer installed in the game hall. On the other hand, the “score” is the number of points owned by the player as a result of the player playing the game with the gaming machine, and has not yet been deposited in the game hall.

  The points may be managed by a management device for managing the number of points set in the game hall. In short, the difference between "save medal" and "scoring" is the point that the medal operation for depositing into the amusement hall has been performed and it has been deposited in the amusement hall, or is still deposited in the amusement hall. It is a point of whether it is a point of the stage not entered.

  In this embodiment, the stored medal data is not recorded directly on the member card, but stored in the upper server such as the hall management computer 1 in association with the member card number so that the corresponding stored medal can be searched based on the member card number. It is configured. On the other hand, the score is recorded directly on the card.

  As a method of recording the card balance or the score so that the membership card or visitor card can be specified, (a) record the card balance or score on the card itself, (b) record the card balance or score on the card itself. Without storing, the card balance or score corresponding to the ID is stored in a computer such as the hall management computer 1 in association with the ID recorded in the card unit. (C) The card balance or score is recorded on the card itself. In addition, a method of storing a card balance or a point corresponding to the ID in a computer such as the hall management computer 1 in association with the ID of the card is conceivable, and any method is adopted in this embodiment. May be.

  The banknote inserted into the banknote insertion slot 302 is taken in by the currency discriminator 344, and its authenticity and banknote type are identified. The player is given points according to the bill amount.

  In the following description, giving the player the points to be used for the game by withdrawing the prepaid balance recorded on the card is referred to as “lending of points”.

  The points given by operating the replay button 319 or the lending button 321 and the points given by inserting the bill into the bill insertion slot 302 are collectively stored in the card unit 3. The score is displayed on the display 312. Note that a dedicated indicator for displaying the points may be provided in the card unit 3. The card unit 3 subtracts and updates the points stored for the number of bets set in the slot machine 2S, and adds and updates the points stored for the winning equivalent generated in the slot machine 2S.

  The slot machine 2S sets the number of bets by using the score, and the score is added and updated according to the winning. For this reason, when playing a game in the slot machine 2S, a medal insertion operation is not necessary. Therefore, the slot machine 2S is not provided with a medal slot and a medal payout slot.

  The exterior of the slot machine 2S is composed of a housing 2aS whose front surface is open, and a front door 2bS that is pivotally supported at a side end of the housing 2aS.

  Inside the housing 2aS of the slot machine 2S, reels 2L, 2C, and 2R (hereinafter also referred to as a left reel, a middle reel, and a right reel) in which a plurality of types of symbols are arranged on the outer periphery are juxtaposed in a horizontal direction. As shown in FIG. 113, three consecutive symbols out of the symbols arranged on the reels 2L, 2C, 2R are arranged so as to be seen from the see-through window 10 provided on the front door 2bS.

  As shown in FIG. 115, on the outer peripheries of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R, “black 7”, “net 7 (shaded 7 in the figure)”, “white 7”, “BAR”, “replay”, A plurality of identifiable symbols such as “watermelon”, “black cherry”, “white cherry”, “bell”, and “orange” are drawn in a predetermined order, 21 pieces each. The symbols drawn on the outer peripheries of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are displayed in upper, middle, and lower three stages in the see-through window 10, respectively.

  Each reel 2L, 2C, 2R is provided correspondingly and rotated by reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R (see FIG. 116), so that the symbols of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R are continuously provided in the see-through window 10. In addition to being displayed while changing, by stopping the rotation of each of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, three continuous symbols are derived and displayed on the fluoroscopic window 10 as display results.

  Inside the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, reel sensors 33L, 33C, and 33R (see FIG. 116) that detect a reference position for each of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R and the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R from the back A reel LED (not shown) for irradiation is provided. The reel LED is composed of 12 LEDs corresponding to three consecutive symbols of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, and each symbol can be irradiated independently.

  A display area 51a of the liquid crystal display 510 (see FIG. 116) is arranged at a position on the front side (player side) of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R of the front door 2bS. In the display area 51a, points, bets set in the game, and various other images (see FIG. 83 or FIGS. 87 to 104) are displayed.

  On the front side (front side in FIG. 113) of the liquid crystal display 510, an instruction (for example, touch operation) from the player on the display surface is detected and the position (for example, the position where the touch operation is performed) is specified. A touch panel (not shown) is provided.

  In addition, the front door 2bS has a single BET switch 500 that is operated when setting the number of bets using “holding points = 1” corresponding to one medal, and the maximum determined according to the gaming state. When setting the number of bets (for example, “score = 3” for RT (Replay Time) where the probability of winning the replay and the normal game state before the occurrence of BB is high, and “score = 2” for bonus) MAXBET switch 600 operated at the same time, start switch 7 operated when starting the game, stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R operated when stopping the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R, chance button 58, A jog dial 59 is also provided.

  The jog dial 59 selects and designates various display items (icons) and the like in the display area 51a when the player rotates. When the player rotates the jog dial 59, the display items to be selected among the various display items displayed on the display area 51a are sequentially moved and displayed. The player operates the jog dial 59 to rotate. When the player presses the chance button 58 after designating the display item to be selected, the selected display item is designated and the player's selection is confirmed.

  In addition, the front door 2bS is provided with a game auxiliary display 120 for displaying an error code and the like, and a payout display 130 for displaying the number of points awarded by the occurrence of winning.

  Further, the front door 2bS has a start valid LED 180 for notifying by lighting that the game start operation by the operation of the start switch 7 is effective, a weight (the rotation of the reel since a certain period has not elapsed since the start of the previous game). A waiting LED 19 for notifying that a replay game is in progress and a replaying LED 200 for notifying that a replay game is in progress are provided.

  When a game is played in the slot machine 2S, first, a bet amount is set using the points secured by using the card unit 3. In order to use the holding point, the single BET switch 500 or the MAX BET switch 600 may be operated. When the bet number is set, the pay line determined according to the bet number and the game state is valid among the pay lines L1 to L5 (see FIG. 113), and the operation of the start switch 7 is effective, that is, the game Is ready to start.

  The winning line is a line that is set to determine whether a combination of symbols displayed on the perspective windows 10 of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is a winning symbol combination. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 113, the winning line L1 set across the symbols arranged in the middle stage of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R and the symbols arranged in the upper stage of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R are displayed. The winning line L2 set across the reels 2L, 2C and 2R, the winning line L3 set over the lower symbols, the upper stage of the reel 2L, the middle stage of the reel 2C, the lower stage of the reel 2R, that is, lower right There are 5 types of winning lines L4 set across straddling symbols, the lower line of reel 2L, the middle part of reel 2C, the upper part of reel 2R, that is, the winning line L5 set straddling the symbols lined up to the right It is defined as a line. The winning line is not limited to the lines indicated by L1 to L5 but may be other lines.

  When the start switch 7 is operated in a state where the game can be started, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R rotate, and the symbols of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R continuously vary. When any one of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is operated in this state, the rotation of the corresponding reels 2L, 2C, 2R is stopped, and the display result is derived and displayed on the fluoroscopic window 10.

  When one of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R is stopped, one game is completed, and a predetermined symbol combination (hereinafter also referred to as a role) is set on any of the activated pay lines L1 to L5. When the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are stopped as a result of display, a prize is generated, and a score determined according to the prize is awarded to the player.

  In the slot machine 2S according to the present embodiment, after the game is started and the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R rotate and the symbols start to change, any of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R When operated, the reels corresponding to the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R stop rotating and the symbols are stopped and displayed. The maximum stop delay time from the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R to the stop of the rotation of the corresponding reels 2L, 2C, 2R is 190 ms (milliseconds).

  Of the three reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, the first stop reel is called the first stop reel, the second stop reel is called the second stop reel, and the last stop reel is called the third stop reel. This reel stop operation is referred to as a first stop operation, a second stop operation, and a third stop operation.

  The reels 2L, 2C and 2R rotate 80 times per minute, and 80 × 21 (the number of symbols per reel) = 1680 frames, so the maximum of 4 symbols is drawn in 190 ms. Will be able to. In other words, the symbols that can be selected as the stop symbols are the symbols that are displayed when the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are operated, and the symbols that are four frames ahead of them, for a total of five symbols.

  For this reason, for example, when any of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is operated and the symbol displayed on the lower stage of the reel corresponding to the stop switch is used as a reference, the symbol from the symbol to four frames ahead Since the symbols can be displayed in the lower row, as a result, the symbols from the symbol to six frames ahead can be displayed in the upper row. That is, in each of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, when any one of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is operated, within 7 frames including the symbols displayed on the lower row of the reel corresponding to the stop switch. The arranged symbols can be drawn and stopped on the winning line. Such reel control is referred to as pull-in control.

  Next, referring to FIG. 114, in the slot machine 2S, a front door 2bS is provided to the main body frame 2a so as to be openable and closable around the left edge thereof as a swing center.

  A pair of upper and lower engaging protrusions 6aS and 6bS are provided in the vicinity of the edge of the front door 2bS opposite to the swing center. The engaging protrusions 6aS and 6bS are pressed downward by a spring (not shown). On the other hand, engagement receiving pieces 7aS and 7bS are provided at positions of the main body frame 2aS facing the engagement protrusions 6aS and 6bS. When the opened front door 2bS is pressed against the main body frame 2aS, the engaging protrusions 6aS, 6bS get over the engaging receiving pieces 7aS, 7bS, and the engaging protrusions 6aS, 6bS are moved downward by the biasing force of the spring in the state of getting over. Move and become locked.

  A front door opening solenoid 110 (see FIG. 116) is provided on the back surface side of the front door 2bS. When the front door opening solenoid 110 is excited, a pair of upper and lower engagements against the spring biasing force. The mating projections 6aS and 6bS are pushed upward, and as a result, the engagement projections 6aS and 6bS are disengaged from the engagement receiving pieces 7aS and 7bS to be unlocked, and the front door 2bS is opened.

  A front door closing detector 112 (see FIG. 116) is provided at a position in contact with the front door 2bS in the upper part of the main body frame 2aS, and the front door 2bS is pressed against the main body frame 2aS to be locked. Detected.

  Next, an outline of a control circuit for the card unit 3 and the slot machine 2S will be described with reference to FIG. The card unit 3 is provided with a main control unit 323 composed of a microcomputer or the like. The main control unit 323 includes a CPU (Central Processing Unit) as a control center, a ROM (Read Only Memory) storing a program for operating the CPU and control data, and a RAM (RAM) functioning as a work area of the CPU. Random Access Memory) and an input / output interface for maintaining signal consistency with peripheral devices.

  The main control unit 323 is provided with an external communication unit 324 for communicating with the hall management computer 1 and the like, and performs communication via the payout control unit 117 of the slot machine 2S and the S communication control unit 82. A CU communication control unit 80 is provided for this purpose. The card unit 3 is provided with a connector 330 for connection to the slot machine 2S side, and the slot machine 2S is provided with a connector 220 for connection to the card unit 3 side. The CU communication control unit 80 and the S unit communication control unit 82 are communicably connected via the connectors 330 and 220 and connection wiring.

  The currency identifier 344 identifies the authenticity and type of the bill, and the identification result signal is input to the main control unit 323. When the IR photosensitive unit 320 receives infrared rays emitted from a remote controller owned by a game attendant, the received light signal is input to the main control unit 323. The card reader / writer 327 reads the information recorded on the inserted card, and the read information is input to the main control unit 323 and written to the card reader / writer 327 from the main control unit 323. When data is transmitted, the card reader / writer 327 writes the data to the inserted card.

  Display data such as the balance or the number of points is output from the main control unit 323 to the display 312, and the display 312 displays the output display data. Further, when the player operates a touch panel provided on the surface of the display 312, the operation signal is input to the main control unit 323. When the player operates the lending button 321, the operation signal is input to the main control unit 323. When the player operates the replay button 319, the operation signal is input to the main control unit 323. When the player operates the return button 322, the operation signal is input to the main control unit 323.

  The slot machine 2S is electrically connected to a main control board 116 that controls the progress of the game of the slot machine 2S (game control) and a payout control unit 117 that transmits information about points and the like to the card unit 3. It is provided in the state. Furthermore, the slot machine 2S is provided with an effect control board 90 electrically connected to the payout control unit 117 and an effect ROM board 92 electrically connected to the effect control board 90. The slot machine 2S is provided with a power supply board 102.

  On the main control board 116 is mounted a main control unit 41 constituted by a game control microcomputer. The main control unit 41 includes a CPU (Central Processing Unit) as a control center, a ROM (Read Only Memory) that stores programs and control data for operating the CPU, and a RAM (Random) that functions as a work area of the CPU. Access Memory), and an input / output interface for maintaining signal consistency with peripheral devices.

  The main control unit 41 includes a random number generation circuit that generates a predetermined range of random numbers, a sampling circuit that acquires random numbers from the random number generation circuit, and the like. The main control unit 41 performs an internal lottery for a winning combination using the random number acquired from the random number generation circuit.

  The main control board 116 has a single BET switch 500, a MAXBET switch 600, a start switch 7, stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, a game auxiliary display 120, a payout display 130, a start valid LED 180, a waiting LED 19, and a replaying. The LED 200, reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R, and reel sensors 33L, 33C, 33R are connected.

  The main control board 116 detects the start operation after setting the bet amount, starts variable display devices (reels 2L, 2C, 2R), draws the results of one game, and stops each reel in response to the stop operation. Let

  On the front face of a power supply box (not shown), a setting key switch 1022 for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state when the power is turned on (starting up), in order to cancel an error state or a stop state in a normal state. Reset / setting switch 1023 that functions as a setting switch for changing the setting value of a winning probability (outtake rate) of internal lottery to be described later in the setting change state, when the power is turned ON / OFF A power switch 1021 is provided to be operated.

  The power supply board 102 generates drive power for the electrical components that constitute the slot machine 2S and supplies the drive power to each unit. The power supply board 101 is supplied with AC100V power from the outside, and a DC voltage necessary for driving the electrical components constituting the slot machine 2S is generated from the AC100V power supply.

  Further, the setting key switch 1022, the reset / setting switch 1023, and the power switch 1021 described above are connected to the power supply substrate 102. The main control board 116 is supplied with detection signals of these connected switches via the power supply board 102 described above.

  In the slot machine 2S of the present embodiment, the score addition rate changes according to the set value. Specifically, the score addition rate is changed by using a winning probability corresponding to a set value in an internal lottery described later. The set value is composed of 6 levels of 1 to 6, with 6 being the highest payout rate and the payout rate being lower as the value is decreased in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1. That is, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage is highest for the player, and as the value decreases in order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1, the advantage decreases stepwise.

  In order to change the setting value, the front door 2bS is opened, and the power switch 1021 and the setting key switch 1022 of the power supply box (not shown) provided in the housing 2aS are operated to change the setting value of the slot machine 2S. When the power supply is in the ON state, it is necessary to turn it off once and turn on the power of the slot machine 2S after the setting key switch 1022 is turned on. When the setting key switch 1022 is turned on and the power is turned on, the setting value read from the RAM of the main control unit 41 is displayed as a display value in the display area 51a of the liquid crystal display 510, and the reset / setting switch 1023 is operated. Transitions to a setting change state in which the setting value can be changed. When the reset / setting switch 1023 is operated in the setting change state, the display value displayed in the display area 51a of the liquid crystal display 510 is updated one by one (when further operation from setting 6 is performed, setting 1 is performed). Back to). When the start switch 7 is operated, the display value is determined as the set value. Then, when the setting key switch 1022 is turned OFF, the determined display value (setting value) is stored in the RAM of the main control unit 41, and the state shifts to a state in which the game can proceed.

  In addition, since the power switch 1021 is temporarily turned off, the setting key switch 1022 is turned on, and the power switch 1021 is turned on, the state is changed to the setting change state. Therefore, these operations are collectively referred to as a setting change operation. .

  In order to confirm the set value, after the game is over, the setting key switch 1022 may be turned on in a state where the bet amount is not set. When the setting key switch 1022 is turned on in such a situation, the setting value read from the RAM of the main control unit 41 is displayed in the display area 51a of the liquid crystal display 510, so that the setting value can be confirmed. Transition to the confirmation state. In the setting confirmation state, the game cannot be progressed, and by setting the setting key switch 1022 to the OFF state, the setting confirmation state is ended and the game can be resumed.

  Here, processing executed by the main control unit 41 in the slot machine 2S will be described.

  In the slot machine 2S of the present embodiment, a winning is awarded when the winning symbols are aligned on any winning line of the variable display device constituted by the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R. The types of winning combinations are determined according to the state of the game, but can be broadly divided into special roles with a shift to the big bonus (BB) and regular bonus (RB), and small roles with additional points. And a re-gamer (replay) that allows the next game to be started without the need to set the bet amount.

  In the following, the big bonus may be referred to as BB, and the regular bonus provided during the big bonus may be referred to as RB. In some cases, a big bonus or a regular bonus is simply referred to as a bonus. In order for each winning combination determined according to the gaming state to occur, it is necessary to win an internal lottery and set a winning flag for the winning combination.

  Of the winning flags for each of these roles, the winning flags for the small role and the replaying role are valid only in the game in which the flag is set, and are invalid in the next game. It is valid until a combination of combinations permitted by the flag is completed, and is invalid in a game having a combination of combinations permitted. In other words, once the special combination winning flag is won, even if the combination of the combinations permitted by the flag cannot be made, the winning flag is not invalidated and is carried over to the next game. It becomes.

  As shown in FIG. 117, the role in this slot machine 1 includes a special bonus such as a big bonus (hereinafter referred to as a big bonus BB) and a regular bonus (hereinafter referred to as a regular bonus RB), Cherry, Bell are replayed as a re-playing role.

  Cherry is awarded when the symbol “white cherry” is derived on any of the winning lines for the right reel in any gaming state, and a score corresponding to one medal is added in any gaming state. The If the symbol “white cherry” stops at the upper or lower stage of the right reel, the combination of cherries will be aligned on the two winning lines of the winning lines L2, L5 or the winning lines L3, L4. Since the player has won a cherry on the winning line, a score corresponding to two medals is added.

  A watermelon is awarded when a combination of "Watermelon-Watermelon-Watermelon" or "Watermelon-Watermelon-BAR" is available on any of the winning lines in any game state, and 15 medals at RB and BB A score corresponding to 12 is added, and in a normal gaming state, a score corresponding to 12 medals is added. In any game state, Bell is awarded when a combination of “Bell-Bell-Bell” is arranged on any of the winning lines, and in RB and BB, a score equivalent to 15 medals is added, In the state, a score corresponding to 10 medals is added.

  Replay is a combination of “Replay-Replay-Replay”, “BAR-Replay-Replay”, or “Black 7-Replay-Replay” in any of the winning lines in the normal gaming state. Wins when you have the right. When the replay wins, there is no score addition, but the next game can be started without setting the number of bets again, so the score corresponding to the three medals corresponding to the number of bets that became unnecessary in the next game Is substantially the same as adding.

  RB is won when the combination of “net 7-net 7-black 7” is aligned on any of the winning lines in the normal gaming state, and the gaming state shifts to RB. The RB is a gaming state that is advantageous to the player over other gaming states by increasing the winning probability of the small role, particularly the bell, and when the 12 games are digested after the RB starts, or an 8-game winning ( When the type of a combination is allowed), it ends either whichever comes first.

  BB is a combination of “black 7-black 7-black 7”, “net 7-net 7-net 7” or “white 7-white 7-white 7” in any of the winning lines in the normal gaming state. When the combination is complete, a prize is awarded.

  When BB wins, the gaming state shifts to BB and shifts to RB at the same time. When RB ends, if BB has not ended, it shifts to RB again and is controlled repeatedly until BB ends. The That is, during BB, it is always controlled to RB. Then, BB ends when the score added to the player in the BB exceeds the score corresponding to 465 medals. At the end of the BB, the RB is also ended regardless of whether the RB end condition is satisfied.

  Hereinafter, the internal lottery of the present embodiment will be described. In the internal lottery, it is determined whether or not the above winning combination is permitted before the display results of all the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are derived and displayed (actually, when the start switch 7 is detected). To do. In the internal lottery, first, a random value for internal lottery (an integer from 0 to 65535) is acquired when the start switch 7 is detected. Specifically, the value of the random number storage work assigned to the RAM of the main control unit 41 is set to the lottery work assigned to the RAM of the main control unit 41. Then, for each combination determined according to the gaming state and whether or not the special combination is carried over, numerical data stored in the lottery work, and determination of each combination determined according to the gaming state, the number of bets and the set value This is done according to the number of values.

  The random value storage work is a storage area for storing numerical data latched in the random value register R1D simultaneously with the operation of the start switch 7, and is latched every time new numerical data is latched in the random value register R1D. The numerical data is read in the subsequent timer interrupt process (main), and the numerical data stored in the random value storage work is updated to the latest latched numerical data.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 117, the combination that is the subject of the internal lottery differs depending on whether the gaming state is the normal gaming state, RB, or BB. Further, when the gaming state is the normal gaming state, the role to be subject to the internal lottery varies depending on whether or not the special role is being carried over.

  When the gaming state is the normal gaming state and any special combination is not carried over, BB, RB, replay, watermelon, cherry, and bell are sequentially read out as the target combination of the internal lottery.

  When the gaming state is the normal gaming state and any special combination is carried over, replay, watermelon, cherry, and bell are sequentially read out as the target combinations for the internal lottery.

  When the gaming state is RB (including the inside of the BB), watermelon, cherry, and bell are sequentially read out as the target combinations for internal lottery.

  In the present embodiment, an example is described in which three types of symbol combinations corresponding to BB, three types of symbol combinations corresponding to replay, and two types of symbol combinations corresponding to watermelon are defined. Then, each symbol combination is read out as a target combination. For example, for BB, a combination of “black 7-black 7-black 7”, a combination of “net 7-net 7-net 7”, and a combination of “white 7-white 7-white 7” are subject to internal lottery. Are read in order. Replays and watermelons are also sequentially read out as target combinations for each symbol combination. The number of determination values used in the internal lottery is determined for each symbol combination corresponding to the set values 1 to 6. That is, the winning rate is determined for each symbol combination corresponding to the set values 1 to 6. For this reason, in the internal lottery, the derivation (generation) of the symbol combination is permitted according to the winning rate determined for each symbol combination corresponding to the set value.

  In the internal lottery, the number of judgment values determined according to the internal lottery target, the current game state, and the set value are sequentially added to the internal lottery random value (the value of the lottery work) and added. When the result of overflows, it is determined that the winning combination is won. For this reason, a winning combination will be won with a probability (number of determination values / 65536) according to the number of determination values.

  When a winning combination is determined, a winning flag corresponding to the winning combination is set in the internal winning flag storing work assigned to the RAM of the main control unit 41. The internal winning flag storage work consists of a 2-byte storage area, of which the upper byte is assigned as the special role storing work in which the winning flag for the special role is set, and the lower byte is the winning of the general role It is assigned as a general role storage work for which a flag is set. Specifically, when a special combination is won, a special combination winning flag indicating that the special combination is won is set in the special combination storing work, and the winning flag set in the general combination storing work is cleared. When a general combination is won, a winning flag for the general combination indicating that the general combination is won is set in the general combination storing work. If no winning combination or winning combination is won, only the general winning combination work is cleared.

  The “game” in the slot machine 2S, in a narrow sense, refers to a period from when the start switch 7 is operated until the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are stopped. Since the setting of the bet number before the operation of No. 7, the addition of scores and the transition of the gaming state are also performed after the reels 2L, 2C, 2R are stopped, these incidental processes are also included in the “game” in a broad sense. And

  First, the main control unit 41 sets the bet number by detecting the operation of the single BET switch 500 or the MAXBET switch 600, and starts rotating the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R by detecting the operation of the start switch 7. .

  However, if the player has won a replay in the previous game, the same bet number as the previous game is automatically set by the replay game flag (the replay game flag is erased at this stage).

  When the bet number is set and the start switch 7 is operated, the main control unit 41 extracts a random number for internal lottery, and assigns each combination determined according to the gaming state based on the extracted random number value. A lottery process is performed to determine whether or not winning is allowed.

  The main control unit 41 performs a reel rotation process after the lottery process. In the reel rotation process, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R in the previous game are processed on the condition that one game regulation time (for example, 4.1 seconds) has passed since the time counted by one game timer has elapsed. The motors 32L, 32C, and 32R are driven to start rotation of all the left, middle, and right reels 2L, 2C, and 2R.

  The main control unit 41 stops when a predetermined condition (detection of the reference position by the reel sensors 33L, 33C, 33R after the rotation speed reaches a certain speed) is satisfied from the start of rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R. The operation of the switches 8L, 8C, 8R is made valid. Thereafter, when the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R are operated by the player, the driving of the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R is stopped, and the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R is stopped.

  When the driving of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is stopped, the main control unit 41 performs a winning determination process for determining whether any predetermined role symbol is derived and displayed on the winning line. In the winning determination process, when it is determined that a winning combination such as BB has been won, a process for controlling the bonus (for example, setting a bonus value corresponding to the value of the gaming state flag) is performed.

  When the winning determination process ends, the main control unit 41 performs a payout process. In the payout process, an addition number signal indicating the number of points to be given is output to the payout control unit 117. In the payout process, a bonus end determination process for determining whether or not a bonus end condition corresponding to the bonus is satisfied is performed during the bonus (BB or RB) as various processes not related to winning.

  Next, each board other than the main control board 116 mounted on the slot machine 2S will be described.

  The payout control unit 117 is equipped with a holding point control unit 31 constituted by a holding point control microcomputer. The holding point control unit 31 includes a CPU (Central Processing Unit) as a control center, a ROM (Read Only Memory) storing a program for operating the CPU, control data, and the like, and a RAM (RAM) functioning as a work area of the CPU. Random Access Memory) and an input / output interface for maintaining signal consistency with peripheral devices.

  The payout control unit 117 includes a score counter for storing a player's total score separately from the card unit 3. The payout control unit 117 receives an addition request number signal from the card unit 3 when the player performs an operation to secure the score by deducting the valuable value owned by the player, and the payout control unit 117 In response to the addition request number signal, the score counter is added and updated. On the other hand, when the bet amount is set, the payout control unit 117 subtracts and updates the score point counter.

  Further, a front door opening solenoid 110 and a front door closing detector 112 are provided in an electrically connected state with respect to the dispensing control unit 117.

  When the front door closing detector 112 detects the closing of the front door 2bS, the detection signal is input to the payout control unit 117. The payout control unit 117 transmits a front door opening solenoid excitation signal to the front door opening solenoid 110 to excite the front door opening solenoid 110 and unlock the front door 2bS.

  On the effect control board 90, an effect control unit 91 configured by an effect control microcomputer is mounted. The production control unit 91 includes a CPU (Central Processing Unit) as a control center, a ROM (Read Only Memory) that stores programs and control data for operating the CPU, and a RAM (Random) that functions as a work area for the CPU. Access Memory), and an input / output interface for maintaining signal consistency with peripheral devices.

  The effect control board 90 is provided with a liquid crystal display 510, speakers 530 and 540, a chance button 58, and a jog dial 59. The effect control unit 91 inputs the data read signal to the ROM mounted on the effect ROM board 92, reads the image data, transmits the display data to the liquid crystal display 510, and sends it to the liquid crystal display 510. Control is performed to display a display screen such as a navigation effect relating to points, bets, or small roles.

  Further, the button input signal of the chance button 58 and the dial input signal of the jog dial 59 are input to the effect control board 90, and the effect control board 90 outputs the chance button input signal and the jog dial input signal to the liquid crystal display 510. Then, a display screen reflecting the operation of the jog dial 59 and the operation of the chance button 58 is displayed on the liquid crystal display 510.

  Next, signals transmitted and received between the card unit 3 and the slot machine 2S and between each board of the slot machine 2S will be described.

  From the card unit 3 to the payout control unit 117 of the slot machine 2S, an addition request (holding point +), a subtraction request (holding point-), a game permission request, a game prohibition request, an addition request count, and a subtraction request Both numbers are sent as “commands”.

  The addition request command is transmitted to the payout control unit 117 when the points are lent by debiting the prepaid balance or the points are lent by operating the replay button 319. In response, the payout control unit 117 adds and updates the number of points. The subtraction request command is transmitted to the payout control unit 117 when a divided transfer of points (point sharing process) or a wagon service is performed. Receiving it, the payout control unit 117 subtracts and updates the score.

  The game permission / prohibition request command is a command requesting the payout control unit 117 to permit the game or a command requesting prohibition of the game. The number of addition requests is a command for designating the number of points to be added to the number of points by an addition request command. The subtraction request number is a command for designating the number of points to be subtracted from the number of points by a subtraction request command.

  On the other hand, from the payout control unit 117 of the slot machine 2S to the card unit 3, the number of points indicating the value of the point counter stored in the payout control unit 117, the number of points added according to the winnings, and the number of bets The number of points subtracted according to the setting and external output information indicating various game states and the like are transmitted.

  The external output information includes bet number setting information (indicating the set bet number) transmitted when the bet number is set by operating the single BET switch 500 or the MAX BET switch 600, and the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R. Reel start information transmitted at the time of starting, internal winning status information (indicating the winning result) transmitted at the time when the internal lottery is executed by the start operation, and the time when each of the first to third stop operations is executed 1st to 3rd stop operation information (indicating stop reel type), result information (indicating the type of winning or winning combination) transmitted when the display result is finalized, and game state changed It includes game state information transmitted at the time (indicating the type of game state that has changed) and error information (indicating the type of error) transmitted when an error occurs.

  When the CPU of the main control board 116 detects an error that occurs during the game or a disconnection due to a connection confirmation signal, the CPU controls the lighting or blinking of the calling lamp provided on the curtain board and the I / O of the main control board 116. An abnormality notification signal for notifying the occurrence of an abnormality to the hall management computer 1 is output from the O port (not shown).

  The gaming state notified by the gaming state information includes a big bonus (BB), a regular bonus (RB), an RT (Replay Time) where the winning probability of replay is high, and an internal lottery result by the effect control unit 91. An AT (Assist Time) that is a notification period in which a navigation effect for notification can be executed is included.

  From the payout control unit 117 to the main control board 116, a health check command, a prize payout number reception command, and a BET impossible signal are transmitted. The health check command is a command for checking whether or not the main control board 116 is operating normally. The winning / dispensing number reception command is a command indicating that the addition number transmitted from the main control board 116 has been received. The BET impossible signal is a signal indicating that the value of the score counter has become less than the minimum value required for setting the betting number. When the main control board 116 receives this BET disabling signal, the main control board 116 enters a game prohibition state in which a game cannot be newly started thereafter. Specifically, the operation of the single BET switch 500 and the MAXBET switch 600 for setting the bet amount is invalidated.

  A connection confirmation signal is returned from the main control board 116 to the payout control unit 117. The connection confirmation signal is a signal for confirming that the main control board 116 and the payout control unit 117 are connected, and a signal of a predetermined voltage is constantly supplied from the main control board 116 to the payout control part 117. The payout control unit 117 is configured to control the operation on the condition that the payout control unit 117 receives the predetermined voltage signal.

  In addition, an “addition number +” signal is transmitted from the main control board 116 to the payout control unit 117 when winning is detected, while a “subtraction number +” signal is detected when it is detected that reel rotation has started. Sent. “Addition number +” indicates the number of points to be added according to the winning, and “Subtraction number +” indicates the number of points to be subtracted according to the bet number setting. The payout control unit 117 adds the value of the score counter in accordance with the “addition number +” signal, and adds the “addition number” for transmission to the card unit 3. Further, the payout control unit 117 subtracts the value of the score counter in accordance with the “subtraction number +” signal and adds the “subtraction number” to be transmitted to the card unit 3.

  Further, various external output information indicating the bet number setting and reel start-up described above is transmitted from the main control board 116 to the payout control unit 117. The payout control unit 117 transmits each external output information to the card unit 3 at the timing when the external output information is received. The external output information may be directly transmitted from the main control board 116 to the card unit 3.

  A display control command is transmitted from the payout control unit 117 to the effect control board 90. This display control command includes a gaming machine information command, a card unit (CU) operation command, a test command, and an effect command. The gaming machine information command is a command indicating the gaming state of the slot machine 2S such as BB or RT, and the card unit operation command is a command transmitted in response to the player operating the card unit 3. The test command is a command for testing the effect display operation of the effect control unit 91. The effect command is a command for instructing switching to various effect screens according to the gaming state.

  A command is transmitted from the payout control unit 117 to the effect control board 90 every 300 ms. The effect control board 90 detects a line disconnection and performs a time over detection process (error process) when the next command is not received despite a lapse of a fixed time exceeding 300 ms after the command is received. Specifically, if the next command is not transmitted even though 300 ms has been received since the previous command was received, the error count is incremented by one, and the effect control is performed when the error count is counted ten times continuously. The substrate 90 detects the time-over, initializes the communication state, and controls the liquid crystal display 510 to display an error animation.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 118, main ones of various data stored on each of the CU side and the S platform side and the transmission / reception mode thereof will be described.

  In the present embodiment, on the CU side, the fluctuation of the number of points on the S platform is calculated and the current number of points is managed. On the S side, the current number of points is calculated and stored. However, on the S side, the number of points is only to prevent a new game from being started as early as possible when the number of points is less than the minimum number required for setting the number of bets (for example, 0). It is a secondary thing used for. In the present embodiment, since the main management of the number of points is performed on the CU side, it is not necessary to provide a function for strictly managing the number of points on the S platform side, and the cost of the S platform is reduced as much as possible. Can be suppressed.

  In particular, compared to the CU, the S units have a shorter replacement cycle at the game hall and are replaced early. Therefore, there is an advantage that the running cost of the game hall where the S machines are introduced can be reduced by providing the CU side with the main management function related to the number of points on the S machines side to suppress the costs on the S machines side. is there.

  118 shows RAM storage data provided in the CU-side main control unit 323 and RAM storage data installed in the S-side payout control unit 117. First, when the power is turned on with the S units (slot machine 2S) and the CU (card unit 3) being electrically connected for the first time after being installed in the amusement hall, the payout control unit 117 on the S unit side The main chip ID is transmitted from the main control board 116, the main chip ID is transmitted to the CU side, and the payout chip ID stored in the payout control unit 117 is transmitted to the CU side.

  On the CU side, the transmitted main chip ID and payout chip ID are stored. Next, connection time, that is, data of the time when the CU side and the S side are connected and communication is started is transmitted from the CU side to the S side, and the transmitted connection time is stored on the S side. .

  In this state, three pieces of information of the main chip ID, the payout chip ID, and the connection time identified on the CU side are stored on the CU side and the S platform side. When the power is turned on thereafter, the three pieces of information, that is, the main chip ID, the payout chip ID, and the previous connection time data are transmitted from the S side to the CU side.

  On the CU side, the transmitted data and the already stored data are collated, and it is determined whether or not the same S units as in the previous time are connected. Note that the connection time data is transmitted from the CU side to the S side when new power is turned on and communication between the CU side and the S side is started. Is stored on the S side.

  Each time an operation instruction and an operation response are transmitted between the CU side and the S platform side, the sequence number (SQN) is incremented by “1” on the CU side and the S platform side, and the sequence number is updated on the CU side. And S side. The SQN is a communication number for checking whether or not the communication is properly performed by updating the number every time data is transmitted / received between the CU and the S platform. SQN is a number updated at the end of the communication number to be updated.

  A specific aspect of SQN backup in the CU and S units in the present embodiment will be described. The CU backs up and stores the SQN transmitted to the S units in response to the operation instruction, and then receives the SQN from the S units and rewrites and stores the SQN stored in the backup with the received SQN. When the next operation instruction is transmitted, the SQN stored in the backup is updated by 1 and transmitted to the S units, and the transmitted SQN is stored in the backup. The CU repeats such processing.

  Similarly, in the S unit, the SQN received from the CU by the operation instruction is backed up and stored, and when the operation response is transmitted from the S unit to the CU next time, the SQN stored in the backup is updated by 1 and transmitted. The transmitted SQN is stored as a backup. When the next operation response is received, the SQN stored in the backup is rewritten and stored in the received SQN. Such processing is repeated for the S units.

  And when communication interruption occurs during communication, SQN is backed up and stored until communication reconnection. On the S side, the operation response is always sent regardless of the occurrence time of communication interruption. Therefore, the SQN stored as a backup until communication reconnection is always the SQN transmitted last. On the other hand, since the CU side is in a state in which an operation instruction has been transmitted or an operation instruction has been received in accordance with the timing of communication disconnection, the SQN stored in the backup until communication reconnection is transmitted last. Either the last received or last received.

  For example, an operation instruction is transmitted from the CU side to the S platform side, and the sequence number n at that time is transmitted, and the transmitted sequence number n is stored on the S platform side. When an operation response is returned from the S platform to the CU side, the stored sequence number n added by 1 (n + 1) is also transmitted. On the CU side, since the returned sequence number n + 1 is incremented by 1 from the already stored sequence number n, it is determined that data communication has been performed normally. The n + 2 sequence number is sent to the S side.

  Next, the current point-related information (point-related information being counted) is transmitted from the S platform to the CU side. This current point related information is stored by each counter in the current point related information storage area of the RAM.

  As shown in FIG. 118, a total of four types of counters including an addition number counter, a subtraction number counter, an external output information counter, and a score counter are provided in the current score related information storage area of the RAM. Yes.

  The addition number counter is a counter for counting the number of points to be added in accordance with the occurrence of a prize. When a winning occurs in the S units, an addition number signal that can specify the number of points added is transmitted from the main control board 116 to the payout control unit 117. The payout control unit 117 adds and updates the addition number counter based on the addition number signal.

  The subtraction number counter is a counter for counting the number of points to be subtracted according to the betting number setting. When a bet number setting operation is detected, a bet number setting signal is transmitted from the main control board 116 to the payout control unit 117. The payout control unit 117 adds and updates the subtraction number counter based on the betting number setting signal.

  The external output information counter is a counter for counting the number of times the game state has changed. The external output information counter includes a counter that counts the number of bets set by operating the single BET switch 500 or the MAXBET switch 600, a counter that counts up when the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R start rotating, and a start operation. A counter that counts the internal winning combination for each winning combination when the internal lottery is executed, a counter that counts the operation according to the first to third stop operations when the reel stop operation is performed, and the display result is fixed A counter that counts up at the time, a counter that counts up according to the gaming state when the gaming state changes, and a counter that counts up according to the error type when an error occurs are included.

  Note that counters that count up for each gaming state when the gaming state changes include a counter corresponding to BB, a counter corresponding to RB, a counter corresponding to RT, and the like. The payout control unit 117 adds and updates the corresponding external output information counter based on various external output information transmitted from the main control board 116.

  The score counter is a counter for storing the score (total score) of the player at the current time. The payout control unit 117 adds and updates the point counter by the addition amount of the addition number counter when adding and updating the addition number counter, and updates the point counter by the addition amount of the subtraction number counter when adding and updating the subtraction number counter. Subtract update.

  A command requesting data transmission is transmitted from the CU to the S units at regular time intervals. The S units transmit the values of the above four types of counters (addition number counter, subtraction number counter, external output information counter, and score point counter) to the CU at the timing of receiving the command. Further, as shown in FIG. 4, the S units have the counter values of the “previous score related information” for each of the three types of counters excluding the score number counter among the above four types of counters. Back up to storage area.

  That is, the value of the addition counter is “addition number”, the value of the subtraction counter is “subtraction number”, the value of the external output information counter is “external output information”, Stored in the area. In addition, when storing in the storage area, the data stored before that is erased. That is, new data is overwritten and saved (rewritten) in the storage area of “previous holding point related information”.

  The addition number counter, subtraction number counter, and external output information counter whose counter values are backed up in the storage area of “previous holding point related information” are then initialized (cleared to 0) to prepare for the next data count. It is done.

  As a result, the addition number counter, the subtraction number counter, and the external output information counter change the amount of data (points, external output information) since the last data transmission to the CU (untransmitted to the CU). Data) is stored. When the data transmission request is received from the CU next time, the amount of change in data from when the data transmission request was last received until this time when the data transmission request is received is sent to the CU. Become. On the other hand, as described above, the total number of points at the current stage is stored in the point counter that is not initialized every time data is transmitted. Each time a data transmission request is received from the CU, the total number of points at the current stage is transmitted to the CU. That is, each time the S unit receives a command instructing transmission of the data change amount, the S unit transmits the data change amount from the previous reception of the command to the reception of the current change.

  In other words, the data of addition number, subtraction number, and external output information, which is the current score related information transmitted to the CU immediately before in the storage area of the previous score related information (current score related information transmitted immediately before). Is stored as backup data. This backup data includes not only the value of each current counter but also the value of each previous counter that was not transmitted in the next transmission when the current holding point related information is not transmitted from the S side to the CU side. It is intended to enable transmission.

  On the CU side, a total addition number (addition total), a total subtraction number (subtraction total), an external output information total, and a score are stored in a total data storage area in the RAM.

  The CU updates the total addition number and the number of points based on the value of the addition number counter transmitted from the S platform. Further, the total subtraction number and the number of points are updated based on the value of the subtraction number counter transmitted from the S platform. Furthermore, the cumulative number of external output information is updated based on the value of the external output information counter transmitted from the S units. The external output information cumulative number is updated for each type of external output information counter. As a result, on the CU side, according to “number of bets”, “reel start”, “internal winning by winning combination”, “first to third stop operation”, “display result”, “game state change”, The number (number of times) is accumulated.

  In this way, the CU can manage the latest score by updating the score based on the current score-related information transmitted from the S units one by one. Similarly, the CU can manage the latest information by updating the total number of additions, the total number of subtractions, and the total number of external output information with the current point-related information transmitted from the S units one by one. Become.

  Note that the CU receives the count value of the score counter in addition to the values of the addition counter and the subtraction counter from the S side, but the score stored by itself is stored in the addition counter and the subtraction counter. Updating based on the value, the count value of the point counter sent from the S platform side is not used. For this reason, even if the number of points sent from the S platform does not match the number of scores managed on the CU side, the score on the CU side is updated with the number of scores sent from the S platform. It will never be done.

  Further, the CU collates the value of the score counter transmitted from the S platform with the current score updated on the CU side, and determines whether or not they match.

  The CU sends a normal (normal) operation request (command) and a normal (normal) operation response (with normal operation) (provided that a match (confirmation confirmation) has been made) Continue to receive (response). On the other hand, when it is determined that they do not match, the CU performs control to shift to an error state.

  As control for shifting to the error state, for example, error notification is performed by the display 312 or an error notification signal indicating that an error has occurred is transmitted to the hall management computer 1 (in this case, the hall management computer). Error notification by 1) may be performed), or a predetermined notification for encouraging an artificial response by an attendant may be considered.

  Alternatively, when it is determined that they do not match, the CU may generate a command for instructing the number of points to be corrected to the number of points managed by the CU side, and transmit the command to the S units. Conceivable. In this case, the S units are provided with a function of correcting the number of points stored therein according to the correction instruction command. The correction instruction command may be a command specifying the number of points managed on the CU side, or the difference between the number of points managed on the CU side and the number of points stored on the S platform side. It is good also as a command which shows.

  In this way, the CU receives the values of various counters transmitted from the S platform, and calculates and manages the current number of points based on the value of the addition / subtraction number counter in particular, and manages it. have. For this reason, it is not necessary to provide a main management function for the S units. Accordingly, the manufacturing cost of the gaming machine can be reduced. In the present embodiment, for the purpose of allowing the game to be immediately prohibited when the score becomes 0, the score is also stored on the S platform side. However, a score counter for storing the score on the S side may not be provided.

  The CU does not match the function of performing the score number coincidence determination process for determining whether or not they match by comparing the calculated current score number with the value of the score counter transmitted from the S platform. It sometimes has a function of performing control to shift to an error state (error control at mismatch).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the score is stored on the S side, but it can be determined whether or not the score matches the score stored and stored on the CU side. (CU side function). Therefore, even if a situation occurs in which the number of points stored on the gaming machine side does not coincide with the number of points stored on the CU side due to fraud or other circumstances, it can be checked. Here, the determination function is provided on the CU side. For example, the number of points stored on the CU side and the number of points stored on the S platform side by the hall management computer 1 connected to the CU. May be received to determine whether or not both are consistent.

  As shown in FIG. 118, the CU further includes a storage area for storing a medal and a storage area for storing a card balance of the accepted (inserted) prepaid card (game card). The CU main control unit 323 (see FIG. 3) stores the medal according to an input requesting the use of the medal (for example, pressing input of a replay button 319 (see FIG. 116) provided on the CU). A predetermined number of stored medals is subtracted from the storage area. Further, the main control unit 323 (see FIG. 116) of the CU subtracts a predetermined value from a storage area for storing the card balance in response to an input requesting the use of the card balance (for example, pressing input of the lending button 321).

  In addition, when the player performs an operation for deducting the value from the player's own gaming value (for example, prepaid balance, points recorded on the card, or the number of stored medals) and using it for the game, An addition request number for adding the number of points to be deducted to the point number counter is transmitted from the CU side to the S platform side. In response to this, the S platform side adds and updates the score counter.

  On the other hand, when an operation for ordering a so-called wagon service, in which a player-owned game value is withdrawn and exchanged for a drink or the like, is executed, the number of subtraction requests for the player-owned game value is received from the CU side. S is sent to the S side. In response to this, the S platform side subtracts and updates the score counter.

  FIG. 119 is an explanatory diagram corresponding to the storage control of game history data in the P units and the CU shown in FIG. 6, and is a diagram illustrating the storage control of game history data in the S units and the CU. Control similar to that in FIG. 6 is performed, and instead of P units, S units are used. Since others are the same, here, only the drawings are disclosed and the repeated description is omitted.

[Explanation of administrator mode in combination of card unit and slot machine]
Next, an administrator mode in the combination of the card unit 3 and the slot machine 2S will be described. Since it is basically the same as the administrator mode in the combination of the card unit 3 and the pachinko machine 2 described above, different parts will be mainly described.

  105, 107 and 108, it has been described that the gaming machine corresponding to the card unit 3 is the pachinko machine 2. By using this gaming machine as the slot machine 2S, it can be applied to the manager mode in the combination of the card unit 3 and the slot machine 2S.

  In FIG. 106, the storage information setting screen including information on the pachinko machine 2 as the gaming machine corresponding to the card unit 3 has been described as the screen displayed in the administrator mode. When the gaming machine corresponding to the card unit 3 is the slot machine 2S, the information for displaying the stored information setting screen is the information described with reference to FIG.

  Specifically, information stored in the RAM of the main control unit 323 of the card unit 3 displayed on the left side of the screen includes the main chip ID of the corresponding slot machine 2S, the payout chip ID of the corresponding slot machine 2S, Connection time, sequence number, number of points, addition number accumulation, subtraction number accumulation, and external output information accumulation.

  Information stored in the RAM of the payout control unit 117 of the slot machine 2S displayed on the right side of the screen is a pre-addition number, a pre-subtraction number, a current number of points, a current addition number, and a current subtraction number.

  In FIG. 109, it has been described that the gaming machine corresponding to the card unit 3 is the pachinko machine 2. By using this gaming machine as the slot machine 2S, the display 54 of the pachinko machine 2 as the liquid crystal display 510 of the slot machine 2S, and the pre-replacement pachinko machine 2A as the pre-replacement connection slot machine, The present invention can be applied to an administrator mode in combination with the slot machine 2S.

  When applied to the slot machine 2S, among the display data of the display, the holding ball is changed to the holding point, the big hit number is changed to the BB number, and the P unit specifying information is changed to the S unit specifying information.

  In the case of the slot machine 2S, the display control unit 901 is an effect control board 90 that controls the display of the liquid crystal display 510. Of the operations on the management mode switching unit 902, the operation of the setting key switch 1012 of the pachinko machine 2 is the operation of the setting key switch 1022 in the case of the slot machine 2S. In the case of the pachinko machine 2, it is the power supply board 101, but in the case of the slot machine 2S, it is the power supply board 102.

  The connector 20 of the pachinko machine 2 for communicably connecting to the card unit 3 is the connector 220 in the case of the slot machine 2S. In the case of the slot machine 2S, the connector 380 of the card unit 3 for communicatively connecting to the pachinko machine 2 is the connector 330 of the card unit 3 for communicatively connecting to the slot machine 2S. In the case of the slot machine 2S, the information storage unit 903 is a RAM of the payout control unit 117. In the case of the pachinko machine 2, the P unit communication control unit 81 is used. In the case of the slot machine, the P unit communication control unit 82 is used.

Next, modifications, feature points, and the like in the embodiment described above will be described below.
(1) FIG. 120 shows a modification of the card unit 3 shown in FIG.

  The card unit 3 is incorporated at a position below the game area 27 as indicated by a broken line. A player can insert a card from a card insertion / discharge port 309 provided in the card unit 3, and a player can insert a bill from a bill insertion port 302 provided in the card unit 3. ing. Further, the indicator 312 of the card unit 3 is provided next to the indicator 54 of the gaming machine so that the player can visually recognize it. In the figure, 320 is an IR photosensitive unit, 319 is a replay button, 321 is a lending button, 322 is a return button, and 798 is a call button.

  The modified example of the card unit shown in FIG. 91 is that incorporated in the pachinko machine 2 as an example of the gaming machine, but the gaming machine to be incorporated is not limited to the pachinko machine 2, and FIG. 113 to FIG. The slot machine 2S shown in 118 may be used.

  (2) Next, a modification of the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 6, 40, and 119 will be described. FIG. 121 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a modification of the control mode for storing the game history data on the CU side and the P base side shown in FIG. 6. Here, differences from FIGS. 6, 40, and 119 will be mainly described.

  In the case of FIG. 6, the game history data is cleared by operating the RAM clear switch 293 provided on the P stand 2, but in the modification shown in FIG. 121, the hall management computer 1 The game history data is cleared on the basis of a clear command transmitted from CU3 to CU3. Clearing of the game history data needs to be performed for each gaming machine installed in the game hall before the game hall starts business. Therefore, it is more convenient to clear the game history data by simultaneous delivery of the clear command signal from the hall management computer 1 to each CU 3 instead of the operation of the RAM clear switch installed for each gaming machine.

  When a hall attendant operates the hall management computer 1 or the clock function built in the hall management computer 1 reaches a predetermined time before the game hall opening time, the hall management computer 1 A clear command signal is simultaneously distributed to each CU3. The CU 3 that has received the clear command signal erases the memory in the P game history data storage unit of the data storage unit 392 by the action of the clear processing unit provided in the game history data management unit 391. As a result, the display of the current P game history data on the display 312 is erased (cleared). Further, a clear command signal is transmitted to the game history data management unit 291 of the P table 2 by the operation of the clear processing unit.

  The game history data management unit 291 that has received the clear command signal deletes the data stored in the backup data storage unit of the display effect control unit 292 by the action of the clear processing unit, and the P machine game history data. Of the storage data for 10 days in the storage unit, the oldest storage data is erased, and the remaining 9 days of storage data is shifted and stored one by one in the storage area of the old day. As a result, the newest storage area (current day storage area) becomes an empty area. Today's game history data is stored in this empty area (current day storage area).

  In the modification shown in FIG. 121, after the player leaves the seat, the identity of the player who has left the seat and the player who will play the next game is determined on the CU3 side. The C-ID, which is the player identification information of the player who has left the seat, is stored in the current player game history data storage unit of the data storage unit 392. Thereafter, when the player inserts a card into the CU 3 to play again in the P table 2 that has left the seat, the information of the inserted card is read and the C-ID included in the inserted card information and the current player The C-ID of the player who has left the seat stored in the game history data storage unit is compared to determine whether or not they match. When it is determined that the two match, the same command is transmitted from the game history data management unit 391 of the CU3 to the game history data management unit 291 of the P unit 2, while when it is determined that they do not match The difference command is sent.

  The game history data management unit 291 that has received the same / difference command receives the C-ID and the game history data stored in the backup data storage unit in the current player game history data storage unit if they are the same command. Control to restore and store. On the other hand, when a difference command is received, control is performed to erase backup data stored in the backup data storage unit.

  FIG. 122 is an explanatory diagram of a modification corresponding to the storage control of game history data in the P units and the CU shown in FIG. 121, and is a diagram showing storage control of game history data in the S units and the CU. The same control as that in FIG. 120 is performed, and the difference is that S units are used instead of P units. Since others are the same, here, only the drawings are disclosed and the repeated description is omitted. 121 and 122, as in FIGS. 6 and 119, the player's identity is confirmed by checking the identity of the player only when the C-ID of the membership card is read instead of the visitor card. Store it in the data and take over the game history and aggregate it.

  FIG. 123 is a flowchart showing control of processing at the time of insertion in the modification shown in FIGS. 121 and 122. The control shown in FIG. 123 is obtained by changing a part of the control shown in FIG. 40. The same control steps are denoted by the same step numbers, and differences will be mainly described here. Also in FIG. 123, solid arrows indicate the flow of control, and double-pointed arrows indicate the flow of information to be transmitted. In FIG. 123, each step of S1, S2, S4 to S7, S20, and S21 is executed by the CU, and P22 is executed by S22, S10, S12, S13, and S15.

  If it is determined in S1 that it is not interrupted, the control advances to S20, and the C-IDs of the card inserted this time and the card inserted last time are compared to determine whether or not they match. Next, in S21, control based on the determination result is transmitted to the P units. Specifically, in the case of a determination result that matches, the same command is transmitted to the P units in the case of a determination result that does not match.

  In the P machines, whether or not the transmitted command is a coincidence command is determined in S22, and the game history data in the backup area (backup data storage unit) is stored in the current area (on the condition that they coincide with each other). Control is returned to the current player game history data storage unit) and the update of game history data is resumed (S12).

  In the modification shown in FIG. 123, the control of S14 shown in FIG. 40 is not executed.

  In this modified example, instead of transmitting the same command as described above, the game history data a stored in the current area (current player game history data storage unit) of the data storage unit 392 is used as a gaming machine (P machine 2 or S May be transmitted to the stand 2S). The gaming machine (P 2 or S 2S) that has received the game history data a stores the received game history data a in the current area (current player game history data storage unit) and takes over the game history data a. To add and update new game history data. In this case, a backup area (backup data storage unit) is unnecessary in the gaming machine (P 2 or S 2S).

(3) The above-described embodiment discloses an invention having the following configuration.
A gaming system comprising a gaming machine (pachinko machine 2, slot machine 2S) in which a game is played by a player, and a gaming device (card unit 3) that is communicably connected to the gaming machine,
The gaming machine is
First control means (main control boards 16, 116) for controlling the gaming machine;
Second control means (LSI 799, 999) communicatively connected to the first control means,
The first control means includes
Error determination means (CPU of the main control boards 16 and 116) for determining an error that occurs during the control of the gaming machine;
Abnormality notification control means (CPU of main control boards 16 and 116, I / O port) for performing control to notify abnormality when occurrence of an error is determined by the error determination means,
The second control means includes
Communicatively connected to the gaming device (connected by connectors 380, 20 or connectors 330, 220);
Including an abnormality determination means (authentication sequence of FIG. 29) for determining an abnormality of the first control means;
Output means (notifying the abnormality of the main control boards 16, 116) that outputs abnormality notification information for notifying that an abnormality has occurred when the abnormality determination means determines that an abnormality has occurred in the first control means. The detected payout control units 17 and 117 notify the CU communication control unit 80 from the P unit communication control unit 81 and the S unit communication control unit 82),
The gaming device performs control for notifying an abnormality when the abnormality notification information is received.

  According to such a configuration, when the error occurs during the control of the gaming machine, the abnormality of the first control means itself having a control function for notifying the abnormality is determined by the second control means, and the first control means The first control having an abnormality notification control function when an abnormality occurs in order to perform control for notifying the abnormality in the gaming apparatus that the abnormality of the control means itself has occurred is output from the first control means to the gaming apparatus. Even when there is an abnormality in the means itself, the abnormality notification control can be performed satisfactorily.

  (4) In the above embodiment, the CU communication control unit 80 and the P unit communication control unit 81 receive the information sent from the main control unit 323 and the payout control unit 17 and use the information as it is in the P unit or Although it transmits to CU, the received information may be processed (protocol conversion, serial / parallel conversion, etc.), and the processed information may be transmitted.

  (5) The authentication sequence and the business message sequence in FIGS. 28 to 36 are controls of the main control unit 323 and the communication control unit 80. The authentication sequence and the business message sequence in FIGS. This may be performed by the payout control unit 17 and the P-unit communication control unit 81 of the pachinko machine 2, or may be performed by the payout control unit 117 and the S-unit communication control unit 82 of the slot machine 2S. It may be performed in other gaming machines (card issuing device, clearing device, hall management device, prize exchange device, etc.) installed in.

  In addition, the business message sequence shown in FIG. 36 may be performed, for example, between an island computer connected to the hall management computer 1 and a gaming machine computer, and includes a main control unit and a communication control unit. In the Z counter, the communication control unit is connected to the prize management device, and may be performed between the main control unit and the communication control unit. Furthermore, for example, a communication control unit connected to the storage management device may be provided in the card unit, and the business message sequence shown in FIG. 36 may be executed between the communication control unit and the main control unit of the card unit.

  (6) The BB serial ID authentication sequence shown in FIG. 31 is authentication using two types of SIDs, that is, the SID of the main control unit and the SID of the CU communication control unit, but one type of SID (for example, a CU SID). ) May be used to authenticate the main control unit and the CU communication control unit. In this case, authentication that the same SID is stored is performed.

  (7) In the above embodiment, the number of game balls is displayed on the display 312 provided on the CU side, and the number of game balls is displayed on the display 54 on the P platform side. Yes. When the number of game balls is displayed by a display on the CU side, there is an advantage that the number of game balls can be displayed by applying the CU in the present embodiment to P units without a display unit. On the other hand, when the game ball number display unit is provided on the P platform side, the display control may be performed on the CU side. Alternatively, the display control may be performed on the P platform side. When display control is performed on the P platform side, the number of game balls managed by the CU is displayed on the game ball number display section by receiving information on the number of game balls to be displayed from the CU side. It becomes possible to do. In addition, when display control is performed on the P platform side in this way, there is an advantage that it is possible to display the number of game balls having a high decorative (rendering) value. When display control is performed on the P platform side, information on the number of game balls to be displayed is not received from the CU side, but based on the value of the game ball counter stored in the P platform itself, It is good also as what controls display of a number.

  (8) In FIG. 49, a 10 second weight is provided on the P platform side for the floating ball processing waiting time. Instead, on the P platform side, the number of fired balls−the number of foul balls−the out ball The number-the number of winning balls = 0 is determined, or the number of fired balls-the number of foul balls-the number of balls detected by the merging path detection switch 32 is determined to determine that the processing of the floating balls has been completed. Also good.

  (9) In the above-described embodiment, in the P units that received the prohibition request command, the driving of the hitting ball launch motor 18 is stopped to stop hitting the hitting ball, and the variable display device that is changing is stopped or the start winning memory is stored. In the above description, the variable display device based on the above is not stopped until the change, but instead, the change of the variable display device may be stopped.

  (10) In the above-described embodiment, when a game ball is subtracted by a wagon service or the like, as described with reference to FIG. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the number of game balls stored on the CU side is sufficiently larger than the number of balls requested for subtraction (for example, more than 30 balls), the CU does not wait for a response from the P unit. The game ball may be subtracted by the side alone, and then an operation instruction for a subtraction request may be transmitted to the P units.

  (11) In the above-described embodiment, a command is sent from the CU to the P machine and the P machine responds to the response to the CU. Conversely, a command is sent from the P machine to the CU. Then, the communication form in which the CU returns a response to the P units in response thereto may be used.

  Specifically, the command (operation instruction) generated by the payout control units 17 and 117 is transmitted to the P unit communication control unit 81 and the S unit communication control unit 82, and the command (operation instruction) is transmitted to the P unit communication control unit. 81, transmitted from the S-unit communication control unit 82 to the CU. A response (operation response) corresponding to the command (operation instruction) is returned from the CU to the P unit communication control unit 81 and the S unit communication control unit 82, and the response (operation response) is returned to the P unit communication control unit 81 and S unit. The communication control unit 82 transmits to the payout control units 17 and 117.

  In this case, the payout control units 17 and 117 execute retransmission of the command shown in FIG. That is, when the payout control units 17 and 117 cannot receive a response from the P-unit communication control unit 81 and the S-unit communication control unit 82 for 1 second after transmitting the command, the command is transmitted to the P-unit communication control unit 81 and the S-unit communication. Retransmits to the control unit 82. Furthermore, the payout control units 17 and 117 also execute the transmission of the communication status request and the communication status confirmation retry shown in FIGS. 36 (a) and 36 (b). That is, the payout control units 17 and 117 transmit an operation instruction to the P unit communication control unit 81 and the S unit communication control unit 82 and then transmit a communication state request, and the P unit communication control unit 81 and the S unit communication control unit 82. The communication state is confirmed based on the communication state response returned from. When it is determined that the confirmation result is abnormal, an operation instruction is transmitted again, a communication state request is transmitted, and a communication state confirmation retry is executed.

  (12) Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, communication is performed between the CU and the P platform at regular intervals (for example, 200 ms). Instead, when the necessity of communication occurs, the CU Alternatively, communication may be performed by transmitting data from one of the P units to the other.

  (13) In the above-described embodiment, an operation response including a rejection signal that does not comply with a request such as addition rejection ON, subtraction rejection ON, clear rejection ON, etc. is returned from the P platform to the CU. Thus, it is determined that the request is rejected based on the rejection ON. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and instead of the P units returning a rejection ON operation response, an operation response including addition / subtraction ball numbers and game ball data not complying with the request from the CU is returned to the CU. On the side, it is possible to determine whether the returned data (the number of added / subtracted balls, game balls, etc.) is in accordance with the request, and thereby determine whether the request has been rejected. Good.

  (14) In the above-described embodiment, when a power interruption at the CU or a communication interruption between the CU and the P base is detected, the ball hitting is stopped on the P base side and the play is stopped. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and control may be performed so that the game can be continued without stopping hitting on the P platform side. In that case, the P subtraction data and cumulative number of starting and subtracting balls generated along with the game that was continued from the time when the communication interruption occurred until the abnormality was recovered and started up are stored on the P platform side. In addition, at the time of activation, the data and game ball data may be transmitted to the CU to correct the backup value of the data on the CU side.

  (15) In the above-described embodiment, when the command from the CU is not transmitted for a predetermined time (for example, 4 seconds), the P platform determines that the communication is cut off by the process of FIG. However, the communication interruption may be determined by the following method.

  A connection detector for detecting whether or not the pachinko machine 2 and the card unit 3 are electrically connected is provided in the pachinko machine 2. Referring to FIG. 4, CU communication control unit 80 and payout control unit 17 are connected by a signal line as described above. In addition to the signal line, a predetermined voltage (for example, 5 V) from card unit 3 is applied. A connection detection signal line to be input to the pachinko machine 2 side is provided. The connection detection signal line and the signal line between the CU communication control unit 80 and the payout control unit 17 are formed of the same cable, and the cable unit is disconnected or the connectors 330 and 20 are detached, and the card unit 3 is also disconnected. Since the voltage of the connection detection signal line becomes 0 V when the power is cut off, the connection detector detects this, and the detection signal is input to the payout control unit 17. The payout control unit 17 determines that the disconnection of the cable, the disconnection of the connectors 330 and 20, and the power supply of the card unit 3 have been disconnected due to the input of the detection signal.

  (16) In the process of FIG. 37, when the P platform receives a communication start request (correction request) including correction ON, the P platform is programmed so that the correction request cannot be rejected by the P platform. However, there is a case where a serious error that cannot be corrected such as a game ball has occurred in the P units even though a communication start request (correction request) including correction ON is received. In consideration of such a severe error state, after transmitting a communication start request (correction request) including correction ON on the CU side, the content of the operation response transmitted from the P unit is checked, and the P unit side It may be determined whether or not the game ball or the like has been corrected correctly, and if it has not been corrected, control for shifting to an error state may be performed.

  That is, the CU determines in advance when it is determined that a game machine (for example, P machines) cannot add game balls or the like even after receiving a communication start request (correction request) including correction ON in FIG. Error control means for performing control to shift to a specified error state.

  As control for shifting to the error state, for example, a severe error notification is performed by the display 312 and a notification that a serious error has occurred is given to the hall management computer 1 to notify the error by the hall management computer 1. It may be possible to promote artificial responses by staff.

(17) On the P platform side, the number of additional balls may be counted as follows.
Counters A and B are provided on the P platform side as counters for counting the number of balls to be added. First, the number of balls to be added is counted by the counter A. When it is the transmission timing of the number of added balls, the count value of the counter A is transmitted to the CU. Thereafter, the value of the counter A is maintained, and thereafter, the number of additional balls is counted by the counter B. If it is the transmission timing of the number of added balls, the count value of the counter B is transmitted to the CU. Thereafter, the value of the counter B is maintained, while the count value of the counter A is cleared to 0, and thereafter, the counter A counts the number of balls to be added. Thereafter, the above counting by the counters A and B is repeated.

  The above counting method may be used for counting the number of subtraction balls on the P platform side. Alternatively, it may be used for counting the number of winnings at the starting port 1 and the number of winnings at the starting port 2.

  (18) The P platform does not transmit two pieces of information of the number of added balls and the number of subtracted balls to the CU, but sends one information after adding / subtracting the number of added balls and the number of subtracted balls to the CU. Also good. That is, such information also constitutes “update information that can specify the change amount”.

  (19) The communication method is not limited to the command-response method described above. The P units may transmit ball-related information such as game balls to the CU at predetermined time intervals without waiting for a command from the CU. Alternatively, the P platform may transmit the ball related information to the CU every time a predetermined amount of information is obtained, instead of transmitting the ball related information at predetermined time intervals. For example, in the case of an additional ball, it may be configured to transmit the additional ball number to the CU every time one or two or more predetermined number of additional balls are generated.

  (20) In the present embodiment, two counters, an addition ball counter and a subtraction ball count, are provided on the P platform side. However, instead of these two counters, a single addition / subtraction counter may be used that increments according to an increase in game balls (such as winnings) and subtracts due to a decrease in game balls (such as bullet firing). In this case, the value of this one addition / subtraction counter is transmitted from the P units to the CU.

(21) This embodiment includes the following configuration.
After the gaming device transmits a command for instructing subtraction of points to the gaming machine, and before receiving a response to the command, a process for reestablishing a communication connection with the gaming machine In the process of re-establishing the communication connection, it is determined whether or not the command for instructing the subtraction of the point has reached the gaming machine based on the data transmitted from the gaming machine side. The command transmission means for canceling the instruction for subtracting the point by the command when the arrival determination means determines that the command for instructing the subtraction of the point has arrived. In order to cancel the point subtraction instruction by the command for instructing the subtraction of the points. When the command is received, whether the score has already been subtracted based on the command for instructing the subtraction of the score, or if the score is not subtracted due to lack of the score, The score corresponding to the cancellation amount of the subtraction instruction is added to the score stored in the score storage means.

  (22) In the present embodiment, a signal requesting the end of the game is input to the CU by operating the return button 322. However, the CU may be configured to be able to input a signal requesting the end of the game from a management computer or the like.

(23) The CU and the P stand may be connected so as to be communicable wirelessly instead of wired connection.
(24) By providing the function of the payout control unit 17 on the main control board 16, the payout control unit 17 may not be provided in the pachinko machine 2.

  (25) The payout control unit 17 performs control for stopping the driving of the hitting ball motor 18 when the game ball counter stored on the pachinko machine 2 side becomes zero. However, the payout control unit 17 may execute the control when the game ball counter reaches a predetermined value other than zero. For example, the player can specify and input the predetermined value in advance using a predetermined operation switch of the gaming machine. The payout controller 17 stops the driving of the hitting ball motor 18 when the game ball counter reaches a predetermined value designated by the player. Thereby, the player can automatically stop the game when the remaining number of game balls reaches the number of balls designated in advance.

  (26) In the above-described embodiment, the presentation unit 50 is provided on the pachinko machine 2 side and various displays are performed by the display unit 54. However, in the pachinko machine 20 that does not include the presentation unit 50, There may be. In that case, even if a command including an operation instruction such as ON during card insertion processing, ON during addition display, ON during calculation display, ON during clear display is transmitted to the P base 2, Display control according to the command is not performed, and only the display on the CU side is displayed.

  (27) In the possession ball sharing process shown in FIGS. 84 to 86, the stock card stocked in the CU is used for the card B ejected for split transfer (share ball possession) to others. Instead, the card B to be transferred to another person is inserted into the card insertion / eject port 309 from the outside of the CU, and the ball for split transfer (shareball sharing) is recorded and discharged to the inserted card B. You may make it do. In that case, on the display screen of the ball sharing processing status shown in FIGS. 90 to 93, between the discharging process of the own card as the first process and the discharging process of the shared card as the second process, A shared card insertion process is added.

  (28) In the holding ball sharing process shown in FIG. 85, the visitor card B is first inserted to start the game. Instead, the player inserts a bill into the bill insertion slot 302 of the CU. A game may be started. In that case, the transfer card B used for sharing the ball is taken out from the card stock section in the CU and discharged in association with the shared points, and the player is associated with the number of game balls at the end of the game. The card returned to the card may be taken out from the card stock unit in the CU and discharged. In addition, after the game is started by inserting banknotes, the number of game balls at that time may be associated with the card taken out from the card stock unit when the number of game balls is generated due to the winning. In this case, when the number of game balls fluctuates with the game, the number of game balls associated with the card is similarly varied. Then, when the operation of sharing the ball is performed, the number of game balls associated with the card is changed to the shared points, the card is discharged as a transfer card, and taken out from the card stock section again. You may make it match | combine the remainder which subtracted the share score for the said game ball | bowl from the said number of game balls.

  (29) In the above-described embodiment, when the CU resumes the connection sequence, it is determined that the connection sequence is resumed in a state other than waiting (see FIG. 38), and the communication is disconnected by sending a communication disconnection request. When it is determined that the connection sequence is resumed after the determination, or the SQN backed up by the CU does not match the SQN transmitted from the P unit, the reconnection illustrated in FIG. 37 instead of FIG. 27 is performed. Run the connection sequence. However, in addition to them or instead of any of them, a signal (for example, recovery data) indicating that a communication connection is disconnected from the P unit during the game (when not in standby) with the restart of the connection sequence. Etc.) may be transmitted to the CU, and the CU may execute the connection sequence at the time of reconnection in FIG. 37 based on the signal.

  (30) In the split transfer (game share) of game balls shown in FIGS. 84 to 86, the split transfer is performed on the condition that the current game ball is determined to be more than the predetermined number than the game balls to be split and transferred. You may make it accept | permit. In the case of FIG. 84 and FIG. 85, for example, split transfer (shareball sharing) is permitted on the condition that it is determined that the current game ball is 200 balls or more larger than the game balls to be split and transferred. In the case of FIG. 86, split transfer (shared ball sharing) on condition that it is determined that the value obtained by subtracting the collateral ball (= 200) from the current game ball is 100 balls or more than the game ball to be divided and transferred. Is acceptable.

  (31) In the process of split transfer (share ball sharing) of the game balls shown in FIGS. 84 and 86, the number of game balls in the game is the card B until the card B is discharged after the card A is discharged. If the number of possessed balls to be written and transferred is no longer reached, control is performed so that the sharing of the score is canceled and the card B is not ejected.

  (32) In the above-described embodiment, the unit of the number of game balls and the number of possession balls is the same. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the units of both may be different. For example, the number of game balls “1” may be converted to “10” when converted to the number of balls.

  (33) In FIG. 85, when a return operation at the end of a game is performed, a card (stock card) stocked in the card stock part is taken out and the number of game balls is associated with the stock card and discharged. Instead, you have a game hall clerk bring a new card, insert the card into the card insertion / discharge slot 309, match the number of game balls, and eject the card. Also good.

  (34) In the above embodiment, two types of cards, a membership card and a visitor card, are shown, but the type of card is not limited to this, and for example, only one type of visitor card may be used.

  (35) Instead of the RAM clearing by manual operation by the RAM clear switch 293 shown in FIG. 6, a clock function may be provided so that a RAM clear signal is automatically output at the game hall business start time. As described above, the game history data is cleared by the automatically output RAM clear signal.

  (36) In the embodiment described above, in the recovery process for the number of game history balls such as the number of symbol determinations 1, 2, the start ports 1-3, the big winning ports 1, 2, the winning ports 1-4, etc., Although control to match the data is performed, since these game history data are information managed by the P machines, the game history data is basically based on the game history data held by the P machine regardless of the match or mismatch. The CU side game history data may be controlled to be updated. However, the data of the total number of game balls, the total of added balls, and the total of subtracted balls can be matched with the stored data on the CU side.

  (37) In the embodiment described above, the transition to the test hit mode is performed by inserting a test card into the CU. Instead of or in addition to that, a transition command from the upper server 801 or a game room Control may be performed so as to shift to the test hit mode by a remote control operation by a store clerk. Such a transition to the trial hit mode by the remote control operation can be shifted to the trial hit mode by the remote control while waiting for a customer (even during the probability change). And as a test hit mode, you may provide two types, the 1st test hit mode used as a non-business event in a game hall, and the 2nd test hit mode for confirmation after nail adjustment.

  Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, when there are no more game balls (or points) in the test hit mode, a game ball addition command (or points addition command) is sent from the CU side to the P units (or S units). The game balls can be added by adding the game balls (or adding the number of points), but without sending the game ball addition command (or the number of points added command) from the CU side, You may control so that a game can be continued even if a game ball (or number of points) runs out.

  (38) The above-mentioned C-ID is composed of fixed code data that does not change. Instead, the C-ID read from the card changes dynamically according to the reading time. An ID code may be used. When the card is inserted into the CU and the CU reads the C-ID, the CU stores the C-ID together with the reading time, and the player is based on both the reading time and the C-ID data. You may comprise so that can be specified. For example, when the CU reads the C-ID, the current time T is input to the card, the C-ID is encrypted ET (C-ID) in the card, and the ET (C-ID) and T And in pairs. The CU decodes the ET (C-ID) with T and DT (ET (C-ID)) to extract the C-ID.

  (39) In the above-described embodiment, the player is specified based on the C-ID, and it is determined whether or not the same player is playing a game. The biometric information reading means for reading the biometric information such as the fingerprint or vein of the player is provided on the CU or P base, and the identity of the player is determined based on the biometric information reading means read by the biometric information reading means. Biometric authentication may be employed.

  (40) In the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 6, the data stored in the current player game history data storage unit is shifted to the backup data storage unit and stored with the return of the card. Instead, the current player game history data storage unit is switched to the backup data storage unit and the backup data storage unit is switched to the current player game history data storage unit when the card is returned. You may control as follows. In this case, the storage data of the switched current player game history data storage unit is displayed on the display 54.

  (41) In the above-described embodiment, as described with reference to FIG. 6 and the like, the C-ID matching determination is performed on the P platform side. However, the matching determination may be performed on the CU side. In that case, the C-ID stored in the backup data storage unit of the P stand 2 is transmitted to the CU side, and the C-ID recorded on the inserted card is received on the CU side that received the C-ID. , And the coincidence between the read C-ID and the C-ID transmitted from the P platform is determined. When the CU 3 determines that the C-IDs do not match, it transmits a clear command to the P unit 2. In the P base 2 that has received the clear command, the data stored in the backup data storage unit is deleted.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in CU3 that the C-IDs match, the game history data stored in the backup data storage unit is returned to the current player game history data storage unit for the P unit 2 Command information for taking over the game history data and adding and updating new game history data is transmitted from the CU 3 to the P unit 2. The command information may be code data such as takeover command information or the like, but the backup game history data for taking over, that is, the game history data stored in the backup data storage unit of the P unit 2 is stored on the CU side. In addition, the backed up game history data may be transmitted to the P unit 2 as takeover command information. In that case, the backup data storage unit in the P units is not necessary.

  (42) In the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 68 to 70, 73, 74, 77, 78, 81, and 82, the C-ID identity determination is performed by the CU. Although what is performed on the P side is shown, this identity determination may be performed on the P platform side. In other words, a gaming machine having the following configuration may be used.

It is possible to play with points and has a communication unit that communicates with a gaming device that launches game media into the game area and adds points using the game value owned by the player. A game machine in which points are added according to the occurrence of
A specific means for identifying the amount of change in points according to the use in games and the occurrence of winnings,
A score storage means for storing the score;
A score update means for updating the score stored in the score storage means according to the amount of change;
Information transmission control means for performing control to transmit the update information capable of specifying the amount of change and the score stored in the score storage means from the communication unit to the gaming device;
Player specifying information storage means for storing player specifying information for specifying a player performing a game;
When communication is started by connecting to the gaming device, the player identification information read by the player identification information reading means is the same as the player identification information stored in the player identification information storage means The same determination means for determining whether or not a player is identified,
A gaming machine comprising: an identical determination result transmission control unit that performs control to transmit a determination result by the identical determination unit from the communication unit to the gaming device.

  (43) In the above-described embodiment, the C-ID is included in the operation instruction and the operation response for transmission / reception. When a different C-ID is transmitted from the P platform to the CU during the transmission / reception, it may be determined that there is an error, and control is performed so that the addition ball count and the subtraction ball count are not updated on the CU side. . When controlled in this way, there is a risk that the C-ID may be temporarily distorted due to noise during transmission and reception of commands and responses. In this case, for example, if the C-ID included in the operation response received on the CU side is different from the C-ID transmitted as a command, the CU side determines that there is an error and transmits the error. The addition / subtraction update control is not executed based on the number of added balls or the number of subtracted balls included in the motion response. As a result, when a C-ID that is not distorted by noise is transmitted from the P base side in the next command and response transmission / reception, the operation response is determined even though it is determined that the C-ID matches and is normal. The number of game balls (total number of game balls) included in the CU and the total number of game balls stored in the CU are inconsistent. In the above embodiment, in such a case, the CU stores A command for correcting the number of game balls to be transmitted is transmitted to the P units, and the number of game balls stored in the P units is rewritten to the number of stored balls on the CU side. As a result, the number of game balls of P units is rewritten to the previous number of old game balls updated based on the previous response in which the C-ID goes wrong due to noise, and the correct number of game balls is incorrect. There are cases where the number of balls is rewritten.

  In order to eliminate such an inconvenience, even if the C-ID included in the response is different from the C-ID on the CU side, it is not determined by only one response, but several times (for example, twice) It is desirable to control so as to determine that there is an abnormality only when the C-ID in the response subsequently goes wrong with the C-ID on the CU side. The following two methods are conceivable as specific methods for realizing this.

  First, as a first method, when the C-ID included in the first response is different from the C-ID on the CU side, the next command is sent directly to the P units without adding and updating SQN. Send. Then, in the P platform, as described based on FIG. 53, it is determined that the response has not reached the CU, and the previously transmitted data is added to the number of added balls, and the added number of added balls, etc. Control to transmit to the CU as the next response is performed. In the CU, if the C-ID included in the next response matches the C-ID on the CU side, the CU determines that the C-ID is appropriate, and adds the previous transmission data to the added number of balls. Based on the update control of the number of balls. As a result, it is possible to update to the correct number of game balls. On the other hand, if the C-ID included in the next response is also different from the C-ID on the CU side, the C-ID is determined to be abnormal because the C-ID is different twice in succession. Instead of updating the number of game balls based on the number of added balls or the number of subtracted balls included in the response, a predetermined error processing control may be performed thereafter.

  As a second method, the CU side adds and updates separately during C-ID mismatch, and when the correct C-ID is received, the separately added and updated data is used as the total number of game balls. Batch addition update.

The configuration of the modified example described above is summarized as follows.
The gaming device
A score storage means for storing the score;
Game device side identification information storage means for recording predetermined identification information;
Game device side identification information transmission control means for performing control to periodically transmit the identification information stored in the game device side identification information storage means to the gaming machine,
The gaming machine is
A specific means for identifying the amount of change in points according to the use in games and the occurrence of winnings,
Information transmitting means for transmitting update information capable of specifying the amount of change to the gaming device;
Gaming machine side identification information storage means for storing identification information transmitted under the control of the gaming apparatus side identification information transmission control means;
A gaming machine side identification information transmission control means for performing control to periodically transmit the identification information stored in the gaming machine side identification information storage means to the gaming device,
The gaming device is:
Information receiving means for receiving the update information;
A score update means for updating the score stored in the main score storage means based on the update information;
Consistency to determine whether or not the identification information transmitted under the control of the gaming machine side identification information transmission control means and the identification information stored in the gaming apparatus side identification information storage means are matched. A determination means;
An abnormality determination unit that performs an abnormality determination when it is determined that the alignment result is not continuously matched a predetermined number of times.
The point update means includes:
When abnormality determination is performed by the abnormality determination means, the score is updated corresponding to the total amount of change of the score in the gaming machine during the period determined to be inconsistent by the alignment determination means. Don't do it,
When it is determined that the consistency determination unit is normal based on the identification information transmitted before the abnormality determination by the abnormality determination unit is performed, the alignment determination unit determines that there is a mismatch. The points are updated based on the total amount of change of the points in the gaming machine during the period.

  According to such a configuration, even if identification information that is temporarily distorted due to noise or the like is received despite proper identification information being transmitted, it is erroneously determined as abnormal in the gaming device, and updated information is obtained. It is possible to prevent inconvenience caused by not updating the score based.

  (44) In the above-described embodiment, the game history data is re-totaled in the trial hit mode when the operation button icon such as the re-total button displayed on the display 312 is touched. Instead of or in addition, it may be controlled to re-total the game history data in the trial hit mode by detecting the opening of the glass door 6.

  (45) The contents of the above-described embodiment can be applied not only to pachinko gaming machines but also to gaming machines such as slot machines.

  Here, the pachinko gaming machine type game machine is a player-owned valuable value (prepaid balance, number of balls, or the like specified by the recording information recorded on the recording medium (card). A gaming machine that has a communication unit (P-unit communication control unit 81) that communicates with a gaming device (card unit 3) that enables the number of stored balls) to be used for gaming, and that launches gaming media into the gaming area ( Pachinko machine 2).

  In other words, with a pachinko machine type game machine, it is possible to play with points, the game medium is launched into the game area, and the game value owned by the player is increased. It is a gaming machine (pachinko machine 2) that includes a communication unit that communicates with a gaming device that uses and adds points, and that points are added according to the occurrence of a prize.

  On the other hand, a slot machine type gaming machine is a player-owned valuable value prepaid balance, number of balls, or number of balls specified by recording information received on a recording medium (card). Including a communication unit (P-unit communication control unit 81) that communicates with a gaming device (card unit 3) that can be used for gaming, and a variable display device that can change the display state. The game can be started by setting, and the display result of the variable display device is derived and displayed, so that one game is completed, and the derived display result is a predetermined specific display result. This is a gaming machine (slot machine 2S) that can sometimes win a prize.

  In other words, a slot machine type gaming machine is capable of playing with points and a communication unit that communicates with a gaming device that adds points using the player's own gaming value. (S-unit communication control unit 82) and a variable display device whose display state can be changed, the game can be started by setting the number of bets for one game, and the display result of the variable display device is When one game is completed by the derivation display, a winning can be generated when the derivation-displayed display result becomes a specific display result determined in advance, and points are added according to the occurrence of the winning. This is a gaming machine (slot machine 2S).

  (46) In the above-described embodiment, as described with reference to FIGS. 5 and 118, the number of game balls and points stored by the CU and the number of game balls and points sent from the gaming machine are determined. The CU determines whether or not they match, and if they do not match, a correction command is sent to match the number of game balls and points on the gaming machine side with the number of game balls and points on the CU side. C-ID matching / mismatching may be further added as a determination criterion. For example, even if the number of game balls or points stored by the CU does not match the number of game balls or points sent from the gaming machine, it will not send a correction command by itself, and from the gaming machine When the CU determines that the transmitted C-ID does not match the C-ID stored in the CU, a correction command is transmitted. As a result, when an abnormality such as noise that causes C-ID data to be distorted occurs, a correction command is transmitted to correct the number of game balls and points on the gaming machine side to correct values. Can do.

  Further, when the CU determines that the C-ID transmitted from the gaming machine matches the C-ID stored in the CU, a correction command may be transmitted. In this way, if there is an abnormality that the number of game balls or points on the gaming machine side is out of order when the player is not changing, a correction command is sent to the number of game balls or points on the game machine side. It can be corrected to the correct value.

  (47) In the above embodiment, the switch operation of the RAM clear switch 293 erases the oldest stored data among the stored data for 10 days in the P game history data storage unit, and the remaining 9 days. One minute of stored data is shifted and stored in the storage area of the old day one by one. As a condition for executing the shift control of this P game history data, it is a time zone before the opening of the game hall. It may be added. That is, the shift control of the P game history data is executed on the condition that the switch operation of the RAM clear switch 293 is performed in a predetermined time zone before the game hall is opened.

  (48) In the above-described embodiment, the CU communication control unit authentication sequence is executed between the main control unit 323 and the CU communication control unit 80. In addition, the LSIs 799 and 999 of the gaming machine are You may perform between the control boards 16 and 116, between the payout control parts 17 and 117, and the P stand communication control parts 81 and 82.

  (49) In the modification described with reference to FIGS. 121 and 122, the clear command transmitted from the hall management computer 1 is input to the CU 3, but instead or in addition to the CU 3, A process of clearing the game history data described above may be performed by providing a clear switch and operating the clear switch. Further, the game history data may be cleared by a remote control operation. Specifically, when the attendant of the game hall performs a clear operation by pointing the remote control at the IR photosensitive unit 320 of the CU3, the IR photosensitive unit 320 receives the operation signal (infrared ray) and clears the game history data. Do.

  (50) In the above embodiment, a slot machine that does not require any physical game medium such as a medal in the game is described as an example of the point-slot type slot machine. When such a slot machine is employed, a game medium is not required, and therefore it is not necessary to provide a game medium transport path or a game medium reservoir in the slot machine. As a result, the structure of the slot machine can be simplified, and the slot machine can be reduced in size or cost.

  However, in place of such a slot machine, a slot machine that adopts a scoring system and updates the scoring in conjunction with moving a game medium such as a medal or game ball in a predetermined direction is adopted. It is also possible to do.

  For example, a circulation path is provided for enclosing a large number of game media in the slot machine and circulating the enclosed game media in a predetermined direction. In addition, you may provide the discharge | emission / input part which can discharge | emit / input game media as needed in the predetermined location of the circulation path.

  When the point addition condition is satisfied, the slot machine adds the number of game media corresponding to the number of points to be added from the plurality of game media in the circulation path to the second from the predetermined first location in the circulation path. While moving to a location, the stored score is added and updated, and a response command for adding the score is transmitted to the CU. The CU adds and updates the stored number of points.

  Further, when the score subtraction condition is satisfied, the slot machine, from among the plurality of game media in the circulation path, the number of game media corresponding to the number of score points to be subtracted from the second location in the circulation path. While moving to one location, the stored score is subtracted and updated, and a response command for subtracting the score is transmitted to the CU. The CU subtracts and updates the stored number of points.

  Even when the subtraction condition is satisfied, the game medium may be moved from the first location to the second location as in the case where the addition condition is satisfied. Alternatively, the game medium may be moved only when the addition condition is satisfied, or the game medium may be moved only when the subtraction condition is satisfied.

  Also, the game medium moving between the first location and the second location can be seen through in order for the player to recognize that the points have been updated in response to the movement of the game media. It is desirable to provide the see-through part at a predetermined position on the front side of the slot machine.

  Further, if a plurality of movement paths for moving the game medium are provided between the first place and the second place, the possession to be updated when the addition condition or the subtraction condition is satisfied once. Game media corresponding to the number of points updated when the number of points updated is large (for example, when the number of payouts based on winnings is large, when the number of additions based on a lending command is large, or when the number of bets is a MAX value) Can be moved quickly. As a result, it is possible to prevent an uncomfortable operation such that the movement of the game medium continues in spite of the end of the update display of the points.

  Further, if the first place and the second place are arranged so that the upper part and the lower part in the vertical direction are in a relationship, the game medium is naturally moved from the first place to the second place by its own weight. It can be dropped, and the moving mechanism of the game medium can be simplified. In this case, it is assumed that the game medium is allowed to flow from the first location to the first location in both addition and subtraction update of the points. Alternatively, the game medium may be allowed to flow from the first location to the first location only in one of the addition and subtraction update of the score. Alternatively, it is also possible to provide a flow-down path for addition update of the holding point and a flow-down path for update of the subtraction of the holding point separately, and provide a perspective window for addition update visual recognition and a perspective window for subtraction update visual recognition, respectively. Good.

  In particular, when a game ball is used as the game medium, the game medium can be circulated more smoothly than when a medal is used because the game medium is spherical. As the game ball, it is conceivable to adopt a pachinko ball that is normally used in a game store. In this case, for example, if the pachinko ball 5 balls corresponds to the value of one medal of the slot machine (value of the score = 1), when the score is updated, the updated score 5 Double pachinko balls will be moved between the first location and the second location. A pachinko ball visually recognized through a see-through window provided between the first location and the second location is a “show ball” exclusively used to indicate to the player that the points have been updated. Will function as.

  In the following, effects obtained from various means included in the present embodiment and combinations of various means are listed.

(1-1) A gaming machine that can be played with points, and a gaming machine (pachinko machine 2) to which points are added according to the occurrence of winnings, and a player's gaming value (prepaid balance, number of balls, Or a gaming system comprising a gaming device (card unit 3) that is connected to the gaming machine (connector wiring with connectors 330 and 20) and adds points by using the number of stored balls)
The gaming machine is
Specific means (microcomputer for gaming machine control, addition ball counter, subtraction ball counter) for identifying the amount of change in the number of points (addition balls, subtraction balls) depending on the use of the game and the occurrence of winnings,
Update information (operation response including the number of added balls and the number of subtracted balls) that can identify the amount of change, and information transmitting means (payout control unit 17) for transmitting to the gaming device,
The gaming device is:
Main possession point storage means for storing points (RAM that stores “the number of game balls”);
Information receiving means (CU communication control unit 80) for receiving the update information;
A score update unit (main control unit 323) that updates the score stored in the main score storage unit based on the update information.

  According to such a configuration, since the point management is performed on the gaming device side, it is not necessary to provide the point management function on the gaming machine side, and accordingly, the cost of the gaming machine can be suppressed as much as possible. .

  In particular, gaming machines tend to have a shorter replacement cycle in a game arcade than gaming devices in order to be able to provide more highly-oriented games quickly. For that reason, there is an advantage that the running cost of the game hall where the gaming machine is introduced can be reduced by holding the point management function not on the gaming machine side but on the gaming device side to reduce the cost of the gaming machine. is there.

(1-2) The gaming machine
Sub-point storage means (game ball counter) for storing points,
Sub-points update means (payout control unit 17) for updating the points stored in the sub-point storage means according to the amount of change,
The gaming machine performs game control based on the points stored in the auxiliary holding point storage means (when the game ball counter becomes 0, the driving of the hitting ball motor 18 is stopped), while the gaming device is When the signal for requesting the end of the game (the operation signal of the return button 322) is input, the score determination unit (main main unit) determines the score stored in the main score storage unit as the score at the end of the game. 46 including a control unit 323;

  According to such a configuration, since the points at the end of the game are determined on the gaming device side, there is no need to provide a point determination function on the gaming machine side, and the cost of the gaming machine is reduced as much as possible. Can be suppressed.

(1-3) The gaming device
A point display unit (display 312) for displaying the points stored by the main point storage means;
Including instruction information transmission means (CU communication control unit 80) for transmitting information (operation instruction) for instructing transmission of the update information to the gaming machine,
The gaming machine is
Including instruction information receiving means (payout control unit 17) for receiving information for instructing transmission of the update information;
Each time the information transmitting means receives information for instructing transmission of the update information, the information transmitting means updates the amount of change (current ball related information) from when the information was previously received until it is received this time Information is transmitted (values of the added ball counter and subtracted ball counter in FIG. 5, FIG. 44).

  According to such a configuration, in response to an instruction from the gaming device, update information indicating the amount of change with respect to the time when the previous update information was transmitted is transmitted from the gaming machine to the gaming device one by one. . Therefore, the gaming device can manage the latest score by updating the score with the update information transmitted one by one.

(1-4) The information transmission means transmits the score (the value of the game ball counter) stored in the auxiliary score storage means to the gaming device (the value of the game ball counter in FIG. 5). , FIG. 44),
The gaming device is:
Including determination means for determining the consistency between the points stored in the main holding point storage means and the points stored in the sub-point storage means (FIG. 5; determining the match of the number of game balls) ,
When the determination means determines that there is a mismatch, predetermined mismatch processing (error notification and recovery processing is performed by the display 312 and data correction request Bit2 is “1” (game ball correction ON) A communication start request including data on the number of game balls stored in the CU is transmitted to the P units, and the storage of the number of game balls in the P units is corrected to match the number of game balls of the CU.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to detect an abnormality in which the points stored on the gaming machine side do not match the points stored on the gaming device side. Furthermore, when such an abnormality occurs, it is possible to deal with the processing when an inconsistency occurs.

(1-5) The instruction information transmission means has the holding points stored in the main holding point storage means when the determination means determines that the inconsistency is inconsistent. Sending correction information (communication start request including game ball correction ON and the number of game balls) to the point to the gaming machine,
The instruction information transmission means transmits the correction information to the gaming machine (transmission of communication start request including game ball correction ON and number of game balls to P units),
The gaming machine corrects the holding points stored in the auxiliary holding point storage means based on the correction information (payout control unit 17; game ball number ON and game ball number ON) Compensation according to

  According to such a configuration, the points stored on the gaming device side and the gaming machine side due to anomalies in the size of the stored points on the gaming machine side due to cheating or other causes Even if the stored score does not match, the score stored on the gaming machine side can be corrected to the score stored on the gaming device side.

(1-6) The gaming machine is a ball game machine (pachinko machine 2),
The information transmitting means sequentially transmits the update information at an interval (FIG. 24; once every 200 ms) shorter than the game ball launch time interval (one shot at 0.6 s).

  According to such a configuration, since the update information is transmitted at an interval shorter than the game ball firing time interval, the amount of change in the point notified by the update information is made as small as possible. As a result, it is possible to notify the game device of the amount of change in the points in detail.

  (1-7) The gaming machine determines the remaining number of points necessary for continuing the game based on the remaining points stored in the sub-point storage unit (payout control). Part 17, FIG. 45).

  According to such a configuration, when the update information is not transmitted in time for determination, the points stored on the gaming device side and the actual points (the number of game balls stored on the gaming machine side) Even if there is a deviation between the two, a determination based on the actual score can be made.

(1-8) The instruction information transmitting means transmits information for instructing game prohibition to the gaming machine (operation instruction in FIGS. 48 to 50 (with prohibition request)),
When the gaming machine receives the information for instructing the game prohibition, the game prohibiting means (the payout control unit 17 stops driving the hitting ball launching motor 18, 48-49 "game prohibition").

  According to such a configuration, the prohibition of gaming by the gaming machine can be controlled on the gaming device side.

(1-9) The instruction information transmission means transmits information for instructing to set the value of the score stored in the auxiliary score storage means to the initial value to the gaming machine (FIG. 46, Operation instruction in FIG. 80 (with clear request)),
In the gaming machine, the sub-point storage means stores the information based on the fact that the instruction to set the value of the points stored in the sub-point storage means to the initial value is received. 46, FIG. 80 (the payout control unit 17 initializes the value of the game ball counter to 0) for initializing the value of the score.

  According to such a configuration, the points stored in the gaming machine can be instructed to be initialized on the gaming device side.

(1-10) Provided with a connection portion (connector 330) for communication with a gaming machine (pachinko machine 2) that can be played with points, and that is awarded in accordance with the occurrence of a prize, A gaming device (card unit 3) that adds points by using a player's own gaming value (prepaid balance, number of balls, or number of balls),
A score storage means for storing the score (RAM for storing “the number of game balls”);
Information receiving means (CU communication control unit 80) for receiving update information from the gaming machine that can specify the amount of change in points according to the use of the game and the occurrence of winnings;
A score update unit (main control unit 323) for updating the score stored in the score storage unit based on the update information.

  According to such a configuration, since the point management is performed on the gaming device side, it is not necessary to provide the point management function on the gaming machine side, and accordingly, the cost of the gaming machine can be suppressed as much as possible. .

  In particular, gaming machines tend to have a shorter replacement cycle in a game arcade than gaming devices in order to be able to provide more highly-oriented games quickly. For that reason, there is an advantage that the running cost of the game hall where the gaming machine is introduced can be reduced by holding the point management function not on the gaming machine side but on the gaming device side to reduce the cost of the gaming machine. is there.

  (1-11) When a signal requesting the end of a game (an operation signal for the return button 322) is input, the score that is determined by the score stored in the score storage means as the score at the end of the game The confirmation means (main control unit 323; FIG. 46) is included.

  According to such a configuration, since the points at the end of the game are determined on the gaming device side, there is no need to provide a point determination function on the gaming machine side, and the cost of the gaming machine is reduced as much as possible. Can be suppressed.

(1-12) When a score updated on the gaming machine side is received from the gaming machine in response to the use in a game and the occurrence of a prize, the received score and the score storage means Including determination means for determining consistency with the stored points (FIG. 5; determining match of the number of game balls);
When the determination means determines that there is a mismatch, predetermined mismatch processing (error notification and recovery processing is performed by the display 312 and data correction request Bit2 is “1” (game ball correction ON) A communication start request including data on the number of game balls stored in the CU is transmitted to the P units, and the storage of the number of game balls in the P units is corrected to match the number of game balls of the CU.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to detect an abnormality in which the points stored on the gaming machine side do not match the points stored on the gaming device side. Furthermore, when such an abnormality occurs, it is possible to deal with the processing when an inconsistency occurs.

  (1-13) The correction information for correcting the score stored in the gaming machine to the score stored in the score storage means when it is determined as inconsistent by the determination means It includes correction information transmission means (transmission of game ball correction ON and the number of game balls) for transmission to the gaming machine.

  According to such a configuration, the points stored on the gaming device side and the gaming machine side due to anomalies in the size of the stored points on the gaming machine side due to cheating or other causes Even if the stored score does not match, the score stored on the gaming machine side can be corrected to the score stored on the gaming device side.

(1-14) The gaming apparatus provides information for instructing transmission of the update information at an interval shorter than the game ball firing time interval (one shot at 0.6 s) in the gaming machine (FIG. 24; 200 ms). To the gaming machine in turn,
The score update means sequentially updates the score stored in the score storage means based on the update information sequentially received (main control unit 323, FIG. 44).

  According to such a configuration, the update information is transmitted at an interval shorter than the game ball firing time interval, so that the gaming measure has a detailed reflection of the change in the points on the gaming machine side. Point management is possible.

(2-1) The present invention is connected to a gaming machine (pachinko machine 2, slot machine 2S) in which a game is played by a player so as to be communicable with the gaming machine (connecting wiring with connectors 330, 20, 220), Receiving a recording medium (card) and using the valuable value (prepaid balance, number of balls, or number of balls) owned by the player specified by the recorded information recorded on the recording medium, A gaming system comprising a gaming device (card unit 3) to enable,
The gaming device is:
A recording medium receiving unit (card insertion / extraction port 309) for receiving the recording medium;
Player identification information reading means (such as a card reader / writer 327) for reading player identification information (C-ID or the like) for identifying a player who performs a game;
Player identification information transmission control means for performing control for transmitting the player identification information read by the player identification information reading means to the gaming machine (FIG. 39; transmitting an operation instruction including a C-ID after card insertion) CU communication control unit 80, S3) of FIG.
The gaming machine is
Player identification information storage means for storing the player identification information transmitted under the control of the player identification information transmission control means (FIGS. 6 and 119; current player game history data storage section of display effect control section 292) )When,
Based on the fact that the player identification information has been transmitted under the control of the player identification information transmission control means, the player identification information transmitted and the player identification stored in the player identification information storage means The same determination means (FIG. 40; S8, S9) which performs the same determination process which determines whether the same player is specified by information is included.

  According to such a configuration, when the player specifying information for specifying the player performing the game is read by the player specifying information reading means and the player specifying information is transmitted from the gaming device to the gaming machine. In the gaming machine, the player specifying information is stored, and then, when the player specifying information read by the player specifying information reading means is transmitted from the gaming device, the transmitted player Since the same determination process is performed to determine whether or not the same player is specified by the specific information and the already stored player specifying information, the identity of the previous player and the current player is the same It is possible to prevent the inconvenience of being regarded as the same player even though they are different players.

(2-2) In the gaming system of (2-1), the gaming device records the recording medium received by the recording medium receiving unit in response to a return operation of the recording medium. Including medium discharge means (card reader / writer 327 for discharging a card in FIG. 46);
The gaming machine collects game history data for each player specified by the player specifying information transmitted under the control of the player specifying information transmission control means (FIGS. 6, 119; A normal mode processing unit of the game history data management unit 291 and a current player game history data storage unit of the display effect control unit 292),
The game history data totaling means is configured such that after the recording medium is ejected by the recording medium ejecting means, the player specifying information is read by the player specifying information reading means and transmitted under the control of the player specifying information transmission control means. Based on what has been done, it is determined that they are the same, provided that the same determination means determines that they are the same (provided that Y is determined in FIG. 40; S9). It may be configured to include takeover counting means (FIG. 40; S12) for accumulating and totaling new game history data with respect to the game history data corresponding to the player.

  According to such a configuration, when the previous player and the current player are the same, the game history data of the current player with respect to the game history data aggregated as the game history data of the previous player When the player who has played a game once leaves the seat and returns to play again, the game history data before leaving the seat is determined to be the same player. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game history data from being interrupted before and after leaving the seat even though the player is the same player.

  (2-3) In the gaming system of (2-2) above, on the condition that the same determination means determines that they are not the same (FIG. 40; on the condition that N is determined in S9) ) And a game history data erasure unit (FIG. 40; S15) for erasing the game history data corresponding to the player specified by the player identification information stored in the player identification information storage unit. May be.

  According to such a configuration, when the previous player and the current player are not the same, the game history data corresponding to the previous player is deleted, so the game history data of the previous player Thus, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience of taking over and collecting the game history data of the player this time.

(2-4) In the game system according to (2-2) or (2-3), the game history data totaling means includes:
In-game data storage means (FIG. 6, FIG. 119; current player game history data storage unit of the display effect control unit 292) for storing the game history data of the player who is playing.
End data storage means for backing up the game history data of the player who has finished the game (FIGS. 6 and 119; backup data storage unit of display effect control unit 292)
In response to the discharge of the recording medium by the recording medium discharging means, the game history data stored in the in-game data storage means is backed up by the end data storage means as game history data of the player who has finished the game ( 6 and 119; upon receipt of the card return notification, the stored data in the current player game history data storage unit is shifted to the backup data storage unit and stored), and the same determination means determines that they are the same. Data storage switching means for switching to a state in which the game history data backed up by the end data storage means is stored in the game data storage means as the game history data of the player who is playing a game (FIG. 6, FIG. 119, FIG. 40; S12).

  According to such a configuration, when it is determined by the same determination means that the players are the same, the game history data backed up by the end data storage means is stored in the in-game data storage means of the player who is playing the game. In order to switch to a state of storing as game history data, in subsequent games, the game history data stored in the in-game data storage means is taken over, and new game history data is added and updated to be accumulated and stored. Can do.

(2-5) In the game system according to any one of (2-1) to (2-4) above, the player specifying information is an ID (C-ID) for recording medium identification recorded on the recording medium. And
The player specifying information reading means reads the recording medium identifying ID recorded on the recording medium received by the recording medium receiving unit as the player specifying information (FIG. 39; C− of the inserted card). The card reader / writer 327 may read the ID).

  According to such a configuration, since the ID for identifying the recording medium recorded on the recording medium received by the recording medium receiving unit is read by the player specifying information reading means as the player specifying information, the player can play the game In inputting the player specifying information, the player specifying information can be input by performing an operation of allowing the gaming device to receive the recording medium so as to play the game. The player specifying information input operation is performed separately from the receiving of the recording medium. It is possible to prevent the inconvenience of forcing the player.

(2-6) In the game system according to any one of (2-1) to (2-5), the game device includes:
A recording medium ejecting means (card reader / writer 327 for ejecting a card in FIG. 46) for ejecting the recording medium received by the recording medium accepting unit in response to a return operation of the recording medium;
Game interruption operation accepting means (IR photosensitive unit 320 for accepting interruption operation (remote control operation) in FIG. 47) for accepting an operation to interrupt the game;
When an operation for interrupting a game is accepted by the game interruption operation accepting means, an interruption control means for performing a process of prohibiting a game by another player until the game is resumed by the player who has played the game before the interruption ( FIG. 40; S1, S2, S5)
The same determination means transmits the player specifying information under the control of the player specifying information transmission control means after the recording medium is discharged by the recording medium discharging means without an operation for interrupting the game. Based on this, the same determination processing is performed (FIG. 40; N → S3 → S8, S9 in S1).

  According to such a configuration, when the player leaves the seat due to small use etc., it is possible to enter an interrupted state in which a game by another player is prohibited until the game is resumed by performing the interrupt operation. . However, since the same determination process is performed when the player returns and starts playing without performing such an interruption operation, the identity of the previous player and the current player is reduced. This makes it possible to prevent the inconvenience of being regarded as the same player even though they are different players.

  (2-7) In the gaming system according to any one of (2-1) to (2-6), the gaming machine performs the same control for transmitting the determination result by the same determining means to the gaming device. The determination result transmission control means (FIG. 40; S7, S14) may be included.

  According to such a configuration, since the determination result by the same determination means is transmitted to the gaming device, the determination result of the identity of the player can be grasped on the gaming device side.

  (2-8) In the gaming system according to any one of (2-2) to (2-4), the takeover counting means is configured such that the member recording medium issued to a member player is the recording medium receiving unit. New game history data is accumulated and totaled for the game history data corresponding to the players determined to be the same on the condition that they are accepted (FIGS. 6, 119; only in the case of the C-ID of the membership card) It may be configured to store the current player game history data and add the game history).

  According to such a configuration, new game history data is accumulated with respect to the game history data corresponding to the player determined to be identical on the condition that the recording medium for the member is received by the recording medium receiving unit. Therefore, the advantage of taking over the game history data can be limited to the member players, and the player can be promoted to become a member.

(2-9) Another aspect of the present invention includes a communication unit (FIG. 4; CU communication control unit 80) for communicating with a gaming machine (pachinko machine 2, slot machine 2S) in which a game is played by a player. A gaming device (card unit 3) that enables a game in the gaming machine using a player's own gaming value (prepaid balance, number of balls, or number of balls),
A recording medium receiving unit (card insertion / extraction port 309) for receiving the recording medium;
Player specifying information reading means (such as a card reader / writer 327) for reading player specifying information (C-ID or the like) for specifying a player who plays a game with the gaming machine;
Player identification information transmission control means for performing control for transmitting the player identification information read by the player identification information reading means to the gaming machine (FIG. 39; transmitting an operation instruction including a C-ID after card insertion) CU communication control unit 80, S3) of FIG.
The player specifying information transmission control means performs control to transmit the player specifying information to the gaming machine as information for causing the gaming machine to determine the identity of the player (C-ID to P machines). Control to transmit).

  According to such a configuration, the player specifying information for specifying the player who performs the game is read by the player specifying information reading means, and the player specifying information is transmitted from the gaming device to the gaming machine. Since the player identification information is transmitted to the gaming machine as information for causing the gaming machine to determine the identity of the player, the gaming machine stores the player identification information sent earlier, When the player identification information read by the player identification information reading means is transmitted from the gaming apparatus, the same game is determined by the transmitted player identification information and the already stored player identification information. It is possible to perform the same determination process for determining whether or not a player is specified, and it is possible to determine the identity of the previous player and the current player, and the same regardless of being different players. Think of it as a player It is possible to prevent the convenience.

(2-10) In the gaming machine according to (2-9), the player specifying information is a recording medium identification ID (C-ID) recorded on the recording medium,
The player specifying information reading means reads the recording medium identifying ID recorded on the recording medium received by the recording medium receiving unit as player specifying information (FIG. 39; C-ID of the inserted card). The card reader / writer 327 may read the data.

  According to such a configuration, since the recording medium identification ID recorded on the recording medium received by the recording medium receiving unit is read as the player specifying information, the player inputs the player specifying information. The player specifying information can be input by performing an operation of allowing the gaming device to receive the recording medium for playing the game, and the player is forced to input the player specifying information separately from the reception of the recording medium. Can be prevented.

(2-11) In the gaming apparatus according to (2-9) or (2-10), recording for discharging the recording medium received by the recording medium receiving unit in response to a return operation of the recording medium Medium ejecting means (card reader / writer 327 for ejecting the card in FIG. 46);
Game interruption operation accepting means (IR photosensitive unit 320 for accepting interruption operation (remote control operation) in FIG. 47) for accepting an operation to interrupt the game;
When an operation for interrupting a game is accepted by the game interruption operation accepting means, an interruption control means for performing a process of prohibiting a game by another player until the game is resumed by the player who has played the game before the interruption ( FIG. 40; S1, S2, S5)
The player specifying information transmission control means is configured to read the player specifying information read by the player specifying information reading means after the recording medium is discharged by the recording medium discharging means without performing an operation of causing the game to be in the middle stage. It may be configured to perform control to transmit information to the gaming machine (FIG. 40; S3).

  According to such a configuration, when the player leaves the seat due to small use etc., it is possible to enter an interrupted state in which a game by another player is prohibited until the game is resumed by performing the interrupt operation. . However, since the same determination process is performed when the player returns and starts playing without performing such an interruption operation, the identity of the previous player and the current player is reduced. This makes it possible to prevent the inconvenience of being regarded as the same player even though they are different players.

(2-12) In the gaming device according to any one of (2-9) to (2-11), the recording medium received by the recording medium reception unit in response to a return operation of the recording medium A recording medium discharging means for discharging (a card reader / writer 327 for discharging a card in FIG. 46);
After the player specifying information is read by the player specifying information reading means after the recording medium is discharged and the player specifying information transmission control means transmits the player specifying information to the gaming machine, Identity to receive from the gaming machine an identity determination result between a player who has played a game before discharging the recording medium by the recording medium discharging means and a player who will play a game after discharging the recording medium The determination result receiving means (FIG. 40; CU communication control unit 80 for receiving the information transmitted in S15 and S14) may be included.

  According to such a configuration, in order to receive the determination result by the same determination means from the gaming machine, it is possible to grasp the determination result of the identity of the player on the gaming device side.

  (2-13) In the gaming device according to any one of (9) to (12), the player specifying information reading means is configured such that a member recording medium issued to a member player is stored in the recording medium receiving unit. The player specifying information may be read on condition that it is accepted (the C-ID is recorded only on the member recording medium).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to read the player specifying information and perform the same determination process on condition that the recording medium for members is received by the recording medium receiving unit.

(2-14) Still another aspect of the present invention is that a player possesses a valuable value (a prepaid balance, a number of possessed balls, etc.) specified by recorded information received on a recording medium (card). Or a gaming machine (pachinko machine 2, slot machine 2S) provided with a communication unit (P-unit communication control unit 81) that communicates with a gaming device (card unit 3) that makes the number of stored balls) usable for gaming,
Player specifying information storage means for receiving and storing player specifying information (C-ID or the like) specifying a player who performs a game (FIG. 6, FIG. 119; current player game history data of display effect control unit 292) Memory)
Same determination means for performing the same determination process for determining whether or not the same player is specified by the received player specification information and the player specification information stored in the player specification information storage means (FIG. 40). S8, S9).

  According to such a configuration, player specifying information for specifying a player who performs a game is stored, and then the same player is specified by the received player specifying information and the already stored player specifying information. Since the same determination process is performed to determine whether or not, the identity of the previous player and the current player can be determined, and even though they are different players, they are regarded as the same player. Inconvenience can be prevented.

(2-15) In the gaming machine of the above (2-14), game history data totaling means for totalizing game history data for each player specified by the received player specifying information (FIGS. 6, 119; game history) A normal mode processing unit of the data management unit 291 and a current player game history data storage unit of the display effect control unit 292),
The game history data totaling means is determined to be the same on condition that the same determination means determines that they are the same (provided that Y is determined in FIG. 40; S9). Inheritance counting means (FIG. 40; S12) for accumulating and totaling new game history data with respect to the game history data corresponding to the player is included.

  According to such a configuration, new game history data is accumulated for the game history data corresponding to the player determined to be the same on condition that the previous player and the current player are the same. Therefore, when a player who has played a game once leaves the seat and returns to play again, it is determined that the player is the same player, and the game history data before leaving the seat is taken over. Thus, cumulative accumulation of game history data becomes possible, and it is possible to prevent the inconvenience that the game history data is interrupted before and after leaving the seat even though they are the same player.

(2-16) In the gaming machine of the above (2-15), the game history data totaling means
In-game data storage means (FIG. 6, FIG. 119; current player game history data storage unit of the display effect control unit 292) for storing the game history data of the player who is playing.
End data storage means for backing up the game history data of the player who has finished the game (FIGS. 6 and 119; backup data storage unit of display effect control unit 292)
In response to ejection of the recording medium from the gaming device, the game history data stored in the in-game data storage means is backed up by the end data storage means as game history data of the player who has finished the game. (FIG. 6, FIG. 119; upon receipt of the card return notification, the stored data of the current player game history data storage unit is shifted to the backup data storage unit and stored), and the same determination means determines that they are the same Is switched to a state in which the game history data backed up by the end data storage means is stored as the game history data of the player who is playing the game by the in-game data storage means (FIG. 6). 119, FIG. 40; S12).

  According to such a configuration, when it is determined by the same determination means that the players are the same, the game history data backed up by the end data storage means is stored in the in-game data storage means of the player who is playing the game. In order to switch to a state of storing as game history data, in subsequent games, the game history data stored in the in-game data storage means is taken over, and new game history data is added and updated to be accumulated and stored. Can do.

  (2-17) In the gaming machine of (2-15) or (2-16) above, stored in the player specifying information storage means on condition that the same determination means determines that they are not the same. It may be configured to include game history data erasure means (FIG. 40; S15) for erasing the game history data corresponding to the player specified by the specified player specifying information.

  According to such a configuration, when the previous player and the current player are not the same, the game history data corresponding to the previous player is deleted, so the game history data of the previous player Thus, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience of taking over and collecting the game history data of the player this time.

  (2-18) In the gaming machine according to any one of (2-14) to (2-17) above, the same determination means suspends the game and resumes the game by the player who played the game before the interruption. When the player specifying information is received after the recording medium is ejected without performing the middle stage operation to enter a suspended state for prohibiting the game by other players, the same determination process is performed (FIG. 40). N → S3 → S8, S9) in S1.

  According to such a configuration, when the player leaves the seat due to small use etc., it is possible to enter an interrupted state in which a game by another player is prohibited until the game is resumed by performing the interrupt operation. . However, since the same determination process is performed when the player returns and starts playing without performing such an interruption operation, the identity of the previous player and the current player is reduced. This makes it possible to prevent the inconvenience of being regarded as the same player even though they are different players.

  (2-19) In the gaming machine of any one of (2-14) to (2-18) above, the same determination result transmission control means for performing control to transmit the determination result by the same determination means to the gaming device ( FIG. 40; S7, S14) may be included.

  According to such a configuration, since the determination result by the same determination means is transmitted to the gaming device, the determination result of the identity of the player can be grasped on the gaming device side.

  (2-20) In any one of the above gaming machines (2-15) to (2-17), the takeover counting means accepts a member recording medium issued to a member player to the gaming device. The new game history data is accumulated and totaled for the game history data corresponding to the players determined to be the same on the condition that the player is determined to be the same (FIGS. 6, 119; current game only in the case of the C-ID of the membership card). The game history data may be stored in the player game history data and the game history may be aggregated).

  According to such a configuration, new game history data is accumulated with respect to the game history data corresponding to the player determined to be identical on the condition that the recording medium for the member is received by the recording medium receiving unit. Therefore, the advantage of taking over the game history data can be limited to the member players, and the player can be promoted to become a member.

(3-1) The present invention is connected to a gaming machine (pachinko machine 2, slot machine 2S) in which a game is performed by a player so as to be communicable with the gaming machine (connecting wiring with connectors 330, 20, 220), Receiving a recording medium (card) and using the valuable value (prepaid balance, number of balls, or number of balls) owned by the player specified by the recorded information recorded on the recording medium, A gaming system comprising a gaming device (card unit 3) to enable,
The gaming device is:
A recording medium receiving unit (card insertion / extraction port 309) for receiving the recording medium;
Player identification information reading means (such as a card reader / writer 327) for reading player identification information (C-ID or the like) for identifying a player who performs a game;
Player identification information storage means for storing the player identification information read by the player identification information reading means (FIGS. 121 and 122; current player game history data storage section of the game data storage section 392);
The same determination for determining whether or not the same player is specified by the player specifying information read by the player specifying information reading means and the player specifying information stored in the player specifying information storage means The same determination means (FIG. 123; S20) which performs processing,
The gaming device transmits to the gaming machine command information indicating that the same determination means determines that they are the same (FIGS. 121, 122, 123; S21 transmits a command). ,
The gaming machine performs predetermined processing (FIG. 121, FIG. 122; processing for returning the game history data in the backup data storage unit to the current player game history data storage unit) based on the reception of the command information.

  According to such a configuration, the player specifying information for specifying the player performing the game is read by the player specifying information reading means, and the player specifying information is the same as the player specifying information already stored. Since the same determination process for determining whether or not a player is specified is performed, it is possible to determine the identity of the previous player and the current player, and the same game despite being different players. Can be prevented from being regarded as a person.

(3-2) In the gaming system according to (3-1), the gaming machine is configured to collect gaming history data for each player (FIGS. 121 and 122; gaming history data management unit 291). Current player game history data storage unit of the normal mode processing unit and display effect control unit 292),
The game history data totaling means sets a new game history for the game history data corresponding to the player determined to be the same on condition that the command information has been received (FIG. 123; determined to be Y by S22). It may be configured to include takeover counting means (FIG. 123; S12) for executing the process of accumulating and totaling data as the predetermined process.

  According to such a configuration, when the previous player and the current player are the same, the game history data of the current player with respect to the game history data aggregated as the game history data of the previous player When the player who has played a game once leaves the seat and returns to play again, the game history data before leaving the seat is determined to be the same player. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game history data from being interrupted before and after leaving the seat even though the player is the same player.

(3-3) In the gaming system according to (3-1) or (3-2), the gaming device includes:
A recording medium ejecting means (card reader / writer 327 for ejecting a card in FIG. 46) for ejecting the recording medium received by the recording medium accepting unit in response to a return operation of the recording medium;
Even after the recording medium is ejected by the recording medium ejecting means, game history data storage means for storing game history data of a player who has played a game before ejecting the recording medium (FIG. 121, FIG. 122; the current player game history data storage unit of the data storage unit 392),
The previous player's game history data stored in the game history data storage means may be transmitted to the gaming machine as the command information (FIGS. 121, 122; current command instead of the same command). The game history a stored in the player game history data storage unit may be transmitted).

  According to such a configuration, when the previous player and the current player are the same, the game history data of the previous player is transmitted to the gaming machine. The game history data of the current player can be accumulated and totaled with respect to the received game history data, so that the player who has played a game once leaves the seat and returns again to resume the game. Therefore, it is possible to accumulate the game history data by taking over the game history data before leaving after being determined to be the same player, and the game history data before and after leaving the seat despite being the same player. The inconvenience of being interrupted can be prevented.

(3-4) In the gaming system according to (3-2), the gaming device records the recording medium received by the recording medium receiving unit in response to a return operation of the recording medium. Including medium discharge means (card reader / writer 327 for discharging a card in FIG. 46);
The game history data totaling means is
In-game data storage means (FIG. 121, FIG. 122; current player game history data storage unit of the display effect control unit 292) for storing game history data of the player who is playing
End data storage means (FIG. 121, FIG. 122; backup data storage unit of the display effect control unit 292) for backing up the game history data of the player who has finished the game,
In response to the discharge of the recording medium by the recording medium discharging means, the game history data stored in the in-game data storage means is backed up by the end data storage means as game history data of the player who has finished the game ( 121, 122; upon receipt of the card return notification, the stored data in the current player game history data storage unit is shifted to the backup data storage unit and stored), and the same determination means determines that they are the same. Data storage switching means for switching to a state in which the game history data backed up by the end data storage means is stored in the game data storage means as the game history data of the player who is playing the game (FIG. 121, FIG. 122, FIG. 123; S12).

  According to such a configuration, when it is determined by the same determination means that the players are the same, the game history data backed up by the end data storage means is stored in the in-game data storage means of the player who is playing the game. In order to switch to a state of storing as game history data, in subsequent games, the game history data stored in the in-game data storage means is taken over, and new game history data is added and updated to be accumulated and stored. Can do.

(3-5) The gaming apparatus, in response to a return operation of the recording medium, records medium ejecting means for ejecting the recording medium received by the recording medium accepting unit (the card for card ejection in FIG. 46). Reader / writer 327),
In the gaming machine, when the game is resumed after the recording medium is ejected by the recording medium ejecting means, the command information is not transmitted from the gaming device (FIG. 123; a different command has been transmitted). And a game history data erasure unit (FIG. 123; S15) for erasing the game history data of the player who has played the game before discharging the recording medium on the condition that N is determined in S22) May be configured.

  According to such a configuration, when a different player starts playing after the player who has played a game leaves the game history data of the player who has left the seat is erased, the previous player The game history data of a new player can be newly added up without taking over the game history data.

(3-6) In the game system according to any one of (3-1) to (3-5), the player specifying information is an ID (C-ID) for recording medium identification recorded on the recording medium. And
The player specifying information reading means reads the recording medium identifying ID recorded on the recording medium received by the recording medium receiving unit as the player specifying information (FIG. 39; C− of the inserted card). The card reader / writer 327 may read the ID).

  According to such a configuration, since the ID for identifying the recording medium recorded on the recording medium received by the recording medium receiving unit is read by the player specifying information reading means as the player specifying information, the player can play the game In inputting the player specifying information, the player specifying information can be input by performing an operation of allowing the gaming device to receive the recording medium so as to play the game. The player specifying information input operation is performed separately from the receiving of the recording medium. It is possible to prevent the inconvenience of forcing the player.

(3-7) In the game system according to any one of (3-1) to (3-6), the game device includes:
A recording medium ejecting means (card reader / writer 327 for ejecting a card in FIG. 46) for ejecting the recording medium received by the recording medium accepting unit in response to a return operation of the recording medium;
Game interruption operation accepting means (IR photosensitive unit 320 for accepting interruption operation (remote control operation) in FIG. 47) for accepting an operation to interrupt the game;
When an operation for interrupting a game is accepted by the game interruption operation accepting means, an interruption control means for performing a process of prohibiting a game by another player until the game is resumed by the player who has played the game before the interruption ( FIG. 40; S1, S2, S5)
The same determination means transmits the player specifying information under the control of the player specifying information transmission control means after the recording medium is discharged by the recording medium discharging means without an operation for interrupting the game. Based on what has been done, the same determination process may be performed (FIG. 123; N → S20 in S1).

  According to such a configuration, when the player leaves the seat due to small use etc., it is possible to enter an interrupted state in which a game by another player is prohibited until the game is resumed by performing the interrupt operation. . However, since the same determination process is performed when the player returns and starts playing without performing such an interruption operation, the identity of the previous player and the current player is reduced. This makes it possible to prevent the inconvenience of being regarded as the same player even though they are different players.

  (3-8) In the gaming system according to any one of (3-2) to (3-7), the takeover counting means is configured such that the member recording medium issued to a member player is the recording medium receiving unit. New game history data is accumulated and totaled with respect to the game history data corresponding to the players determined to be the same on condition that they are accepted (FIGS. 121 and 122; only in the case of the C-ID of the membership card) It may be configured to store the current player game history data and add the game history).

  According to such a configuration, new game history data is accumulated with respect to the game history data corresponding to the player determined to be identical on the condition that the recording medium for the member is received by the recording medium receiving unit. Therefore, the advantage of taking over the game history data can be limited to the member players, and the player can be promoted to become a member.

(3-9) Another aspect of the present invention includes a communication unit (FIG. 4; CU communication control unit 80) for communicating with a gaming machine (pachinko machine 2, slot machine 2S) in which a game is played by a player. A gaming device (card unit 3) that enables a game in the gaming machine using a player's own gaming value (prepaid balance, number of balls, or number of balls),
A recording medium receiving unit (card insertion / extraction port 309) for receiving the recording medium;
Player identification information reading means (such as a card reader / writer 327) for reading player identification information (C-ID or the like) for identifying a player who performs a game;
Player identification information storage means for storing the player identification information read by the player identification information reading means (FIGS. 121 and 122; current player game history data storage section of the game data storage section 392);
Same determination means for performing the same determination process for determining whether or not the same player is specified by the player specification information and the player specification information stored in the player specification information storage means (FIG. 123; S20) )When,
Command information transmission control means (FIG. 121, FIG. 122, FIG. 123; S21) for performing control to transmit command information indicating that the same judgment means has made the same judgment to the gaming machine. .

  According to such a configuration, the player specifying information for specifying the player performing the game is read by the player specifying information reading means, and the player specifying information is the same as the player specifying information already stored. Since the same determination process for determining whether or not a player is specified is performed, it is possible to determine the identity of the previous player and the current player, and the same game despite being different players. Can be prevented from being regarded as a person.

(3-10) In the gaming machine according to (3-9), the player specifying information is a recording medium identification ID (C-ID) recorded on the recording medium,
The player specifying information reading means reads the recording medium identifying ID recorded on the recording medium received by the recording medium receiving unit as player specifying information (FIG. 39; C-ID of the inserted card). The card reader / writer 327 may read the data.

  According to such a configuration, since the recording medium identification ID recorded on the recording medium received by the recording medium receiving unit is read as the player specifying information, the player inputs the player specifying information. The player specifying information can be input by performing an operation of allowing the gaming device to receive the recording medium for playing the game, and the player is forced to input the player specifying information separately from the reception of the recording medium. Can be prevented.

(3-11) In the gaming apparatus according to (3-9) or (3-10), recording for discharging the recording medium received by the recording medium receiving unit in response to a return operation of the recording medium Medium ejecting means (card reader / writer 327 for ejecting the card in FIG. 46);
Even after the recording medium is ejected by the recording medium ejecting means, game history data storage means for storing game history data of a player who has played a game before ejecting the recording medium (FIG. 121, FIG. 122; the current player game history data storage unit of the data storage unit 392),
The previous player's game history data stored in the game history data storage means may be transmitted to the gaming machine as the command information (FIGS. 121, 122; current command instead of the same command). The game history a stored in the player game history data storage unit may be transmitted).

  According to such a configuration, when the previous player and the current player are the same, the game history data of the previous player is transmitted to the gaming machine. The game history data of the current player can be accumulated and totaled with respect to the received game history data, so that the player who has played a game once leaves the seat and returns again to resume the game. Therefore, it is possible to accumulate the game history data by taking over the game history data before leaving after being determined to be the same player, and the game history data before and after leaving the seat despite being the same player. The inconvenience of being interrupted can be prevented.

(3-12) In the gaming apparatus according to (3-9) to (3-11) above, a recording for discharging the recording medium received by the recording medium reception unit in response to a return operation of the recording medium Medium ejecting means (card reader / writer 327 for ejecting the card in FIG. 46);
Game interruption operation accepting means (IR photosensitive unit 320 for accepting interruption operation (remote control operation) in FIG. 47) for accepting an operation to interrupt the game;
When an operation for interrupting a game is accepted by the game interrupting operation accepting means, a process of controlling to an interrupted state in which a game by another player is prohibited until the game is resumed by the player who had played the game before the interruption Interrupt control means to perform (FIG. 123; S1, S2, S5),
In the same determination unit, the player specifying information is read by the player specifying information reading unit after the recording medium is discharged by the recording medium discharging unit without an operation of interrupting the game. The same determination process may be performed based on (FIG. 123; N in S1 → S20).

  According to such a configuration, when the player leaves the seat due to small use etc., it is possible to enter an interrupted state in which a game by another player is prohibited until the game is resumed by performing the interrupt operation. . However, since the same determination process is performed when the player returns and starts playing without performing such an interruption operation, the identity of the previous player and the current player is reduced. This makes it possible to prevent the inconvenience of being regarded as the same player even though they are different players.

  (3-13) In the gaming apparatus according to any one of (3-9) to (3-12), the player specifying information reading means is configured such that the member recording medium issued to a member player records the recording medium. The player specifying information may be read (provided that the C-ID is recorded only on the member recording medium) on condition that it is received by the medium receiving unit.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to read the player specifying information and perform the same determination process on condition that the recording medium for members is received by the recording medium receiving unit.

(4-1) The present invention accepts a recording medium (card) and stores a player's valuable value (prepaid balance, number of balls, or number of balls) specified by the recorded information recorded on the recording medium. A communication unit (P-unit communication control unit 81, S-unit communication control unit 82) that communicates with a gaming device (card unit 3) that can be used for gaming is provided, and gaming is performed by launching gaming media in the gaming area. A gaming machine (pachinko machine 2, slot machine 2S),
Game history data totaling means for totalizing game history data for each player (FIGS. 121 and 122; normal mode processing unit of game history data management unit 291 and current player game history data storage unit of display effect control unit 292) When,
Game history data storage means (FIG. 121, FIG. 122; current player game history data storage section and backup data storage section of the game data storage section 392) for storing the game history data aggregated by the game history data aggregation means. Including
The game history data totaling means is based on the condition that command information (same command) indicating that it is the same player has been received from the gaming device (FIG. 123; determination of Y is made in S22). Inheritance counting means (FIG. 123; S12) for accumulating and totaling new game history data with respect to the game history data stored in the history data storage means.

  According to such a configuration, when the previous player and the current player are the same, the game history data of the current player with respect to the game history data aggregated as the game history data of the previous player When the player who has played a game once leaves the seat and returns to play again, the game history data before leaving the seat is determined to be the same player. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game history data from being interrupted before and after leaving the seat even though the player is the same player.

  (4-2) In the gaming machine of (4-1), when the game is resumed after the recording medium is ejected, the command information is not transmitted from the gaming device (FIG. 123; difference Game history data erasure means for erasing the game history data of the player who had played the game before the recording medium was discharged on condition that the command was transmitted and N was determined in S22) (FIG. 123; S15) may be included.

  According to such a configuration, when the previous player and the current player are the same, the game history data of the previous player is transmitted to the gaming machine. The game history data of the current player can be accumulated and totaled with respect to the received game history data, so that the player who has played a game once leaves the seat and returns again to resume the game. Therefore, it is possible to accumulate the game history data by taking over the game history data before leaving after being determined to be the same player, and the game history data before and after leaving the seat despite being the same player. The inconvenience of being interrupted can be prevented.

(4-3) In the gaming machine of the above (4-1) or (4-2), the gaming history data totaling means includes:
In-game data storage means (FIG. 121, FIG. 122; current player game history data storage unit of the display effect control unit 292) for storing game history data of the player who is playing
End data storage means (FIG. 121, FIG. 122; backup data storage unit of the display effect control unit 292) for backing up the game history data of the player who has finished the game,
In response to ejection of the recording medium from the gaming device, the game history data stored in the in-game data storage means is backed up by the end data storage means as game history data of the player who has finished the game. (FIGS. 121 and 122; upon receipt of the card return notification, the stored data of the current player game history data storage unit is shifted to the backup data storage unit and stored), and the command information is received from the gaming device. Data storage switching means for switching to a state in which the game history data backed up by the end data storage means is stored in the game data storage means as the game history data of the player who is playing the game (FIGS. 121, 122, FIG. 123; S12) may be included.

  According to such a configuration, when it is determined that the players are the same, the game history data backed up by the end data storage means is used as the game history data of the player who is playing the game by the in-game data storage means. Since the game state is switched to the state to be stored, the game history data stored in the in-game data storage means can be taken over in subsequent games, and new game history data can be added and updated to be accumulated and stored.

  (4-4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (4-1) to (4-3), the takeover counting means accepts a member recording medium issued to a member player to the gaming device. On the condition that the game history data is stored, the game history data of the member stored in the game history data storage means is accumulated and added to the new game history data (FIGS. 121, 122; C- Only in the case of ID, the current player game history data is stored and the game history is totaled).

  According to such a configuration, new game history data is accumulated with respect to the game history data corresponding to the player determined to be identical on the condition that the recording medium for the member is received by the recording medium receiving unit. Therefore, the advantage of taking over the game history data can be limited to the member players, and the player can be promoted to become a member.

(5-1) In the present invention, a game with a score is possible, and a gaming value (pachinko machine 2, slot machine 2S) to which a score is added according to the occurrence of a prize, and a game value owned by the player A gaming device (card unit 3) that adds points by using (the prepaid balance, the number of balls, or the number of balls) and is connected so as to be communicable with the gaming machine (connecting wiring with the connectors 330, 20, 220) A gaming system comprising:
The gaming machine is
Gaming machine side communication means (P-unit communication control unit 81, S-unit communication control unit 82) for communicating with the gaming device;
Specific means (microcomputer for game machine control, addition ball counter, subtraction ball counter, addition number) for identifying the amount of change in points (number of balls to be added, number of balls to be subtracted) depending on the use of the game and the occurrence of winnings Counter, subtraction number counter)
Sub-point storage means for storing points (game ball counter, point counter),
Sub-point update means (payout control unit 17, payout control unit 117) for updating the points stored in the sub-point storage unit according to the amount of change;
Information transmission control means (FIG. 44; number of added balls, number of subtracted balls) for performing control to transmit the update information that can identify the amount of change and the score stored in the secondary score storage means to the gaming device. , Send an action response containing the number of game balls),
Player identification information storage means (FIG. 6, FIG. 119; current game of display effect control unit 292) that stores player identification information (C-ID or the like) that can identify a player who is playing a game on the gaming machine. Game history data storage unit),
Player identification information transmission control means (FIG. 27, FIG. 27) for controlling to transmit the player identification information stored in the player identification information storage means to the gaming apparatus at the start of communication with the gaming apparatus. 37, 65 to 82; send a recovery response including the C-ID),
The gaming device is:
Main point storage means for storing points (RAM for storing “number of game balls”, RAM for storing “number of points”);
Information receiving means (CU communication control unit 80) for receiving the update information;
A score update unit (main control unit 323) for updating the score stored in the main score storage unit based on the update information;
Player identification information reading means (such as a card reader / writer 327) for reading the player identification information;
The player identification information read by the player identification information reading means and the player identification information transmitted by the control of the player identification information transmission control means when communication is started with the connection to the gaming machine The same determination means for determining whether or not the same player is specified (FIGS. 68 to 70, 73, 74, 77, 78, and 81; the C-ID included in the recovery response) A main control unit 323) for determining the identity with the C-ID of the inserted card;
When the same determination means determines that the points are the same, the score storage control is performed to store the score transmitted by the control of the information transmission control means as the current score in the main possession point storage means. Storage control means (steps indicated by broken lines in FIGS. 68 to 70, 73, 74, 77, 78, and 81).

  According to such a configuration, when the gaming device is connected to the gaming machine and communication is started, the player identification information transmitted from the gaming device and the player read by the player identification information reading means It is determined whether or not the same player is specified based on the specific information. When it is determined that the same player is the same, the stored points on the game machine side are used as the current points to store the main points Therefore, the player specifying information reading means reads the player specifying information so as to continue the game by the same player as the player before the game apparatus is connected to the gaming machine and communication is started. In the case where the game is determined to be the same by the same determination means, the points of the player who played the game before the start of communication are stored in the main point storage means of the game device after the communication is started and taken over. The player is not disadvantaged. It is possible to continue with the game.

  (5-2) In the gaming system of (5-1), the storage control means communicates until a predetermined time (20 minutes) elapses after communication between the gaming machine and the gaming device is interrupted. On the condition that the starting point is started, the score storage control may be performed (the backup value is not corrected if 20 minutes or more have elapsed even if it is determined that the C-IDs are the same). .

  According to such a configuration, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the communication between the gaming machine and the gaming device is interrupted, the transmitted score is stored in the main score storage means as the current score. Since the holding point storage control is not performed, for example, it is possible to prevent waste of performing the holding point storage control even when a time far exceeding the replacement work time for replacing with a new gaming device has elapsed.

(5-3) In the gaming system according to (5-1) or (5-2), the information transmission control means uses the update information and the points stored in the sub-point storage means. Control to send to the gaming device periodically (Figure 24; every 200ms),
The gaming device is:
Determining means for determining the consistency between the regularly transmitted points and the points stored in the main point storing means (FIG. 5, FIG. 118; determining whether the number of game balls or points matches) When,
When the determination means determines that the inconsistency is inconsistent, correction information for correcting the score stored in the auxiliary score storage means to the score stored in the main score storage means is the gaming machine. (Send correction command)
The gaming machine corrects the score stored in the secondary score storage unit based on the transmitted correction information (the payout control unit 17 corrects the number of game balls according to the correction instruction command). The payout control unit 117 may be configured to include the correction of the number of points according to the correction instruction command.

  According to such a configuration, the points stored on the gaming device side and the gaming machine side due to anomalies in the size of the stored points on the gaming machine side due to cheating or other causes Even if the stored score does not match, the score stored on the gaming machine side can be corrected to the score stored on the gaming device side.

(5-4) According to another aspect of the present invention, a communication unit that communicates with a gaming machine (pachinko machine 2, slot machine 2S) that can be played with points and that has points added in accordance with the occurrence of a prize ( A gaming device (card unit 3) that includes a CU communication control unit 80) and adds points using a player's own gaming value (prepaid balance, number of balls, or number of balls),
A point storage means for storing points (RAM for storing “number of game balls”, RAM for storing “number of points”);
A player specifying information reading means (such as a card reader / writer 327) for reading player specifying information (C-ID or the like) for specifying a player who plays a game with the gaming machine;
The communication unit updates information that can identify the amount of change in points according to the use of a game and the occurrence of a prize, and the possession that is updated on the gaming machine side according to the use of the game and the occurrence of a prize. Point and the player specifying information stored in the gaming machine are received from the gaming machine (FIG. 44; an operation response including the number of added balls, the number of subtracted balls, the number of game balls is received),
The gaming device further includes:
A score update unit (main control unit 323) for updating the score stored in the score storage unit based on the update information received by the communication unit;
When communication is started after being connected to the gaming machine, the same player is specified by the player specifying information read by the player specifying information reading means and the player specifying information received by the communication unit. Identical determination means for determining whether or not to be performed (FIGS. 68 to 70, 73, 74, 77, 78, and 81; C-ID included in the recovery response and C-ID of the inserted card) A main control unit 323) for determining the identity with
Storage control means for performing a score storage control for storing the score received by the communication unit as a current score in the score storage means when the same determination means determines that they are the same (see FIG. 68 to 70, 73, 74, 77, 78, and 81).

  According to such a configuration, since the point management is performed on the gaming device side, it is not necessary to provide the point management function on the gaming machine side, and accordingly, the cost of the gaming machine can be suppressed as much as possible. .

  In particular, gaming machines tend to have a shorter replacement cycle in a game arcade than gaming devices in order to be able to provide more highly-oriented games quickly. For that reason, there is an advantage that the running cost of the game hall where the gaming machine is introduced can be reduced by holding the point management function not on the gaming machine side but on the gaming device side to reduce the cost of the gaming machine. is there.

  In addition, when the gaming device is connected to the gaming machine and communication is started, the player identification information transmitted from the gaming device and the player identification information read by the player identification information reading means are the same. It is determined whether or not a player is specified, and when it is determined that they are the same, in order to store the score stored at the gaming machine side as the current score in the main score storage means, For example, when a gaming device fails and the failed gaming device is replaced with a new gaming device and connected to a gaming machine to initiate communication, the same player as the player who was playing the game at the time of the failure When the player causes the player specifying information reading means to read the player specifying information so as to continue the game, the same determining means determines that they are the same, and the game is performed at the stage before switching to a new gaming device. The game that performed The lifting points are being taken over stored in serving a master point storage means a new gaming device that has been replaced, it is possible the player to continue the game without detriment.

  (5-5) In the gaming machine of the above (5-4), the storage control means communicates until a predetermined time (20 minutes) elapses after communication between the gaming machine and the gaming machine is interrupted. On the condition that the starting point is started, the above-mentioned point storing control is performed (the backup value is not corrected if 20 minutes or more have passed even if it is determined that the C-IDs are the same). .

  According to such a configuration, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the communication between the gaming machine and the gaming device is interrupted, the transmitted score is stored in the main score storage means as the current score. Since the holding point storage control is not performed, for example, it is possible to prevent waste of performing the holding point storage control even when a time far exceeding the replacement work time for replacing with a new gaming device has elapsed.

(5-6) In the gaming machine of the above (5-5), the points that are updated on the gaming machine side in accordance with the use in the game and the occurrence of winnings are periodically sent from the gaming machine (FIG. 24; Determination means (FIG. 5, FIG. 118; number of game balls and points) for determining the consistency between the received score and the score stored in the score storage means when received every 200 ms) Match)
Control for transmitting to the gaming machine correction information for correcting the score stored in the gaming machine to the score stored in the gaming point storage means when it is determined as inconsistent by the determining means. Correction information transmission control means (transmission of a correction instruction command) to be performed may be included.

  According to such a configuration, the points stored on the gaming device side and the gaming machine side due to anomalies in the size of the stored points on the gaming machine side due to cheating or other causes Even if the stored score does not match, the score stored on the gaming machine side can be corrected to the score stored on the gaming device side.

(6-1) The present invention includes a communication unit that is capable of playing a game with points and that communicates with a gaming device that adds points using the game value owned by the player, and in accordance with the occurrence of a prize. A gaming machine (pachinko machine 2, slot machine 2S) to which points are added,
Specific means (microcomputer for game machine control, addition ball counter, subtraction ball counter) for identifying the amount of change in points according to the use in the game and the occurrence of winnings,
A point storage means (game ball counter) for storing points;
A score update means (payout control units 17 and 117) for updating the score stored in the score storage means according to the amount of change;
Information transmission control means (FIG. 44; number of additional balls, control for transmitting the update information that can identify the amount of change and the score stored in the score storage means from the communication unit to the gaming device) Send a motion response that includes the number of subtraction balls and the number of game balls)
Player identification information storage means (FIG. 6, FIG. 119; current player game history data storage section of the display effect control section 292) for storing player identification information for identifying a player who performs a game;
Commencement of communication with the gaming device as information for determining the identity of the player who plays the game after the connection between the gaming machine and the gaming device and the player who played the game before the connection At this time, player identification information transmission control means (FIGS. 27, 37, 65) for controlling to transmit the player identification information stored in the player identification information storage means from the communication unit to the gaming device. 82 FIG. 82; Sending a recovery response including C-ID).

  According to such a configuration, when the gaming device is connected to the gaming machine and communication is started, the player who plays the game after connecting the gaming machine and the gaming device performs the game before the connection. Since the player specifying information stored in the player specifying information storage means is transmitted from the communication unit to the gaming device as information for determining the identity with the player who has been connected, the game is performed after connection. The identity of the player and the player who played the game before the connection can be determined, and the inconvenience of being regarded as the same player even though they are different players can be prevented.

(6-2) In the gaming machine of (6-1), the information transmission control unit sends the update information and the points stored in the point storage unit from the communication unit to the gaming device. Control to send periodically (Fig. 24; every 200ms),
When the communication unit determines that there is inconsistency as a result of determining the consistency between the update result of the score based on the update information by the gaming device and the score stored in the score storage means Receiving correction information transmitted from the gaming device (receiving a correction instruction command),
A score correction means for correcting the score stored in the score storage means based on the received correction information (the payout control unit 117 corrects the score according to the correction instruction command); It may be configured.

  According to such a configuration, the points stored on the gaming device side and the gaming machine side due to anomalies in the size of the stored points on the gaming machine side due to cheating or other causes Even if the stored score does not match, the score stored on the gaming machine side can be corrected to the score stored on the gaming device side.

(7-1) In the present invention, a game with a score is possible, and a gaming machine (pachinko machine 2, slot machine 2S) to which a score is added according to the occurrence of a prize, and a game value owned by the player A gaming device (card unit 3) that adds points by using (the prepaid balance, the number of balls, or the number of balls) and is connected so as to be communicable with the gaming machine (connecting wiring with the connectors 330, 20, 220) A gaming system comprising:
The gaming machine is
Specific means (microcomputer for game machine control, addition ball counter, subtraction ball counter, addition number) for identifying the amount of change in points (number of balls to be added, number of balls to be subtracted) depending on the use of the game and the occurrence of winnings Counter, subtraction number counter)
Sub-point storage means for storing points (game ball counter, point counter),
Sub-point update means (payout control unit 17, payout control unit 117) for updating the points stored in the sub-point storage unit according to the amount of change;
Information transmission control means (FIG. 44; number of added balls, number of subtracted balls) for performing control to transmit the update information that can identify the amount of change and the score stored in the secondary score storage means to the gaming device. , Send an action response containing the number of game balls),
Player identification information storage means (FIG. 121, FIG. 122; current game of display effect control unit 292) that stores player identification information (C-ID or the like) that can identify a player who is playing a game on the gaming machine. Game history data storage unit),
Player identification information transmission control means (FIG. 27, FIG. 27) for controlling to transmit the player identification information stored in the player identification information storage means to the gaming apparatus at the start of communication with the gaming apparatus. 37, 65 to 82; send a recovery response including the C-ID),
The gaming device is:
Main point storage means for storing points (RAM for storing “number of game balls”, RAM for storing “number of points”);
Information receiving means (CU communication control unit 80) for receiving the update information;
A score update unit (main control unit 323) for updating the score stored in the main score storage unit based on the update information;
Player specifying information reading means (such as a card reader / writer 327) for reading player specifying information for specifying a player who plays a game with the gaming machine;
The player identification information read by the player identification information reading means and the player identification information transmitted by the control of the player identification information transmission control means when communication is started with the connection to the gaming machine The same determination means for determining whether or not the same player is specified (FIGS. 68 to 70, 73, 74, 77, 78, and 81; the C-ID included in the recovery response) A main control unit 323) for determining the identity with the C-ID of the inserted card;
External output control means (FIGS. 68 to 70, FIG. 73, FIG. 73) that performs control to externally output the holding points transmitted by the control of the information transmission control means when the same determination means determines that they are not the same. 74, 77, 78, and 81).

  According to such a configuration, since the point management is performed on the gaming device side, it is not necessary to provide the point management function on the gaming machine side, and accordingly, the cost of the gaming machine can be suppressed as much as possible. .

  In particular, gaming machines tend to have a shorter replacement cycle in a game arcade than gaming devices in order to be able to provide more highly-oriented games quickly. For that reason, there is an advantage that the running cost of the game hall where the gaming machine is introduced can be reduced by holding the point management function not on the gaming machine side but on the gaming device side to reduce the cost of the gaming machine. is there.

  In addition, when the gaming device is connected to the gaming machine and communication is started, the player identification information transmitted from the gaming device and the player identification information read by the player identification information reading means are the same. It is determined whether or not the player is specified. When it is determined that the players are not the same, the points transmitted by the control of the information transmission control means, that is, the points stored on the gaming machine side are output to the outside. Therefore, by storing and saving the score output externally in the management device or the like, it is possible to compensate for any loss according to the score stored and saved by the player.

  (7-2) In the gaming system of (7-1), when the external output control means determines that they are not the same by the same determination means, transmission is performed under the control of the player specifying information transmission control means. The player identification information that has been transmitted is also output to the outside (in the steps indicated by the broken lines in FIGS. 68 to 70, 73, 74, 77, 78, and 81, the C-ID is also transmitted). May be configured.

  According to such a configuration, the player specifying information that has been externally output is also stored and held, thereby comparing the player specifying information of the player with the player specifying information stored and held. It is possible to determine the identity of the player, and it is possible to compensate for the loss after confirming the identity of the player.

(7-3) In the gaming system according to (7-1) or (7-2), the information transmission control means uses the update information and the points stored in the sub-point storage means. Control to send to the gaming device periodically (Figure 24; every 200ms),
The gaming device is:
Determining means for determining the consistency between the regularly transmitted points and the points stored in the main point storing means (FIG. 5, FIG. 118; determining whether the number of game balls or points matches) When,
When the determination means determines that the inconsistency is inconsistent, correction information for correcting the score stored in the auxiliary score storage means to the score stored in the main score storage means is the gaming machine. (Send correction command)
The gaming machine corrects the score stored in the secondary score storage unit based on the transmitted correction information (the payout control unit 17 corrects the number of game balls according to the correction instruction command). The payout control unit 117 may be configured to include the correction of the number of points according to the correction instruction command.

  According to such a configuration, the points stored on the gaming device side and the gaming machine side due to anomalies in the size of the stored points on the gaming machine side due to cheating or other causes Even if the stored score does not match, the score stored on the gaming machine side can be corrected to the score stored on the gaming device side.

(7-4) According to another aspect of the present invention, a communication unit that communicates with a gaming machine (pachinko machine 2, slot machine 2S) that can be played with points and that has points added in accordance with the occurrence of a prize ( A gaming device (card unit 3) that includes a CU communication control unit 80) and adds points using a player's own gaming value (prepaid balance, number of balls, or number of balls),
A point storage means for storing points (RAM for storing “number of game balls”, RAM for storing “number of points”);
A player specifying information reading means (such as a card reader / writer 327) for reading player specifying information (C-ID or the like) for specifying a player who plays a game with the gaming machine;
The communication unit updates information that can identify the amount of change in points according to the use of a game and the occurrence of a prize, and the possession that is updated on the gaming machine side according to the use of the game and the occurrence of a prize. Point and the player specifying information stored in the gaming machine are received from the gaming machine (FIG. 44; an operation response including the number of added balls, the number of subtracted balls, the number of game balls is received),
The gaming device further includes:
A score update unit (main control unit 323) for updating the score stored in the score storage unit based on the update information received by the communication unit;
When communication is started after being connected to the gaming machine, the same player is specified by the player specifying information read by the player specifying information reading means and the player specifying information received by the communication unit. Identical determination means for determining whether or not to be performed (FIGS. 68 to 70, 73, 74, 77, 78, and 81; C-ID included in the recovery response and C-ID of the inserted card) A main control unit 323) for determining the identity with
When the same determination means determines that the points are the same, a holding point external output means (FIGS. 68 to 70, 73, 74, 77, 78) outputs the holding points received by the communication unit to the outside. , Steps indicated by broken lines in FIG. 81).

  According to such a configuration, since the point management is performed on the gaming device side, it is not necessary to provide the point management function on the gaming machine side, and accordingly, the cost of the gaming machine can be suppressed as much as possible. .

  In particular, gaming machines tend to have a shorter replacement cycle in a game arcade than gaming devices in order to be able to provide more highly-oriented games quickly. For that reason, there is an advantage that the running cost of the game hall where the gaming machine is introduced can be reduced by holding the point management function not on the gaming machine side but on the gaming device side to reduce the cost of the gaming machine. is there.

  In addition, when the gaming device is connected to the gaming machine and communication is started, the player identification information transmitted from the gaming device and the player identification information read by the player identification information reading means are the same. It is determined whether or not the player is specified. When it is determined that the players are not the same, the points transmitted by the control of the information transmission control means, that is, the points stored on the gaming machine side are output to the outside. Therefore, by storing and saving the score output externally in the management device or the like, it is possible to compensate for any loss according to the score stored and saved by the player.

  (7-5) In the gaming apparatus of (7-4), the player specifying information received by the communication unit when the holding point external output means is determined not to be the same by the same determination means Are also configured to perform external output control (in the steps indicated by the broken lines in FIGS. 68 to 70, 73, 74, 77, 78, and 81, the C-ID is also transmitted). Also good.

  According to such a configuration, the player specifying information that has been externally output is also stored and held, thereby comparing the player specifying information of the player with the player specifying information stored and held. It is possible to determine the identity of the player, and it is possible to compensate for the loss after confirming the identity of the player.

(7-6) In the gaming device of (7-4) or (7-5) above, the gaming machine uses the gaming machine and updates points on the gaming machine side in response to the occurrence of a prize from the gaming machine. When receiving periodically (FIG. 24; every 200 ms), determination means for determining the consistency between the received score and the score stored in the score storage means (FIGS. 5 and 118; Match the number of game balls and points)
Control for transmitting to the gaming machine correction information for correcting the score stored in the gaming machine to the score stored in the gaming point storage means when it is determined as inconsistent by the determining means. Correction information transmission control means (transmission of a correction instruction command) to be performed may be included.

  According to such a configuration, the points stored on the gaming device side and the gaming machine side due to anomalies in the size of the stored points on the gaming machine side due to cheating or other causes Even if the stored score does not match, the score stored on the gaming machine side can be corrected to the score stored on the gaming device side.

(8-1) The present invention is connected to a gaming machine (pachinko machine 2, slot machine 2S) in which a game is played by a player so as to be communicable with the gaming machine (connecting wiring with connectors 330, 20, 220), A gaming system comprising a gaming device (card unit 3) that enables gaming on the gaming machine using a gaming value (a prepaid balance, the number of balls, or the number of balls) owned by the player,
The gaming machine is
Game history data storage means for storing game history data generated by execution of a game on the gaming machine (FIGS. 6 and 119; the P game history data storage unit of the display effect control unit 292 and the S game) History data storage)
Game history data display means (display 54, liquid crystal display 510) for displaying game history data stored in the game history data storage means;
Game history data erasure means (RAM clear switch 292) for erasing at least a part of the game history data stored in the game history data storage means;
When the game history data is erased by the game history data erasure means, clear command transmission control means (FIG. 6, FIG. 119; game history data for sending a clear notification) that controls to send a clear command to the gaming device. Management unit 291),
The gaming device is:
A game device-side game history data display means (display 312) for executing history display based on game history data;
Clear processing means (clear processing section of the game history data management section 291) for performing clear processing of the history display in accordance with a clear command transmitted under the control of the clear command transmission control means.

  According to such a configuration, when at least a part of the game history data is erased on the gaming machine side, a clear command is transmitted to the gaming device, and the history display clear process is performed on the gaming device side according to the clear command. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the history display from being flawed on the gaming machine side and the gaming device side.

(8-2) In the gaming system according to (8-1), the gaming history data storage means includes:
Today's history data storage unit for storing today's game history data (today's storage area within the storage area for 10 days),
Including a past history data storage unit that stores game history data before the previous day (a storage area other than today within a storage area for 10 days),
The game history data erasure means shifts and stores the stored data in the today's data storage unit to the past history data storage unit and deletes the stored data in the today's history data storage unit (1 in the storage area for 10 days). The data of the current storage area may be erased by deleting the data of the oldest storage area and shifting the data of each storage area to the old storage area one by one).

  According to such a configuration, on the gaming machine side, today's game history data stored in the today's history data storage unit is shifted and stored in the past history data storage unit that stores the game history data before the previous day. At the same time, since the stored data in the history data storage unit of today is erased, the game history data of today can be stored and held as past game history data before the previous day on the gaming machine side, and the past game history data can be stored. It can also be used effectively.

(8-3) In the gaming system according to (8-1) or (8-2) above, the gaming machine performs control for transmitting gaming data generated during gaming to the gaming device. Means (game history data management unit 291 for transmitting game data),
The gaming device is configured to update and store game history data based on game data transmitted under the control of the game data transmission control unit (the P game in the data storage unit 392). Including a history data storage unit and this S game history data storage unit)
The gaming device side game history data display means displays the game history data based on the game history data stored in the game history data update storage means (this P game history data storage unit or this S game game). The game history data may be displayed based on the game history data stored in the history data storage unit).

  According to such a configuration, the game history data is updated and stored on the gaming device side based on the game data generated during the game transmitted from the gaming machine, and based on the stored game history data. Since the game history data is displayed by the game device side game history data display means, the game history data displayed on the game device can be updated and stored separately from the gaming machine.

(8-4) Another aspect of the present invention includes a communication unit (CU communication control unit 80) that communicates with a gaming machine (pachinko machine 2, slot machine 2S) in which a player performs a game, and is owned by the player. A gaming device (card unit 3) that enables a game in the gaming machine using a gaming value (a prepaid balance, a number of balls, or a number of balls),
A game apparatus-side game history data display means (display 312) for executing history display based on game history data generated by executing the game in the gaming machine;
The communication unit receives a clear command when at least a part of the game history data stored in the gaming machine is erased (FIG. 6, FIG. 119; the clear transmitted from the game history data management unit 291). Receive notifications),
The gaming apparatus further includes a clear processing means (a clear processing unit of the game history data management unit 291) that performs a clear process of the history display in accordance with a clear command received by the communication unit.

  According to such a configuration, when at least a part of the game history data is erased on the gaming machine side, a clear command is transmitted to the gaming device, and the history display clear process is performed on the gaming device side according to the clear command. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the history display from being flawed on the gaming machine side and the gaming device side.

(8-5) In the gaming machine according to (8-4), the communication unit receives game data generated during a game of the gaming machine (game data transmitted from the game history data management unit 291). Receive)
The gaming device includes a game history data update storage unit (a game history data storage unit of the P storage game data storage unit 392 or a game unit S of the data storage unit 392) that updates and stores game history data based on the game data received by the communication unit. A table game history data storage unit),
The gaming device side game history data display means displays the game history data based on the game history data stored in the game history data update storage means (this P game history data storage unit or this S game game). The game history data may be displayed based on the game history data stored in the history data storage unit).

  According to such a configuration, the game history data is updated and stored on the gaming device side based on the game data generated during the game transmitted from the gaming machine, and based on the stored game history data. Since the game history data is displayed by the game device side game history data display means, the game history data displayed on the game device can be updated and stored separately from the gaming machine.

(9-1) The present invention includes a communication unit (P-unit communication control unit 81, S-unit communication control unit 82) that communicates with a gaming device that enables a player's valuable value to be used in a game. A game machine (pachinko machine 2, slot machine 2S) in which a game medium is launched to
Game history data storage means (FIG. 6, FIG. 119; the P-unit game history data storage unit of the display effect control unit 292) for storing game history data generated by the execution of the game on the gaming machine;
Game history data display means (display 54) for displaying the game history data stored in the game history data storage means;
Game history data erasure means (RAM clear switch 292) for erasing at least a part of the game history data stored in the game history data storage means;
When the game history data is erased by the game history data erasure means, a control is performed to transmit a clear command for clearing a history display to be executed based on the game history data in the gaming device to the gaming device. Clear command transmission control means (FIGS. 6 and 119; game history data management unit 291 that transmits a clear notification).

  According to such a configuration, when at least a part of the game history data is erased on the gaming machine side, a clear command is transmitted to the gaming device, and the history display clear process is performed on the gaming device side according to the clear command. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the history display from being flawed on the gaming machine side and the gaming device side.

(9-2) In the gaming machine of (9-1), the game history data storage means is
Today's history data storage unit for storing today's game history data (today's storage area within the storage area for 10 days),
Including a past history data storage unit that stores game history data before the previous day (a storage area other than today within a storage area for 10 days),
The game history data erasure means shifts and stores the stored data in the today's data storage unit to the past history data storage unit and deletes the stored data in the today's history data storage unit (1 in the storage area for 10 days). The old storage area data is erased and the data in each storage area is shifted one by one to the old storage area, thereby deleting the current storage area data).

  According to such a configuration, on the gaming machine side, today's game history data stored in the today's history data storage unit is shifted and stored in the past history data storage unit that stores the game history data before the previous day. At the same time, since the stored data in the history data storage unit of today is erased, the game history data of today can be stored and held as past game history data before the previous day on the gaming machine side, and the past game history data can be stored. It can also be used effectively.

  (9-3) In the gaming machine of the above (9-1) or (9-2), game data transmission control means (transmitting game data) for performing control for transmitting game data generated during a game to the gaming device The game history data management unit 291) may be further included.

  According to such a configuration, the game history data can be updated and stored on the gaming device side based on the game data generated during the game transmitted from the gaming machine, and the game displayed on the gaming device The history data can be updated and stored separately from the gaming machine.

(10-1) The present invention is connected to a gaming machine (pachinko machine 2, slot machine 2S) in which a game is played by a player so as to be communicable with the gaming machine (connecting wiring with connectors 330, 20, 220), A gaming system comprising a gaming device (card unit 3) that enables gaming on the gaming machine using a gaming value (a prepaid balance, the number of balls, or the number of balls) owned by the player,
The gaming machine is
Game history data storage means for storing game history data generated by execution of a game on the gaming machine (FIGS. 121 and 122; the P game history data storage unit of the display effect control unit 292 and the S game) History data storage)
Game history data display means (display 54, liquid crystal display 510) for displaying game history data stored in the game history data storage means,
The gaming device is:
A game device-side game history data display means (display 312) for executing history display based on game history data;
When the information (clear command) for erasing at least a part of the game history data stored in the game history data storage means is received, the history display is cleared (the data storage unit 391). The game history data stored in the base game history data storage unit) and information (clear command) for deleting at least a part of the game history data stored in the game history data storage means Clear processing means (clear processing unit of the game history data management unit 391) for performing control to transmit to the gaming machine.

  According to such a configuration, the history display clear process is performed on the gaming device side in accordance with the information to erase at least a part of the game history data, and the game history data stored in the game history data storage means Since control for transmitting at least part of the information to the gaming machine is performed, at least part of the game history data can be erased on the gaming machine side, and the gaming machine side and the gaming device side can It is possible to prevent wrinkles in the history display.

  (10-2) In the gaming system according to (10-1), the gaming device stores information indicating that at least a part of the gaming history data stored in the gaming history data storage means is erased. The receiving means (FIG. 4, FIG. 116; the external communication part 324 received from the management computer 1 for hall | holes) which receives from the management apparatus installed in the may be comprised.

  According to such a configuration, information for erasing at least a part of the game history data stored in the game history data storage means can be simultaneously distributed from a management device to a plurality of gaming machines installed in the game hall. It is possible to increase the efficiency of the work of erasing at least a part of the game history data stored in the game history data storage means.

(10-3) In the gaming system according to (10-1) or (10-2), the gaming machine erases at least a part of the gaming history data stored in the gaming history data storage means. Including history data erasing means (a clear processing part of the game history data management part 291),
Today's history data storage unit for storing today's game history data (today's storage area within the storage area for 10 days),
Including a past history data storage unit that stores game history data before the previous day (a storage area other than today within a storage area for 10 days),
The game history data erasure means shifts and stores the stored data in the today's data storage unit to the past history data storage unit and deletes the stored data in the today's history data storage unit (1 in the storage area for 10 days). The data of the current storage area may be erased by deleting the data of the oldest storage area and shifting the data of each storage area to the old storage area one by one).

  According to such a configuration, on the gaming machine side, today's game history data stored in the today's history data storage unit is shifted and stored in the past history data storage unit that stores the game history data before the previous day. At the same time, since the stored data in the history data storage unit of today is erased, the game history data of today can be stored and held as past game history data before the previous day on the gaming machine side, and the past game history data can be stored. It can also be used effectively.

(10-4) In the gaming system according to any one of (10-1) to (10-3), the gaming machine performs control for transmitting game data generated during the game to the gaming device. Including data transmission control means (game history data management unit 291 for transmitting game data),
The gaming device is configured to update and store game history data based on game data transmitted under the control of the game data transmission control unit (the P game in the data storage unit 392). Including a history data storage unit and this S game history data storage unit)
The gaming device side game history data display means displays the game history data based on the game history data stored in the game history data update storage means (this P game history data storage unit or this S game game). The game history data may be displayed based on the game history data stored in the history data storage unit).

  According to such a configuration, the game history data is updated and stored on the gaming device side based on the game data generated during the game transmitted from the gaming machine, and based on the stored game history data. Since the game history data is displayed by the game device side game history data display means, the game history data displayed on the game device can be updated and stored separately from the gaming machine.

(10-5) Another aspect of the present invention includes a communication unit (CU communication control unit 80) that communicates with a gaming machine (pachinko machine 2, slot machine 2S) in which a game is played by a player. A gaming device (card unit 3) that enables a game in the gaming machine using a gaming value (a prepaid balance, a number of balls, or a number of balls),
A game apparatus-side game history data display means (display 312) for executing history display based on game history data generated by executing the game in the gaming machine;
When receiving information to erase at least a part of the game history data stored in the gaming machine, the history display is cleared and the game history stored in the game history data storage means Clear processing means (clear processing unit of the game history data management unit 291) is further provided for performing control to transmit information indicating that at least a part of the data is to be erased to the gaming machine.

  According to such a configuration, when the information indicating that at least a part of the game history data is to be deleted is received on the gaming machine side, the history display is cleared and stored in the game history data storage means. Since information indicating that at least a part of the game history data is deleted is transmitted to the gaming machine, it is possible to prevent the history display from being flawed on the gaming machine side and the gaming device side.

  (10-6) In the gaming machine according to (10-5), the management device in which information indicating that at least a part of the gaming history data stored in the gaming history data storage means is erased is installed in the gaming hall May be configured to include receiving means (FIG. 4, FIG. 116; external communication unit 324 receiving from the hall management computer 1).

  According to such a configuration, information for erasing at least a part of the game history data stored in the game history data storage means can be simultaneously distributed from a management device to a plurality of gaming machines installed in the game hall. It is possible to increase the efficiency of the work of erasing at least a part of the game history data stored in the game history data storage means.

(10-7) In the gaming machine of (10-5) or (10-6), the communication unit receives game data generated during a game of the gaming machine (transmits from the game history data management unit 291) Received game data)
The gaming device includes a game history data update storage unit (a game history data storage unit of the P storage game data storage unit 392 or a game unit S of the data storage unit 392) that updates and stores game history data based on the game data received by the communication unit. A table game history data storage unit),
The gaming device side game history data display means displays the game history data based on the game history data stored in the game history data update storage means (this P game history data storage unit or this S game game). The game history data may be displayed based on the game history data stored in the history data storage unit).

  According to such a configuration, the game history data is updated and stored on the gaming device side based on the game data generated during the game transmitted from the gaming machine, and based on the stored game history data. Since the game history data is displayed by the game device side game history data display means, the game history data displayed on the game device can be updated and stored separately from the gaming machine.

(11-1) The present invention is a gaming machine (pachinko machine 2, slot machine 2S, card unit 3, card issuing device, Z counter, clearing device, hall management device, prize exchange device, etc.) installed in the game hall Because
A first control unit (main control unit 323 or main control board 16, 116) and a second control unit (CU communication control unit 80 or payout control unit 17, 117) connected to be communicable with each other;
The first control means includes first identification information for identifying the first control means (SID of the main control unit or SID of the main control board) and the second control means that is an authentication partner. Second identification information for identifying (SID of CU communication control unit or SID of payout control unit) is stored (FIG. 7; EEPROM 808),
The second control means stores the second identification information and the first identification information (FIG. 7; ROM 809, EEPROM 813),
The first control means and the second control means perform authentication processing for mutual authentication (authentication sequence of FIGS. 31 and 32),
The authentication process includes
A challenge code (challenge code A in FIG. 32) is generated using the second identification information (SID of the CU communication control unit stored in the ROM 809 in FIG. 7) stored in the second control means. To the first control means (CU communication control unit serial ID authentication response 1), and the first control means stores the second identification information (CU communication control stored in the EEPROM 808). SID), a response code (response code A in FIG. 32) is generated from the received challenge code and returned to the second control means (CU communication control unit serial ID authentication request 2), In the second control means, the response received using the stored second identification information (the SID of the CU communication control unit stored in the ROM 809). The first challenge response authentication process of determining the appropriateness of code and (in CU communication control unit 80 determines the appropriateness of the response code received with the SID of the CU communication control unit),
A challenge code is generated using the first identification information stored in the first control means (SID of the main control unit stored in the EEPROM 808 in FIG. 7) and transmitted to the second control means. In the second control means, the received first identification information (SID of the main control unit stored in the EEPROM 813 in FIG. 7) is received by the second control means. A response code (response code in FIG. 31) is generated from the challenge code and returned to the first control means (BB serial ID authentication response 2), and the first control means stores the first code stored in the first control means. Second challenge response authentication process for determining the suitability of the received response code using the identification information (the main control unit 323 receives the received response The appropriateness of over de including by determining) and using the SID of the main control unit.

  According to such a configuration, the first control means and the second control means transmit the challenge code from one control means to the other control means and use the identification information stored in the other control means. Because the challenge-response authentication is performed, in which a response code is generated from the received challenge code and sent back to one control means, the challenge code and response code sent and received between both control means are leaked. Even so, it is difficult to specify the stored identification information, and it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts on the control means due to leakage of the identification information as much as possible.

  (11-2) In the gaming machine of the above (11-1), the gaming machine may be configured as a gaming machine (pachinko machine 2) in which a gaming medium is played by launching a gaming medium.

  According to such a configuration, in the gaming machine in which a game is played by launching a game medium in the game area, the first control means and the second control means store the pair identification information used for mutual authentication. A challenge code is transmitted from one control means to the other control means, a response code is generated from the challenge code received using the identification information stored in the other control means, and returned to the one control means. Because challenge-response authentication is performed, it is difficult to specify the stored identification information even if a challenge code or response code transmitted / received between both control means is leaked, Unauthorized acts on the control means due to the leakage of identification information can be prevented as much as possible.

  (11-3) In the gaming machine according to (11-1), the gaming machine includes a variable display device capable of changing a display state, and a game can be started by setting a bet amount for one game. In addition, when one display is completed by displaying and displaying the display result of the variable display device, and the display result that is derived and displayed becomes a predetermined display result, a gaming machine that can generate a prize (Slot machine 2S) may be configured.

  According to such a configuration, the variable display device whose display state can be changed is provided, and the game can be started by setting the number of bets for one game, and the display result of the variable display device is derived and displayed. In the gaming machine in which a winning can be generated when one game is finished and the derived display result becomes a predetermined display result, the first control means and the second control means Stores the identification information of the pair used for mutual authentication, and transmits the challenge code from one control means to the other control means and receives the challenge code received using the identification information stored in the other control means Since a response code is generated and sent back to one control means, challenge-response authentication is performed. Even responsible sales person or response code is leaked, it is difficult to identify the identification information stored, can be prevented as much as possible fraud to the control unit due to leakage of the identification information.

(11-4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (11-1) to (11-3), the first control unit and the second control unit are a pair used for mutual authentication. Stores authentication information (EEPROM 808, 813 stores an authentication key consisting of a common key)
The authentication process further includes:
The first control means executes arithmetic processing using the authentication information and transmits the result data of the arithmetic processing to the second control means (the main control unit uses the authentication key stored in the EEPROM 808). The encrypted random number B obtained by encrypting the random number B is generated and transmitted to the CU communication control unit as the device authentication request 2 together with the MAC), and the second control unit uses the authentication information for the result data. A first authentication process that performs arithmetic processing and checks consistency with the result data (the CU communication control unit determines consistency with the MAC as a plaintext random number B that is a composite of the received random number B); ,
The second control means executes arithmetic processing using the authentication information and transmits the result data of the arithmetic processing to the first control means (the authentication key stored in the EEPROM 813 by the CU communication control unit) Is used to generate an encrypted random number A obtained by encrypting the random number A and transmit it together with the MAC as a device authentication response 1 to the main control unit), and the first control means uses the authentication information for the result data A second authentication process that performs arithmetic processing and checks the consistency with the result data (in the main communication control unit, the consistency with the MAC is determined as a plaintext random number A combined with the received random number A); May be included.

  According to such a configuration, authentication processing using the pair authentication information used for mutual authentication stored in the first control means and the second control means is also executed. Mutual authentication becomes possible and security is improved. Moreover, since this authentication process also transmits / receives the result data obtained by executing the calculation process using the stored authentication information, even if the transmitted / received result data leaks out, the authentication information It is difficult to specify and it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts against the control means due to information leakage as much as possible.

  (11-5) In the gaming machine described in (11-4) above, the first control unit and the second control unit are appropriate as a result of the first authentication process and the second authentication process. After obtaining a certain authentication, encryption communication may be performed using the authentication information (a process of performing communication using the session key in FIG. 29).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to confirm that the authentication information is correct by obtaining authentication that the results of the first authentication process and the second authentication process using the authentication information stored in each other are appropriate. After that, in order to perform encryption communication with each other using the authentication information, it is possible to perform appropriate encryption communication with correct authentication information.

(12-1) A gaming machine (pachinko machine 2, slot machine 2S) in which a game is played by a player is connected to the gaming machine so as to be communicable (connecting wiring with connectors 330, 20, 220), and a recording medium (card ) And using the valuable value (prepaid balance, number of balls, or number of stored balls) possessed by the player specified by the recorded information recorded on the recording medium, a game that enables a game on the gaming machine A gaming system comprising a gaming device (card unit 3),
The gaming device is:
A test mode detection means (a card reader / writer 327 for detecting an inserted test card) for detecting a transition to a test mode for confirming the operation of the gaming machine;
Test mode notification means for notifying the gaming machine that the test mode detection means has detected the transition to the test mode (game history data management unit 391 for transmitting a test hit mode notification);
The gaming machine is
Normal game data update means for updating game history data generated by a player playing a game during a normal game that has not been notified by the test mode notification means (FIGS. 6 and 119; effect control unit for display device) 292 P game history data storage unit and S game history data storage unit)
Based on the notification from the test mode notification means, the gaming machine is set to a state in which the game history data is not updated by the normal game data update means (FIGS. 6, 119; Depending on the function, the game history data is not stored in the P game history data storage unit or the S game history data storage unit but is stored in the trial game history data storage unit).

  According to such a configuration, normal game-in-game data for updating game history data generated when a player plays a game during a normal game that has not been notified by the test mode notification means for confirming the operation of the gaming machine. Since the updating means is provided in the gaming machine, it is possible to aggregate the game history data during the normal game in the gaming machine.

  In addition, based on the fact that the gaming machine has been notified by the test mode notification means, the game history data is not updated by the normal game data update means, so it is distinguished from the game history data in the test mode. Only game history data during a normal game can be tabulated.

(12-2) In the gaming system described in (12-1) above, the gaming machine controls data transmission in the test mode for performing control to transmit the gaming history data in the testing mode to the gaming device. (FIG. 6, FIG. 119; game history data management unit 291 for transmitting game data in the test hit mode)
The gaming device displays the game history data in the test mode transmitted by the control of the data transmission control means in the test mode (the total is calculated by the action of the trial hit mode processing unit of the game history data management unit 391). The game history data in the trial hit mode may be displayed on the display 312).

  According to such a configuration, since game history data in the test mode is displayed by the gaming device, various adjustment operations can be performed while viewing the game history data in the test mode displayed on the gaming device. Work efficiency is improved.

  (12-3) In the gaming system according to (12-1) or (12-2) above, the gaming machine includes game history data generated when a player plays a game during the normal game, Alternatively, it may be configured to include data storage means during test mode (FIG. 6, FIG. 119; test hit game history data storage section of the display effect control section 292) for storing the game history data during the test mode. .

  According to such a configuration, since the gaming machine includes the test mode data storage means for storing the game history data in the test mode separately from the game history data in the normal game, the game in the normal game It is possible to store the game history data in the test mode separately from the history data.

  (12-4) In the gaming system according to (12-3) above, the data storage means during the test mode is configured to display a predetermined operation (an icon of a recount button displayed on the display 312) during the test mode. Based on the fact that the touch operation has been performed, the stored game history data is once cleared, and then the storage of the game history data in the test mode is resumed (the test hit mode based on the reception of the recounting notification) The processing unit may be configured to clear the memory of the trial hit game history data storage unit).

  According to such a configuration, based on a predetermined operation being performed during the test mode, the game history data stored in the data storage means during the test mode is once cleared and then a new game history during the test mode. In order to resume the data storage, for example, after performing various adjustment operations based on the game history data in the test mode, the game history data in the test mode is again added again in order to add up the adjusted operation data. As described above, it is possible to start counting the game history in the test mode from the beginning.

  (12-5) In the gaming system according to (12-3) or (12-4), the gaming machine displays the game history data during the test mode stored in the data storage means during the test mode. It may be configured to include data display control means during the test mode for performing control (a test hit mode processing unit for controlling the display devices 54 and 510 to display game history data in the test hit mode).

  According to such a configuration, since game history data in the test mode is displayed on the gaming machine, it is possible to perform various adjustment operations by looking at the game history data in the test mode displayed on the gaming machine. It becomes.

(12-6) In the gaming system according to any one of (12-1) to (12-5) above, the gaming machine can play a game by using a score, and the score is updated with the game. Includes point update means (game ball counter, point counter)
The score update means updates the score so that the score does not become a predetermined value or less during the test mode (addition of game balls (or score points based on reception of a game ball addition command (or score score addition command)) May be configured to perform (addition)).

  According to such a configuration, during the test mode, since the score does not become a predetermined value or less, it is possible to continue to collect the game history in the test mode regardless of the score.

(12-7) In the gaming system according to any one of (12-1) to (12-6) above, the gaming machine can play a game by using points,
The gaming device may provide a command (a game ball addition command or a score addition command) to the gaming machine when the score reaches a predetermined value during the test mode. ) Is transmitted to the ball update command transmission control means (FIG. 6, FIG. 119; trial hit mode processing unit of the game history data management unit 391).

  According to such a configuration, when the score becomes a predetermined value during the test mode, a command for setting the score to exceed the predetermined value is transmitted to the gaming machine. Thus, it is possible to provide a gaming apparatus having a function of outputting a command for counting game history data even after the score has reached a predetermined value.

(13-1) The present invention accepts a recording medium (card) and stores a player's valuable value (a prepaid balance, the number of balls, or the number of balls) specified by the recording information recorded on the recording medium. It is a gaming machine (pachinko machine 2, slot machine 2S) provided with a communication unit (P unit communication control unit 81, S unit communication control unit 82) that communicates with a gaming device (card unit 3) that can be used for gaming. And
Normal game data update means for updating game history data generated when a player plays a game during a normal game that has not received a test mode notification for confirming the operation of the gaming machine (FIG. 6). ; P display game history data storage unit of the display effect control unit 292),
Based on the notification of the test mode received from the gaming device, the game history data is not updated by the normal game data updating means (FIGS. 6 and 119; The game history data is not stored in the P game history data storage unit or the S game history data storage unit, but is stored in the trial hit game history data storage unit).

  According to such a configuration, normal game data update means for updating game history data generated by a player playing a game during a normal game that has not received a test mode notification for confirming the operation of the gaming machine. Therefore, the game history data during the normal game can be collected in the gaming machine.

  In addition, based on the fact that the gaming machine has received the notification of the test mode, the game history data is not updated by the normal game data update means, so that the normal game is distinguished from the game history data in the test mode. Only the game history data inside can be tabulated.

  (13-2) In the gaming machine described in the above (13-1), data transmission control means during test mode (FIGS. 6, 119) for performing control to transmit the game history data during the test mode to the gaming device. A game history data management unit 291) for transmitting game data in the trial hit mode may be included.

  According to such a configuration, since game history data in the test mode is displayed by the gaming device, various adjustment operations can be performed while viewing the game history data in the test mode displayed on the gaming device. Work efficiency is improved.

  (13-3) In the gaming machine according to (13-1) or (13-2), the test mode is separate from the game history data generated when a player plays a game during the normal game. It may be configured to include test-mode data storage means (FIG. 6, FIG. 119; trial hit game history data storage unit of the display effect control unit 292) for storing the game history data therein.

  According to such a configuration, since the gaming machine includes the test mode data storage means for storing the game history data in the test mode separately from the game history data in the normal game, the game in the normal game It is possible to store the game history data in the test mode separately from the history data.

  (13-4) In the gaming machine described in (13-3) above, the data storage means during the test mode is configured to perform a predetermined operation during the test mode (touch a recount button icon displayed on the display 312). The stored game history data is once cleared based on the operation being performed, and then the storage of the game history data in the test mode is resumed (test hit mode processing based on reception of the recount notification) May be configured to clear the memory of the trial hit game history data storage unit).

  According to such a configuration, based on a predetermined operation being performed during the test mode, the game history data stored in the data storage means during the test mode is once cleared and then a new game history during the test mode. In order to resume the data storage, for example, after performing various adjustment operations based on the game history data in the test mode, the game history data in the test mode is again added again in order to add up the adjusted operation data. As described above, it is possible to start counting the game history in the test mode from the beginning.

  (13-5) In the gaming machine according to (13-4), the gaming machine is in a test mode in which control is performed to display gaming history data in the test mode stored in the data storage means during the test mode. It may be configured to include data display control means (a test hit mode processing unit that performs control to display game history data in the test hit mode on the display units 54 and 510).

  According to such a configuration, since game history data in the test mode is displayed on the gaming machine, it is possible to perform various adjustment operations by looking at the game history data in the test mode displayed on the gaming machine. It becomes.

(13-6) In any of the above gaming machines (13-1) to (13-5), a point update means for updating a point used for a game with a game (game ball counter, Point counter)
The score update means updates the score so that the score does not become a predetermined value or less during the test mode (addition of game balls (or score points based on reception of a game ball addition command (or score score addition command)) May be configured to perform (addition)).

  According to such a configuration, during the test mode, since the score does not become a predetermined value or less, it is possible to continue to collect the game history in the test mode regardless of the score.

  (13-7) In the gaming machine according to (13-6), the score update means sets a score to the gaming machine when the score reaches a predetermined value during the test mode. Based on the fact that a command (game ball addition command or score points addition command) for exceeding the value is received from the gaming device, the score is updated so that the score does not become a predetermined value or less (or game ball addition command (or The game ball may be added (or the number of points is added) based on the reception of the number of points addition command).

  According to such a configuration, it is based on having received from the gaming device a command for setting the score exceeding the predetermined value to the gaming machine when the score reaches a predetermined value during the test mode. Because it is updated so that the score does not fall below the predetermined value, the game has a function of outputting a command for counting the game history data even after the score becomes the predetermined value in the test mode. An apparatus can be provided.

  The embodiment disclosed this time should be considered as illustrative in all points and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is defined by the terms of the claims, rather than the description above, and is intended to include any modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the terms of the claims.

  2 Pachinko machine, 2S slot machine, 3 card unit, 4 wooden frame, 5 front frame, 6 glass door, 10 glass door opening solenoid, 11 front frame opening solenoid, 12 glass door closing detector, 13 front frame closing detector, 16,116 Main control board, 17,117 payout control unit, 18 hitting motor, 20 connection unit, 26 game board, 309 card insertion / discharge port, 312 display, 319 replay button, 321 rental button, 322 return button 323 control unit, 324 external communication unit, 325 gaming machine communication unit, 327 card reader / writer, 330 connection unit, 32 junction path detection switch, 33 foul ball detection switch, 50 effect unit, 54 display.

Claims (5)

A gaming system comprising a gaming machine capable of playing a game with points, and a gaming device that is communicably connected to the gaming machine and is capable of converting a player's gaming value into a point,
Display means provided on at least one of the gaming machine and the gaming device;
Special state switching means for switching the gaming system to a special state for managers;
Display control means for controlling display of the display means,
The display control means can display the gaming machine information stored in the gaming machine and the gaming apparatus information stored in the gaming apparatus on the display means in the special state. , Gaming system. A gaming machine that has a connecting part for communicably connecting to a gaming device that can convert a gaming value owned by a player into points,
Display means;
Based on a switching signal for switching to a special state for an administrator, special state switching means for switching to the special state;
Gaming device information receiving means for receiving gaming device information stored in the gaming device from the gaming device;
Display control means for controlling display of the display means,
The display control means can display the gaming machine information stored in the gaming machine and the gaming apparatus information stored in the gaming apparatus on the display means in the special state. , Gaming machines. A gaming device comprising a connecting part for communicably connecting to a gaming machine capable of having a game with points, and capable of converting gaming value into points,
Display means;
Based on a switching signal for switching to a special state for an administrator, special state switching means for switching to the special state;
Gaming machine information receiving means for receiving gaming machine information stored in the gaming machine from the gaming machine;
Display control means for controlling display of the display means,
The display control means can display the gaming machine information stored in the gaming machine and the gaming apparatus information stored in the gaming apparatus on the display means in the special state. , Gaming equipment. A gaming machine capable of converting a gaming value owned by a player into a score and having a connection part for connecting to a gaming device having a display means so as to be able to communicate,
The gaming machine information stored in the gaming machine is displayed on the display unit when the gaming machine displays the gaming machine information stored in the gaming machine on the display unit in a special state for managers. A gaming machine comprising a gaming machine information transmitting means for transmitting the gaming machine information to the gaming device to enable the gaming machine information. A gaming device capable of playing a game by holding points and having a connecting portion for communicatively connecting to a gaming machine having a display means, and capable of converting a player's gaming value into a holding point,
The gaming device information stored in the gaming device is displayed on the display means when the gaming machine displays the gaming machine information stored in the gaming machine in the special state for the manager on the display means. In order to enable, a gaming apparatus comprising gaming apparatus information transmitting means for transmitting the gaming apparatus information to the gaming machine.

Images